WO2021044895A1 - Wireless communication network device, wireless communication terminal, wireless communication system, and communication method - Google Patents

Wireless communication network device, wireless communication terminal, wireless communication system, and communication method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021044895A1
WO2021044895A1 PCT/JP2020/031945 JP2020031945W WO2021044895A1 WO 2021044895 A1 WO2021044895 A1 WO 2021044895A1 JP 2020031945 W JP2020031945 W JP 2020031945W WO 2021044895 A1 WO2021044895 A1 WO 2021044895A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
mno
wireless communication
information
group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/031945
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
晋介 宇賀
正幸 中澤
友江　直仁
邦之 鈴木
Original Assignee
三菱電機株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 三菱電機株式会社 filed Critical 三菱電機株式会社
Priority to JP2021543705A priority Critical patent/JPWO2021044895A1/ja
Priority to CN202080061363.XA priority patent/CN114303418B/en
Publication of WO2021044895A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021044895A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/18—Selecting a network or a communication service
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00—Network data management
    • H04W8/18—Processing of user or subscriber data, e.g. subscribed services, user preferences or user profiles; Transfer of user or subscriber data

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a line communication network device, a wireless communication terminal, a wireless communication system, and a communication method, and particularly relates to an MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) network connected to a plurality of MNO (Mobile Network Operator) networks.
  • MVNO Mobile Virtual Network Operator
  • MNO Mobile Network Operator
  • MVNO Mobile Virtual Network Operator
  • MVNO is implementing a business that utilizes the MNO network to provide users with services with a charge system different from that of MNO communication services and communication band guarantee services consisting of wireless communication terminals (hereinafter abbreviated as "terminals"). doing.
  • terminals wireless communication terminals
  • an MVNO that constructs an MVNO system in which a plurality of MNO networks are connected and provides a communication service by using an appropriate MNO line for each terminal.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a method of selecting an MNO network that is not limited to preset fixed parameters. In this selection method, the appropriate MNO network is selected for a single terminal, taking into account the parameters related to the connection.
  • the MNO network is not selected so that the communication of the entire terminal group including the terminal owned by the user is appropriate. Further, there is a problem that an appropriate MNO network cannot be selected for a terminal whose communication line is disconnected and parameters cannot be transmitted.
  • connection destinations of the terminals can be managed so as to meet the contract conditions in the entire terminal group, or the terminals can be used. In some cases, it was not possible to give the connection priority of the terminal based on the priority of the application device to be connected.
  • the network suitable for connecting a mobile communication terminal changes depending on the position of the mobile communication terminal, the network load, the presence or absence of a network failure, and the like.
  • an object of the present disclosure is to provide a technique capable of optimizing communication for a terminal group of wireless communication terminals.
  • the wireless communication network device is a wireless communication network device that performs wireless communication with a wireless communication terminal connectable to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to the plurality of MNO networks, and is a plurality of wireless communication network devices belonging to the terminal group.
  • a database that holds group communication information that is information related to communication of the wireless communication terminal and the group communication information held in the database are managed, and one or more for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information.
  • the MNO network and the session are selected, and based on the selection result, the wireless communication terminal is provided with an information management unit that controls establishment or switching of the session, and the group communication information is the MVNO network and the above.
  • connection information of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network, and the connection information of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group. It includes at least one of information on connection costs and communication line quality and communication line failure information notified once or repeatedly from the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group.
  • group communication information which is information related to communication of a plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to a terminal group, is managed, and one or more MNO networks and sessions are established for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information.
  • the selection is made, and the establishment or switching of the session of the wireless communication terminal is controlled based on the selection result. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize communication for a terminal group of wireless communication terminals.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on modification 1 of Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on modification 2 of Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 3 of Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal which concerns on the modification 4 of Embodiment 1. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 2. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 2. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 2.
  • FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 4.
  • FIG. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 4. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 4. It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 4. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the MVNO network apparatus which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 4. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 4. It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 5.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of a wireless communication system 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system 100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and is a wireless communication network device MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) network device 102, and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 105aa, 105ab. It includes 105ac, 105ba, 105bb, and 105bc.
  • the wireless communication terminal may be abbreviated as "terminal”
  • the communication session may be abbreviated as "session”. This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
  • first business operator there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 100.
  • the terminal group of the first operator there are the 1-1 terminal 105aa, the 1-2 terminal 105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 105ac.
  • the terminal group of the second operator there are 2-1 terminal 105ba, 2-2 terminal 105bb, and 2-3 terminal 105bc.
  • the MVNO wireless communication system 100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO (Mobile Network Operator) networks.
  • the first MNO network includes a core network 103a and a 1-1 base station 104aa and a 1-2 base station 104ab connected to the core network 103a.
  • the second MNO network includes the core network 103b and the 2-1 base station 104ba and the 2-2 base station 104bb connected to the core network 103b.
  • the third MNO network includes a core network 103c and a third base station 104ca and a third-2 base station 104cc connected to the core network 103c.
  • MNO MNO
  • first MNO MNO
  • second MNO MNO
  • third MNO MNO
  • the core networks 103a, 103b, 103c include S-GW (Serving Gateway), MME (Mobility Management Entity), and the like.
  • the core networks 103a, 103b, 103c include UPF (User Plane Function), SMF (Session Management Function), AMF (Access and Mobility management Function), and the like. ..
  • the MVNO network device 102 communicates wirelessly with wireless communication terminals 105aa, 105ab, 105ac, 105ba, 105bb, and 105bc that can be connected to the core network 102-1 in the upper core network 102-1 that connects to a plurality of MNO networks.
  • MVNO wireless communication terminals
  • each of the MVNO network device and the MVNO network may be abbreviated as "MVNO”. This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
  • the MVNO 102 includes the core network 103a of the first MNO, the core network 103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 102-1 connected to the core network 103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 102-1 includes P-GW (PacketDataNetworkGateway), HSS (HomeSubscriberServer), and the like. included.
  • the upper core network 102-1 is connected to the system 101a of the first operator and the system 101b of the second operator.
  • the system 101a of the first business operator and the system 101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
  • the system of the first business operator may be abbreviated as "first business operator”
  • the system of the second business operator may be abbreviated as "second business operator”. This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
  • the MVNO 102 includes the upper core network 102-1, the MNO selection policy table 102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and the group communication information which is information related to the communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group. It includes a switching control module 102-7, which is a kind of information management module that switches the MNO based on the above.
  • the switching control module 102-7 includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit, as will be described in a modified example described later.
  • the database group of the switching control module 102-7 aggregates the database that stores the data collected by the network (network monitor database), the database that stores the data collected by the terminal (terminal monitor database), and the information related to billing. Includes the database (database for billing information).
  • the database group of the switching control module 102-7 holds the information of these databases as group communication information which is information related to the communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group.
  • the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 manages the group communication information held in the database group of the switching control module 102-7. As a result, the information of the database group of the switching control module 102-7 is collected and updated regularly or on demand. Further, the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 selects one MNO network and session for each terminal based on the group communication information. In the first embodiment, the information management unit selects one MNO network and session for each terminal based on the group communication information so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 102-2.
  • the information management unit controls the establishment or switching of terminal sessions based on the selection result. By controlling the information management unit in this way, it is possible to optimize communication for each terminal group regarding the MNO selection policy and the like.
  • the information management unit is the switching control module 102-7 provided integrally with the database group, but the information management unit may be provided separately from the database group or other modules. It may be.
  • the rate (connection cost) differs for each MNO due to the difference in connection conditions (contract terms) with each MNO.
  • connection conditions contract terms
  • there are various types such as pay-as-you-go billing for each MNO, flat-rate billing for a specific period, flat-rate billing up to a specific traffic volume, and pay-as-you-go billing for more traffic.
  • This information is stored in the billing information database in the switching control module 102-7. Further, the switching control module 102-7 collects and calculates "the amount of communication used for each terminal and each MNO of the entire terminal group" and the like by using the network monitor database and the terminal monitor database as necessary, and charges. Store in the information database.
  • the switching control module 102-7 derives the lowest priced MNO network among the terminals of the entire terminal group among various rate plans, or estimates the communication volume from the past results. Then, the MNO network with the lowest final payment (in the case of monthly payment, the payment amount based on the final communication volume in that month) is derived.
  • the first MNO network is derived as the MNO network with the lowest communication cost by the above derivation.
  • the switching control module 102-7 selects the MNO and the communication session based on the derivation result.
  • the network and session are appropriately switched so as to connect these terminals with the lowest priced and derived first MNO network.
  • the 1-1 terminal 105aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is the closest 1-1 base station 104aa among the base stations of the first MNO having a low communication cost.
  • the 1-2 terminal 105ab and the 1-3 terminal 105ac which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the closest 1-2 base stations 104ab among the first MNO base stations having low communication costs. It is possible to connect to the core network 103a of the first MNO and the core network 102-1 higher than the MVNO via the above, and to perform low-priced communication with the system 101a of the first operator.
  • connection information of all terminals is stored in the network monitor database in the switching control module 102-7.
  • the switching control module 102-7 selects the MNO and the communication session based on the connection information of all terminals stored in the MNO selection policy table 102-2 and the network monitor database in the switching control module 102-7. Do.
  • the current MNO network connecting the 2-1 terminal 105ba, the 2-2 terminal 105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second operator is made uniform (separate MNOs as much as possible). If not, the network and session are appropriately switched so as to equalize the MNO network connected to these terminals.
  • the 2-1 terminal 105ba is connected to the core network 103a of the first MNO and the upper core network 102-1 via the 1-2 base station 104ab.
  • the 2-2 terminal 105bb is connected to the core network 103b of the second MNO and the upper core network 102-1 via the 2-2 base station 104bb.
  • the 2-3 terminal 105bc is connected to the core network 103c of the 3rd MNO and the upper core network 102-1 via the 3-2 base station 104cc.
  • the 2nd operator will not be able to communicate at all and will not be able to service. It will be in a state like that.
  • MNO switching that makes the MNO network uniform, even when a large-scale failure occurs in a specific MNO, two-thirds of the terminals of the second operator can maintain normal communication.
  • an MNO selection policy it is also effective for the MVNO 102 to perform control that does not use the MNO for maintenance at a specific time zone based on the MNO maintenance schedule information presented by each MNO (“High reliability”). (Distributed setting of connected MNO / 1st MNO cannot be assigned to XX hours XX minutes to XX hours XX minutes on XX days of 2019) ").
  • one terminal group is formed for each business operator and the MNO selection policy table 102-2 is set for each terminal group.
  • one operator may form a plurality of terminal groups, and the MNO selection policy table 102-2 may be set for each terminal group.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • more appropriate MNO selection becomes possible.
  • it is possible to change a large number of MNO selection policies at different timings for each group it is possible to avoid network congestion.
  • the plurality of MNOs may include a plurality of types of wireless networks.
  • the first MNO may include an LTE network
  • the second MNO may include a 5G network
  • the third MNO may include a satellite mobile communication network.
  • the radio network of a plurality of MNOs may be composed of any combination of radio systems that the MVNO can incorporate.
  • the number of MNOs is not limited to three.
  • the MNO selection policy table 102-2 is not essential.
  • FIGS. 2 and 3 show a sequence diagram in which MNO selection policy control is performed for each terminal group using MVNOs connected to three MNO networks (first to third MNO networks).
  • the sequence diagrams of FIGS. 2 and 3 correspond to the states of FIG.
  • the outline and step number of the communication are mainly added above or beside the arrow indicating the communication, and the same applies to the sequence diagrams other than those of FIGS. 2 and 3.
  • step S501 the system 101a of the first operator registers the terminals of its own terminal group with the MVNO 102 before starting the communication.
  • the system 101a of the first operator appropriately sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO 102.
  • This registration and setting may be performed by a message via a telecommunication line.
  • the terminal After turning on the power, the terminal accesses its own SIM (Subscriber Identity Module), performs a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) search, and selects the MNO to be connected according to the specified procedure.
  • SIM Subscriber Identity Module
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal transmits a connection request to the first MNO in step S502.
  • the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S503, the wireless connection path is established.
  • the MVNO since the MVNO has an authentication function such as HSS, the MVNO transmits an authentication request to the terminal in step S504, and the terminal transmits an authentication response to the MVNO in step S505.
  • the authentication process is performed between the terminal and the MVNO.
  • the transmission and reception of these messages may be performed in a plurality of steps, or may be performed in cooperation between the HSS of the MNO and the HSS of the MVNO.
  • the session between the terminal and the MVNO is established. The same process is performed on all terminals in the group terminal.
  • the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO measure or detect the communication line quality and failure information for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group established above in step S506. Even if the communication line quality and failure information are measured or detected by at least one or more terminals, appropriate processing is possible to some extent, but it is better to collect the communication line quality and failure information for all terminals in the terminal group. Appropriate processing becomes possible. Even if information is not collected for all terminals, if information is collected for a certain percentage of all terminals and positive judgment and control are performed, some terminals will fail. However, it is possible to take the next best measure without waiting for all the collections.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 are, for example, radio line quality information obtained by receiving signals from each terminal at the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO, that is, received power and SINR (Signal). -to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLockError Rate), etc., or information related to the synchronization status of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.) may be used. ..
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, the number of retransmissions of ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) at the wireless layer 2 level, the number skip detection information of SN (Sequence Number), or the like. Good.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, information on the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), or the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO are united from each terminal belonging to the terminal group. It may be the communication amount (average transmission speed) of the signal received per hour.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, the transmission delay time (average delay time) of the data received by the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO from each terminal belonging to the terminal group. Good.
  • the delay time may be measured using the time stamp of the wireless frame, or the delay time may be measured by the Ethernet (registered trademark) level data (IEEE1588 or the like).
  • the delay time may be measured using NTP (Network Time Protocol), or the delay time may be measured using GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 are, for example, with variations in data reception timing (average variation, squared average variation). There may be.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 include, for example, maintenance management information and device failure information for the entire network (abnormal congestion in some devices in each MNO, device damage information, signal blockage information due to maintenance, etc., test operation. Moderate status information).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal transmitted from the terminal and predicted to be received by the MVNO. More specifically, when the health check signal is transmitted from the MVNO and the response from the corresponding terminal is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor. Alternatively, even if the MVNO receives the health check signal periodically transmitted from the terminal, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor when the reception interval exceeds the specified time.
  • the above health check may be a health check of the terminal from the MVNO or a health check from the business operator to the terminal.
  • a health check from the operator to the terminal connection device may be performed.
  • the operator detects an abnormality in the above health check, the operator notifies the MVNO to that effect.
  • the monitor results from the above networks are sequentially stored or updated in the network monitor database in the switching control module 102-7.
  • information such as the amount of communication related to billing is also sequentially stored or updated in the billing information database in the switching control module 102-7.
  • step S506 The communication line quality and failure information in step S506 described above are used in step S508.
  • the communication line quality and failure information of step S507 which will be described next, is also used in step S508.
  • step S507 an operation example of step S508 using the communication line quality and failure information of step S506 will be described.
  • the MVNO 102 when a reception power abnormality is detected in the terminal using the first MNO in the communication line quality and failure information in step S506, although not shown, the MVNO 102 is the latest information on the communication line quality and failure information of the other terminal. Is confirmed, and if necessary, the communication line quality and failure information are newly requested and acquired from the first MNO. For example, an abnormality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information between a certain terminal and the first MNO in a specific area, and between another terminal in the same terminal group as the terminal and the second MNO. When normality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information, there is a possibility that a failure (for example, base station failure) has occurred in the first MNO in the area. Therefore, in this case, in step S508, the MVNO 102 decides to switch the terminal connected to the first MNO from the first MNO to the second MNO.
  • a failure for example, base station failure
  • At least one terminal belonging to the terminal group for which the session has been established measures or detects the communication line quality and failure information by itself in step S507. Then, at least one or more terminals transmit communication line quality and failure information to the MVNO via the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 are, for example, the quality information of the wireless line received and obtained at each terminal, that is, the received power, SINR (Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLock Error). Rate) or the like, or information related to the synchronization state of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 may be, for example, the number of retransmissions of ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) at the wireless layer 2 level, the number skip detection information of SN (Sequence Number), or the like. Good.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.).
  • the monitor results from these terminals are sequentially stored or updated in the terminal monitor database in the switching control module 102-7.
  • information such as the amount of communication related to billing is also sequentially stored or updated in the terminal billing database in the switching control module 102-7.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal transmitted from the MVNO and predicted to be received by the terminal. More specifically, when a health check signal is transmitted from the terminal to the MVNO and the corresponding response is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor. Alternatively, even if the terminal receives the health check signal periodically transmitted from the MVNO, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor when the reception interval exceeds the specified time.
  • the above-mentioned health check may be a health check of the MVNO from the terminal or a health check from the terminal to the business operator.
  • a health check from the terminal connection device to the business operator may be performed.
  • the terminal connection device detects an abnormality in the above health check, the terminal connection device notifies the terminal to that effect.
  • step S508 using the communication line quality and failure information of step S507 will be described.
  • the MVNO 102 when a SINR abnormality is detected in a terminal using the first MNO in the communication line quality and failure information in step S507, although not shown, the MVNO 102 provides the latest information on the communication line quality and failure information of other terminals. Confirm and, if necessary, newly request and acquire communication line quality and failure information from the terminal. For example, an abnormality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information between a certain terminal and the first MNO in a specific area, and between another terminal in the same terminal group as the terminal and the second MNO. When normality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information, there is a possibility that a failure (for example, base station failure) has occurred in the first MNO in the area. Therefore, in this case, in step S508, the MVNO 102 decides to switch the terminal connected to the first MNO from the first MNO to the second MNO.
  • a failure for example, base station failure
  • step S508 an example is shown in which the MVNO 102 determines the switching of the MNO based on one of the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 and the communication line quality and failure information in step S507.
  • the MVNO 102 makes a comprehensive judgment based on both the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 and the communication line quality and failure information in step S507, and determines the switching of the MNO. May be good.
  • the terminal receives the MNO change instruction from the MVNO in step S509, and transmits the MNO change response to the MVNO in step S510.
  • the first MNO transmits switching information (takeover information, etc.) to the second MNO in step S511.
  • the terminal performs MNO switching processing such as rewriting the eSIM in step S512.
  • the MVNO transmits a release instruction for canceling the connection with the first MNO, which is the switching source MNO, to the terminal via the second MNO.
  • the terminal transmits a connection request to the second MNO in step S514, establishes a wireless connection route when receiving a connection response from the second MNO in step S515, and establishes a wireless connection route via the route established in step S516.
  • the release response of the first MNO is transmitted to the MVNO.
  • the second MNO needs to cooperate with the HSS of the first MNO, the second MNO transmits switching information (takeover information, etc.) to the first MNO in step S517.
  • MNO Mobility Management Entity
  • the entire terminal group or network determines other MNOs capable of stable communication with the terminal, and the terminal Communication is switched from a specific MNO to the other MNO.
  • the business operator receives the data transmission transmitted from the terminal in step S519 by transmitting the data transmission instruction to the terminal via the MVNO in step S518. Can be done.
  • the MVNO 102 selects the connection destination MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 102-2 based on the group communication information such as the communication quality and the failure information has been described above.
  • the MVNO 102 performs MNO switching control suitable for the MNO selection policy for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group by comprehensively considering the group communication information. be able to.
  • the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group is maximized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to maximize the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission speed for the entire terminal group.
  • the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay for the entire terminal group.
  • the transmission delay time may be measured by transmitting a known signal / known message (health check, etc.) at regular intervals on the transmitting side.
  • MNO selection can be performed so that the sum of the variations in the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variations is minimized. Further, it is possible to minimize the variation of the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variation while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay variation for the entire terminal group.
  • the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission error rate for the entire terminal group.
  • a plurality of MNOs such as “minimize communication cost”, “high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)", “maximum transmission speed”, “minimum transmission delay”, and “minimum transmission error rate” described above are selected. It is also effective to prioritize and integrate policies.
  • the MVNO network device manages group communication information which is information related to communication of a plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to a terminal group, and wirelessly based on the group communication information.
  • group communication information is information related to communication of a plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to a terminal group, and wirelessly based on the group communication information.
  • One MNO network and session are selected for each communication terminal, and the establishment or switching of the session of the wireless communication terminal is controlled based on the selection result. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize communication for a terminal group of wireless communication terminals.
  • FIG. 4 shows an exemplary configuration of a wireless communication system 100 according to a first modification of the first embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a figure.
  • the wireless communication system 100 according to the first modification it is possible to select an authentication method performed when establishing a communication session according to the contract form between the operator and the MVNO.
  • the first business operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes the reduction of communication costs
  • the contract of the authentication method is a normal contract.
  • the second operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes communication resistance
  • the authentication method contract is a contract that emphasizes confidentiality.
  • the SIM mounted on these terminals (Authentication for establishing a communication session is performed between the Subscriber Identity Module) and the HSS (Home Subscriber Server) module 102-3 in the core network 102-1 above the MVNO.
  • the HSS module 102-3 selects a special authentication method different from that of other contractors as the authentication between the SIM and the HSS module 102-3. This makes it possible to selectively provide communication sessions with an emphasis on confidentiality for each business operator and each contract.
  • FIG. 5 shows an exemplary configuration of a wireless communication system 300 according to a second modification of the first embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a figure.
  • the MNO selection policy information based on the association between the terminals is exchanged between the operator using the wireless communication system 300 and the MVNO.
  • FIG. 5 there is a first operator as a operator using the MVNO wireless communication system 300.
  • a terminal group of the first operator 301 there are nine terminals, 1-1 terminal 305aa to 1-9 terminal 305ai.
  • terminals are, for example, connected to the first terminal connection device 307aa of the first operator to the first terminal connection device 307ai of the first operator by a wired cable, and a plurality of these terminals are wirelessly connected via a base station. It is connected to the MNO of.
  • the terminal connection device of each first business operator is a device that provides an application of the first business operator, and is used in various ways for each business operator.
  • the importance of the terminal connection device is defined for the first operator, and the 1-1 terminal connection device 307aa (importance: highest)> the 1-2 terminal connection device 307ab and the 1-3 terminal connection.
  • the first operator 301 sets "high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)" in the MNO selection policy table 302-2 for each terminal group for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 302.
  • the first operator 301 may set the MNO selection policy table 302-2 remotely via the transmission line, or convert it to a required format via the MNO and set the MNO selection policy table 302-2. May be good.
  • connection information of all terminals is stored in the network monitor database in the switching control module 302-7.
  • the switching control module 302-7 satisfies the selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 302-2 based on the connection information, that is, the 1-1 terminals 305aa to belong to the terminal group of the first operator 301. 1st-9th 1-9 It is determined whether the MNO connecting the terminal 305ai is uniform (connected to different MNOs as much as possible). Then, when the switching control module 302-7 determines that the MNO is not uniform, the MNO network and the switching control module 302-7 so as to make the MNO uniform based on the connection information in the switching control module 302-7 and the like. Switch sessions.
  • the first operator 301 sets the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 302 as "terminal importance: 1-1 terminal> 1-first". 2 terminals, 1-3 terminals> 1-4 terminals, 1-5 terminals, 1-6 terminals, 1-7 terminals> 1-8 terminals, 1-9 terminals ".
  • the MNOs connecting the 1-1 terminal 305aa to the 1-9th terminal 305ai are connected in the order of importance set in the MNO selection policy table 302-4 by the operator. If not, the MNO network and session are switched so that the MNOs connected to these terminals are connected in the order of importance.
  • the terminal connection device of a business operator that performs wireless monitoring and control generally has various relationships depending on the application of the business operator.
  • a device that monitors the output voltage and current from the power source and controls the disconnection or change of the current path when an abnormality is detected will be described.
  • the terminal connection devices on the upstream side near the power source may be allocated unevenly to a specific MNO. In such a case, if a failure occurs in the specific MNO, there will be a large number of terminal connection devices upstream that cannot monitor and control the output voltage and current. It is desirable that the MNOs are dispersed because upstream control errors affect the downstream.
  • this modification 2 it is set that the order of importance is higher for the upstream terminal connection device in the application of the operator, and it is distributed to each MNO.
  • the 1-1 terminal connecting device 307aa which has the highest importance of the terminal connecting device, is connected to the 1-1 terminal 305aa and communicates with the first MNO 303a via the 1-1 base station 304aa.
  • the next most important 1-2 terminal connecting device 307ab is connected to the 1-2 terminal 305ab and communicates with the second MNO 303b via the 2-1 base station 304ba.
  • the 1-3 terminal connecting device 307ac which has the same importance as the 1-2 terminal connecting device 307ab, is connected to the 1-3 terminal 305ac to connect the 3-2 base station 304cc. It communicates with the third MNO303c via.
  • the terminal connection devices that provide the applications of the operator to MNOs that differ as much as possible in order of importance even if a failure occurs in a specific MNO, the effect of the failure is minimized. It is possible to provide communication services that are highly resistant to time.
  • the MNO selection policy table 302-2 for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association are individually considered and the MNO is switched twice.
  • the number of switchings can be reduced by switching the MNO only once, considering the MNO selection policy table 302-2 for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association in total. ..
  • the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association is, for example, (1) business operator number: 1, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal subgroup number: 1, (4) terminal subgroup.
  • Terminal importance All terminals are the same, (1) Business number: 1, (2) Terminal group number 1, (3) Terminal subgroup number: 2, (4) Terminal subgroup Target: Terminals 1-4, 1-5 terminals, 1-6 terminals, (5) Terminal importance: All terminals are the same. It may be set. In this case, in the table management between the operator and the MVNO, it is not necessary to change the above setting every time the importance of each terminal changes, so that the process can be simplified.
  • the MVNO may be dispersed in a plurality of bases as far apart as possible.
  • the influence on the service to each business operator is minimized. It is possible to do.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 400 according to the third modification.
  • the network of the MVNO 402 is connected to the networks of the first MNO403a, the second MNO403b, and the third MNO403c, and provides a communication session to the terminal group of the first operator 401.
  • the MVNO 402 includes a plurality of the above-mentioned MVNO networks, tables and modules.
  • the MVNO network 402-5a and the MVNO network 402-5b which are composed of telecommunications equipment such as a group of servers equipped with software, are distributed and arranged in the first base and the second base.
  • the MNO selection policy tables 402-2a and 402-2b for each group terminal the MNO selection policy tables 402-4a and 402-4b for inter-terminal association, and the switching control modules 402-7a and 402- 7b is distributed in the first base and the second base.
  • FIG. 6 there is a first operator as a operator using the MVNO wireless communication system 400.
  • a terminal group of the first operator 401 there are nine terminals, 1-1 terminal 405aa to 1-9 terminal 405ai.
  • terminals are, for example, connected to the first terminal connection device 407aa of the first operator to the first terminal connection device 407ai of the first operator by a wired cable, and a plurality of these terminals are wirelessly connected via a base station. It is connected to the MNO of.
  • the terminal connection device of each first business operator is a device that provides an application of the first business operator, and is used in various ways for each business operator.
  • the importance of the terminal connection device is defined for the first operator, and the 1-1 terminal connection device 407aa (importance: highest)> the 1-2 terminal connection device 407ab> the 1-3 terminal connection.
  • the first operator 401 sets the MNO selection policy tables 402-2a and 402-2b for each terminal group for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 402.
  • High reliability distributed setting of connected MNO
  • the table may be set remotely via a transmission line, or may be converted to a required format via an MVNO maintenance terminal and set.
  • the switching control module 402-7 satisfies the selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 402-2 based on the connection information, that is, the 1-1 terminals 405aa to belong to the terminal group of the first operator 401. It is determined whether the MNOs connected to the 1st-9th terminals 405ai are made uniform (connected to different MNOs as much as possible). Then, when it is determined that the MNO is not uniformized, the switching control module 402-7 can be used as connection information of terminals stored in the network monitor database in the switching control modules 402-7a and 402-7b. Based on this, the MNO network and session are switched so as to make the MNO uniform.
  • the first operator 401 sets "Terminal importance: 1-1 terminal” in the MNO selection policy tables 402-4a and 402-4b for inter-terminal association for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 402. > 1-2 terminal> 1-3 terminal> Terminal 1-4> 1-5 terminal> 1-6 terminal> 1-7 terminal> 1-8 terminal> 1-9 terminal " To do.
  • the switching control module 402-7 determines whether the 1-1 terminal 405aa to the 1-9th terminal 305ai are connected to the MNO in the order of importance set in the MNO selection policy table 402-4 by the operator. To do.
  • the switching control module 402-7 determines that the connection is not made in that way, the importance of the MNO connected to the terminal is determined based on the connection information of the terminal stored in the network monitor database. Switch the MNO network and session so that they are connected in the order of order.
  • the second The 1-2 terminal 405ab which is connected to the 1-2 terminal connection device 407ab of the first operator, which is highly important, is connected to the base station of the second MNO403b, which is different from the first MNO403a, and is the third most important.
  • the 1-3 terminal 405ac which is connected to the 1-3 terminal connection device 407ac of the first operator, is connected to the base station of the third MNO403c, which is different from the first MNO403a and the second MNO403b.
  • the terminals connected to the terminal connection device of the first operator having the highest importance of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 are the first MNO, the second MNO, the third MNO, the first MNO, and the second MNO. , Is connected to the base station of the third MNO, respectively.
  • the 1-1 terminal 405aa connected to the 1-1 terminal connecting device 407aa of the first operator, which has the highest importance, is connected to the MVNO network 402 of the first base via the first MNO403a.
  • the 1-2 terminal 405ab connected to the 1-2 terminal connection device 407ab of the first operator, which has the second highest importance is connected to the second base via the second MNO403b. It is connected to the MVNO network 402-5b.
  • the terminals connected to the terminal connection device of the first operator which is the third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth most important, are the first base, the second base, the first base, and so on. It is connected to the MVNO network of the 2nd base, the 1st base, the 2nd base, and the 1st base, respectively.
  • the first business operator when all the connections of the terminal connection devices of the first business operator are via the MVNO network 402-5a of the first base, and a large-scale failure peculiar to the MVNO of the first base occurs, the first The provision of services to businesses will be completely cut off.
  • the influence thereof can be reduced, so that it is possible to provide a communication service having a high tolerance in the event of a failure.
  • the configuration in which the MVNO network 402-5a of the first base and the MVNO network 402-5b of the second base are 0/1 system (connectable to only one of them) has been described. .. In such a configuration, the connection can be minimized, so that a low-priced network can be constructed.
  • the MVNO network may be configured to be an N / E system (connectable to both and can be switched in the event of a failure).
  • N / E system connectable to both and can be switched in the event of a failure.
  • various databases, policy tables, etc. in the MVNO are mirrored from N system to E system as much as possible according to the reliability required for the terminal to be handled.
  • N / E system when 0/1 system and N / E system can be mixed, it is effective to apply the N / E system only to some of the terminal connection devices of the business operators with high importance. With this configuration, it is possible to balance service quality and price according to the demand of the business operator.
  • ⁇ Modification 4 of Embodiment 1> The components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.
  • the wireless communication system according to the fourth modification can realize all of the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment. When only one of the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 102 according to the present modification 4.
  • the MVNO 102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
  • the upper core network 102-1 in FIG. 7 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 102-9, a PGW function module 102-10, and a business operator interface module 102-11.
  • the operator interface module 102-11 balances between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them.
  • the operator interface module 102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
  • the PGW function module 102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of the IP packet, and also switches the MNO according to the instruction of the MNO switching control module 102-7.
  • the MNO interface module 102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 102-3.
  • the operator request management control module 102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 102-4 for inter-terminal association.
  • the MNO selection policy table 102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting what kind of policy is used to switch the MNO for each terminal group.
  • the MNO selection policy table 102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
  • the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 102-2. Further, when the terminal-to-terminal related importance instruction of the terminal group having the first operator reaches the operator request management control module 102-6 via the operator interface module 102-11, the information is sent to the MNO selection policy. It is stored in table 102-4.
  • the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8 is, for example, charged information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, fixed-rate for a specific period, fixed-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the switching control module 102-7. .. Further, in the MNO selection policy tables 102-2 and 102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator and the writing is securely performed on these tables, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 102-3.
  • the HSS module 102-3 which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator.
  • the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective.
  • a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
  • the switching control module 102-7 which is an information management unit, transmits group communication information, which is information related to communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group, via the MNO interface module 102-9 and the PGW function module 102-10. Collect and store in database group 102-12.
  • the database group 102-12 includes a network monitor database 102-13, a terminal monitor database 102-14, and a billing information database 102-15.
  • group communication information and the database group 102-12 will be described.
  • the network monitor database 102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored.
  • the network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the terminal monitor database 102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
  • the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
  • the switching control module 102-7 comprehensively considers the above group communication information to perform MNO switching control suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group. For example, the switching control module 102-7 gives an instruction to distribute the MVNO bases based on the MVNO base information received from the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8, and the PGW function module 102-10 responds to the instruction. Control the addressing. In this case, as described in the third modification of the first embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence on the service provision to the business operator even at the time of a large-scale failure peculiar to the MVNO base.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 105 according to the present modification 4, which corresponds to one of the terminals 105aa to 105bc (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment.
  • the transmitter / receiver 105-2 performs down-conversion of the signal received by the antenna 105-1 from the radio frequency to the signal band, and processing of the received radio layer 1 such as demodulation and error correction.
  • the data processing unit 105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 105-2 in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame.
  • the terminal connection device interface 105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device.
  • the terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), a personal computer, or an AGV (Automated Guided Vehicle) integrated with these, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like.
  • the communication system of the transmitter / receiver 105-2 may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any wireless system that the MVNO can incorporate. ..
  • the processor 105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 8, in the configuration in which the terminal 105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble. At this time, the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 105 are formed as a message by the processor 105-5, and pass through the data processing unit 105-3, the transmitter / receiver 105-2, and the antenna 105-1. It is sent to the MVNO.
  • a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside.
  • Milenage is usually used as the default setting.
  • the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method
  • the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM105-6 to set the authentication method to be used by default. It may be possible to change it.
  • it is not possible to set a large number of authentication methods themselves in a normal standard it is possible to realize a different authentication method for each business operator, so that a highly reliable network system can be constructed.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 1100 according to the second embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system 1100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and includes an MVNO network device 1102 and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 1105aa, 1105ab, 1105ac, 1105ba, 1105bb, 1105bc.
  • first business operator there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 1100.
  • terminal group of the first operator there are 1-1 terminal 1105aa, 1-2 terminal 1105ab, and 1-3 terminal 1105ac.
  • terminal group of the second operator there are 2-1 terminal 1105ba, 2-2 terminal 1105bb, and 2-3 terminal 1105bc.
  • the MVNO wireless communication system 1100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks.
  • the first MNO network includes a core network 1103a and a 1-1 base station 1104a and a 1-2 base station 1104ab connected to the core network 1103a.
  • the second MNO network includes a core network 1103b and a 2-1 base station 1104ba and a 2-2 base station 1104bb connected to the core network 1103b.
  • the third MNO network includes a core network 1103c and a third base station 1104ca and a third-2 base station 1104cc connected to the core network 1103c.
  • the core networks 1103a, 1103b, 1103c include S-GW and the like.
  • the MVNO network device 1102 performs wireless communication with wireless communication terminals 1105aa, 1105ab, 1105ac, 1105ba, 1105bb, 1105bc that can be connected to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the MVNO 1102 includes the core network 1103a of the first MNO, the core network 1103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 1102-1 connected to the core network 1103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 1102-1 includes P-GW, HSS, and the like.
  • the upper core network 1102-1 is connected to the system 1101a of the first operator and the system 1101b of the second operator.
  • the system 1101a of the first business operator and the system 1101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
  • the MVNO 1102 includes the upper core network 1102-1, the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and the group communication information which is information related to the communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group. It includes a selection control module 1102-7, which is a kind of information management module that performs selection control of an MNO based on the above.
  • the selection control module 1102-7 includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit.
  • the database group of the selection control module 1102-7 is substantially the same as the database group of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment, and is group communication which is information on communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group. Hold information.
  • the database group of the selection control module 1102-7 includes, for example, a network monitor database, a terminal monitor database, and a billing information database.
  • the information management unit of the selection control module 1102-7 is substantially the same as the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment. However, the information management unit according to the second embodiment selects the number of MNO networks and sessions for each terminal so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 based on the group communication information ( Determine one or more numbers). Then, the information management unit according to the second embodiment selects a number of MNO networks and sessions determined for each terminal so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 based on the group communication information. To do. Then, the information management unit according to the second embodiment controls the establishment or switching of the session of the terminal based on the selection result. In the following description, the information management unit describes the case where the selection control module 1102-7 is provided integrally with the database group, but it may be provided separately from the database group or another module. It may be.
  • Each terminal can establish the above-determined number of MNO networks and sessions.
  • the above-determined number is two, and each terminal establishes two sessions.
  • communication continuation tolerance Becomes stronger.
  • communication can be continued in another session established at the same time, so that data can be communicated without interruption.
  • the reliability can be improved as compared with the wireless communication system of the first embodiment in which each terminal establishes only one session.
  • the first operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes the improvement of reliability by establishing multiple sessions for each terminal and the reduction of communication costs.
  • the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 according to the first operator 1101a, (1) operator number: 1, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal group target: 1st 1 terminal, 1-2 terminal, 1-3 terminal, (4) MNO selection policy: It is assumed that "communication cost minimization" is set.
  • the selection control module 1102-7 includes the charge plan information stored in the billing information database and, if necessary, the "terminals and MNOs of the entire terminal group" stored in the network monitor database and the terminal monitor database.
  • the MNO and communication session are selected based on "the amount of communication used for each".
  • the MNO with the lowest communication cost is the lowest in response to the communication session request from the 1-1 terminal 1105aa, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator. It is assumed that the 1MNO is selected and the 2nd MNO is selected as the MNO having the second lowest communication cost.
  • the 1-1 terminal 1105aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is the closest first of the first MNO base stations having the lowest communication cost as the first session.
  • -1 It is connected to the core network 1103a of the first MNO and the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO via the base station 1104aa.
  • the 1-1 terminal 1105aa uses the second MNO core network 1103b via the nearest 2-1 base station 1104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost.
  • And is connected to the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO.
  • the 1-1 terminal 1105aa can perform low-priced communication with the system 1101a of the first operator.
  • the 1-2 terminal 1105ab and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the closest to the base station of the first MNO having the lowest communication cost as the first session. It is connected to the core network 1103a of the first MNO and the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO via the 1-2 base station 1104ab. In addition, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac use the nearest 2-1 base station 1104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost as the second session. Through, it is connected to the core network 1103b of the second MNO and the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO. As a result, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac can perform low-priced communication with the system 1101a of the first operator.
  • the second operator attaches great importance to the high reliability of communication so that the service can be maintained as much as possible by leaving the terminal that can continue communication even in the event of a failure of a specific MNO.
  • "high reliability (distributed setting of connected MNO)" is set by the second operator 1101b.
  • the selection control module 1102-7 has an MNO and a communication session based on the connection information of all terminals stored in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 and the network monitor database in the selection control module 1102-7. Make a selection.
  • the current MNO network connecting the 2-1 terminal 1105ba, the 2-2 terminal 1105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 1105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second operator is made uniform (separate MNOs as much as possible). If not, the network and session are appropriately switched so as to equalize the MNO network connected to these terminals.
  • the 2-1 terminal 1105ba belonging to the terminal group of the second operator selects the first MNO and the second MNO as the MNO of the first session and the MNO of the second session, and the first Establish communication for the first and second sessions.
  • the 2-2 terminal 1105bb which belongs to the terminal group of the second operator, selects the second MNO and the third MNO as the MNO of the first session and the MNO of the second session, and performs the communication of the first session and the second session.
  • the 2-3 terminal 1105bc which belongs to the terminal group of the second operator, selects the third MNO and the first MNO as the MNO of the first session and the MNO of the second session, and performs the communication of the first session and the second session. Establish.
  • the 2-1 terminal 1105ba selects the 1-1 base station 1104aa as the base station of the first MNO and serves as the base station of the second MNO.
  • 2-1 Base station 1104ba is selected.
  • the 2-2 terminal 1105bb selects the 2-2 base station 1104bb as the base station of the 2nd MNO and the 3-1 base station 1104ca as the base station of the 3rd MNO.
  • the 2-3 terminal 1105bc selects the 3-2 base station 1104cc as the base station of the 3rd MNO, and selects the 1-2 base station 1104ab as the base station of the 1st MNO.
  • the 2-1 terminal 1105ba, the 2-2 terminal 1105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 1105bc can communicate with the system 1101b of the second operator with high resistance to communication failure. Become.
  • the MVNO 1102 performs MNO switching control suitable for the MNO selection policy for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group by comprehensively considering the group communication information. be able to.
  • the MNO selection policy for each terminal group includes the above-mentioned policy that emphasizes the reduction of communication costs, “minimization of communication costs”, and the policy that emphasizes communication endurance that maintains the continuation of communication, "high reliability”.
  • high reliability base station
  • base station is a policy to geographically disperse connected base stations in order to increase resistance to local disasters and equipment failures. Geographically distributed setting) ”is also effective.
  • the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group is maximized by using the information read from the database group.
  • MNOs having different frequency bands are selected. Further, it is possible to maximize the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission speed for the entire terminal group.
  • the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay for the entire terminal group.
  • the transmission delay time may be measured by transmitting a known signal / known message (health check, etc.) at regular intervals on the transmitting side.
  • MNO selection can be performed so that the sum of the variations in the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variations is minimized. Further, it is possible to minimize the variation of the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variation while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay variation for the entire terminal group.
  • the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission error rate for the entire terminal group.
  • a plurality of MNOs such as “minimize communication cost”, “high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)", “maximum transmission speed”, “minimum transmission delay”, and “minimum transmission error rate” described above are selected. It is also effective to prioritize and integrate policies.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example when a policy for selecting a session with good communication quality is set.
  • the 1-1 base station 1104aa and the 1-2 base station 1104ab are the base stations of the 1st MNO1103a
  • the 2-1 base station 1104ba and the 2-2 base station 1104bb are the base stations of the 2nd MNO1103b.
  • the 3-1st base station 1104ca is a base station of the 3rd MNO1103c.
  • the circle centered on each base station represents the cell radius of each base station.
  • the 1-1 terminal 1105aa selects two base stations and MNOs, it selects a session capable of high-quality data communication.
  • the 1-1 terminal 1105aa selects the 1-2 base station 1104ab and the 2-2 base station 1104bab.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example when a policy for selecting a session in which the connected base stations can be geographically dispersed is set.
  • the 1-2 base station 1104ab and the 2-2 base station 1104bb are geographically adjacent to each other. Therefore, the 1-1 terminal 1105aa selects the 1-2 base station 1104ab, but does not select the 2-2 base station 1104bb, but selects the 3-1 base station 1104ca which is far away. .. Since the 1-1 terminal 1105aa is located on the cell edge of the 3-1 base station 1104ca, the data rate may be low if such a selection is made.
  • the 1st 1- can continue the communication by communicating with the 3-1 base station 1104ca.
  • the selection of multiple sessions may be performed when the first session is established, or when the constantly monitored group communication information exceeds the threshold value of the group communication information set based on the session selection policy. It may be done or it may be carried out periodically.
  • the communication in the second priority session is temporarily disconnected while the communication is continued only in the first priority session, and the measurement target is measured. Other sessions may be established to carry out measurements in those other sessions. Then, after the measurement, the second priority session may be reestablished, and communication may be performed again in the first priority and second priority sessions. In such a case, while continuing communication in the first priority session, a session not used for data communication for acquiring group communication information (sessions other than the first priority and second priority sessions). ) Can be measured.
  • a third session may be temporarily established for measurement while continuing the first priority and second priority sessions. In such a case, it is possible to measure a session that is not used for data communication while continuing communication in both the first priority and second priority sessions.
  • ⁇ Modification 1 of Embodiment 2> 12 and 13 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the first modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 12 and 13 show an operation example of selecting a plurality of MNOs by the wireless communication system according to the first modification of the second embodiment.
  • step S1301 the business operator registers the terminals of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO.
  • information regarding the connection cost for each MNO may be set.
  • a terminal registered in the MVNO accesses the MVNO network and establishes a session with the first MNO and the second MNO will be described.
  • step S1302 the terminal transmits a connection request to the MVNO to the first MNO.
  • the MNO to be transmitted at this time may be selected in the connection order preset in the priority list, may be selected in descending order of radio field strength, or may be the last MNO connected last time. It may be an MNO that is geographically close to the terminal.
  • step S1303 the first MNO transmits a connection response indicating that the connection request from the terminal is accepted to the terminal.
  • the wireless connection path is established.
  • the terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S1304, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1305 to authenticate between the terminal and the MVNO. Processing is done.
  • the business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1306, and the MVNO transmits data to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1307.
  • the terminal transmits the transmitted data to the terminal connection device.
  • the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data has been received in step S1308 to the operator via the first MNO and the MVNO.
  • steps S1309 to S1311 are performed in order to collect the group communication information for selecting the MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group in the MVNO.
  • step S1309 the business operator notifies the MVNO of the maintenance schedule information of the MNO, the important point information of the terminal connection device, etc. as the network management information.
  • the key information for example, in a device such as a terminal for important data communication such as core control information of an infrastructure device, a plurality of sessions are indispensable, or reliability should be given top priority. It is information indicating to do.
  • each of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO notifies the MVNO of, for example, communication load information, communication line quality, failure information, terminal connection information to each MNO, and the like as network management information.
  • the terminal notifies the MVNO of, for example, communication line quality and communication line failure information as network management information.
  • step S1320 the business operator sends an instruction to duplicate the session of the designated terminal to the MVNO. That is, the additional instruction of the MNO is given.
  • step S1321 the MVNO selects an appropriate MNO for communication with the terminal based on the group communication information and the MNO selection policy for each terminal group.
  • the appropriate MNO will be described as being the second MNO.
  • step S1322 the MVNO transmits an instruction to add the MNO to the terminal via the first MNO for which the communication session has been established.
  • the MNO added to the terminal by instruction is the second MNO selected in step S1321.
  • the terminal makes a connection request to the designated MNO (second MNO) in step S1323, and receives a connection response from the second MNO in step S1324.
  • step S1325 the terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the second MNO
  • step S1326 the terminal receives an authentication response from the MVNO via the second MNO, thereby passing through the second MNO.
  • a session between the terminal and the MVNO is established.
  • the business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1327, and the MVNO transmits data to the terminal via the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1328.
  • the terminal transmits the transmitted data to the terminal connection device.
  • the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data has been received in step S1329 to the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • step S1330 data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the first MNO, and in step S1331, data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the second MNO. Will be done.
  • a plurality of communication sessions can be established between the operator device and the terminal connection device, and even if one communication session fails, communication can be continued via another communication session. It becomes.
  • ⁇ Modification 2 of Embodiment 2> 14 and 15 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a network of a plurality of MNOs. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 14 and 15 show an operation example in which the MNO is changed after a plurality of MNOs are selected by the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the second embodiment.
  • the business operator has established two communication sessions, specifically, communication sessions of the first MNO and the second MNO in steps S1601 and S1602.
  • steps S1601 and S1602. an example of changing from the communication session establishment state of the first MNO and the second MNO to the communication session establishment state of the second MNO and the third MNO based on the MNO selection policy will be described.
  • step S1610, step S1611 and step S1612 the same processing as in step S1309, step S1310 and step S1311 in FIG. 12 is performed.
  • group communication information for selecting an MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is collected in the MVNO from the operator device, each MNO, and each terminal connection device.
  • step S1620 the MVNO selects an appropriate set of MNOs for the terminal based on the group communication information and the MNO selection policy for each terminal group.
  • the second MNO and the third MNO are selected as an appropriate set of MNOs.
  • the communication session between the terminal and the first MNO is changed to the communication session between the terminal and the third MNO.
  • the MNO selection process in step S1620 may be performed periodically or every time the network management information is updated, and may be triggered by a message from the operator's device or an instruction from the terminal connection device. You may be broken.
  • the MVNO transmits an MNO change instruction for changing the communication session of the terminal from the first MNO to the third MNO to the terminal.
  • the MVNO may transmit the message used for this instruction only via the first MNO, may be transmitted only through the second MNO, or may be transmitted via both the first MNO and the second MNO. May be good.
  • the amount of messages can be reduced by reducing the information of the MNO of the change source from the message.
  • the second MNO there are merits such as better communication quality than the first MNO and lower communication cost.
  • reliability can be improved by transmitting a message that is resistant to failures and the like.
  • step S1622 the terminal responds to the MVNO via the MNO with an MNO change response for indicating whether or not the MNO can be changed.
  • the switching source MNO here, the first MNO
  • the switching destination MNO here, the third MNO
  • the MNO switching information of the terminal includes information useful for establishing a communication session, such as switching timing, terminal position information, and load status.
  • the MVNO transmits a first MNO release instruction indicating cancellation of the communication session with the terminal to the first MNO, and the first MNO transmits the first MNO release instruction to the terminal.
  • the terminal prepares for switching the MNO such as changing the eSIM in step S1625. After that, the terminal transmits a connection request to the switching destination MNO (third MNO) in step S1626, and the switching destination MNO (third MNO) transmits a connection response to the terminal in step S1627.
  • the terminal transmits the first MNO release response indicating that the communication session with the first MNO has been canceled to the third MNO, and the third MNO transmits the first MNO release response to the MVNO.
  • the third MNO may transmit switching information to the first MNO in step S1629. From this message, the first MNO can know that the communication session with the terminal has been completely canceled, and can delete the information of the terminal and the like.
  • the transmission of the switching information in step S1629 can be replaced by the transmission of the release instruction in step S1624, and is not essential.
  • the terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the third MNO in step S1630, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the third MNO in step S1631.
  • the business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1632, and the MVNO transmits data to the terminal via the third MNO in step S1633.
  • the terminal transmits the transmitted data to the terminal connection device.
  • the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data has been received in step S1634 to the MVNO via the third MNO.
  • step S1640 data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the second MNO, and in step S1641, data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the third MNO. Will be done. As described above, a plurality of communication sessions are established between the operator device and the terminal connection device.
  • the operation of adding the third MNO of the switching destination after releasing the first MNO of the switching source is performed, but there is also an operation of releasing the first MNO of the switching source after adding the third MNO of the switching destination.
  • the number of communication sessions established at the same time can be suppressed to two, which leads to simplification of the terminal device.
  • the latter can maintain two or more communication sessions at all times even during switching, so that more reliable communication can be maintained.
  • FIGS. 16 to 19 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the third modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 16 to 19 show an operation example in which data is duplicated after a session is established with a plurality of MNOs, and the same data is transmitted / received in the plurality of sessions. According to the configuration that performs such an operation, it is possible to increase the resistance to network failure.
  • step S1401 the business operator registers the terminal of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO.
  • the terminal transmits a connection request to the MVNO to the first MNO in step S1402, and receives a connection response from the first MNO in step S1403.
  • the terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S1404, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1405.
  • step S1406 the terminal communicates with the second MNO by performing the processes of step S1402, step S1403, step S1404, and step S1405 with respect to the second MNO.
  • Establish a session As described above, the terminal has established two communication sessions with the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • an example of transmitting and receiving the same data in a plurality of sessions will be described.
  • the business operator transmits the data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1420.
  • the MVNO performs a data duplication process for duplicating data in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • the MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the first MNO in step S1422, and the first MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal.
  • the MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the second MNO in step S1423, and the second MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal.
  • the terminal selects the same data (replica data) received from the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1424, and transmits the data selected in step S1425 to the terminal connection device.
  • the transmitted data may be simply duplicated, a flag indicating that the data is duplicated (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "data duplication flag"), and data duplication to the duplicated data.
  • Information indicating the number hereinafter sometimes referred to as "data replication number information”
  • sequence number indicating the order of data transmission hereinafter sometimes referred to as “data transmission sequence number”
  • time stamp indicating data transmission timing hereinafter, it may be referred to as “data transmission timing”
  • the terminal can determine which data is being duplicated during the data selection process in step S1424. Therefore, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to notify the duplication processing timing in advance.
  • the terminal can determine in advance the number of receptions of the same data at the time of the data selection process in step S1424. Therefore, there are merits such as simplification of memory management by data selection and disposal processing, and simplification of data arrival order and timing management.
  • the terminal can simplify the determination of the same data or discard the data before the received sequence number based on the sequence number during the data selection process in step S1424. There is a merit that the data disposal process can be simplified.
  • the terminal can measure the delay time of data arrival in the communication session of each MNO at the time of the data selection process in step S1424, so that the communication traffic status of each MNO and the occurrence of a failure occur. There is a merit that you can make a predictive judgment.
  • the data duplication process in step S1421 is performed by the MVNO, but instead, two identical data may be transmitted to the communication session of the MNO designated by the operator. ..
  • step S1424 an example of data selection processing in which the terminal selects data from a plurality of data will be described.
  • the data selection process includes, for example, (1) the process of selecting the earliest received data and then discarding the received data, (2) the data received from the high-priority MNO based on quality measurement and the like.
  • the process of selecting the data received from another MNO with a lower priority if data cannot be received from the MNO even after a certain period of time, the process of selecting the data received from another MNO with a lower priority, (3) for a certain period of time
  • a process of comparing the data from all the received MNOs and selecting the same data when at least two or more of the same data are received may be adopted.
  • step S1426 the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data from the first MNO has been received to the MVNO via the first MNO.
  • step S1427 the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data from the second MNO has been received to the MVNO via the second MNO.
  • step S1428 the MVNO performs data reception response processing including data retransmission and quality analysis of the communication session of each MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
  • the processes from step S1421 to step S1427 are repeated.
  • the processes from step S1426 to step S1428 are not necessarily all necessary.
  • the quality analysis of the data response process in step S1428 may be performed in the data selection process of the terminal in step S1424, and the result may be notified to the MVNO in step S1426 or step S1427.
  • the amount of data may be reduced by collectively notifying the MVNO of the data reception response of the first MNO and the second MNO only in the communication session of the first MNO or the second MNO.
  • the data reception response for example, ACK (ACKnowlegement) / NACK (Negative ACKnowlegement) of data reception may be used.
  • the data reception response may be provided with a data sequence number, MNO and session identification information, reception timing information, and the like.
  • the terminal connection device transmits a data transmission instruction to the terminal in step S1430.
  • the terminal replicates the same number of data as the MNO to be multiplexed.
  • the duplicated data may be given a data duplication flag, data duplication number information, data transmission sequence number, data transmission timing, and the like, as in step S1421.
  • the terminal transmits data to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S1432. Similarly, in step S1433, the terminal transmits data to the MVNO via the second MNO.
  • the MVNO performs the data selection process in step S1434. Then, in step S1435, the MVNO transmits the selected data to the operator.
  • the data selection process in step S1435 as in step S1424, for example, the selection of the earliest received data, the selection of the data of the MNO having the highest priority, and the case where the same data is received by at least two or more of the data. Selection, etc. are made.
  • the MVNO transmits a data reception response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1436. Similarly, in step S1437, the MVNO transmits a data reception response to the terminal via the second MNO. In step S1438, the terminal performs data reception response processing including data retransmission and quality analysis of the communication session of each MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
  • step S1441 the MVNO performs a data duplication process in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • step S1442 the MVNO attempts to transmit duplicate data to the terminal via the first MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal from the first MNO due to a failure in the first MNO or deterioration of the communication quality between the first MNO and the terminal as shown in step S1443. The situation.
  • the data from the MVNO arrives at the terminal from the second MNO in step S1444.
  • step S1451 the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is started in step S1451.
  • the reception timer for determining the reception of the data of the first MNO is started in step S1445.
  • the terminal performs the data selection process in step S1446, and transmits the selected data to the terminal connection device in step S1447.
  • the data selection process in step S1446, as in step S1424 for example, the selection of the earliest received data, the selection of the data of the MNO having the highest priority, and the case where the same data is received by at least two or more of the data. Selection, etc. are made. Hereinafter, these selections will be specifically described.
  • the terminal can receive the data from the second MNO, so that the data of the second MNO is transmitted to the terminal connection device.
  • the reception timer in step S1445 expires even if the terminal receives the data from the second MNO. Wait until the data is received from the first MNO. Even if the reception timer expires, if the terminal cannot receive the data from the first MNO, it selects the data from the second MNO, which is the second priority MNO, and transmits it to the terminal connection device.
  • the terminal When the data is selected when at least two or more of the same data are received, it is essential that the data of the first MNO and the second MNO are received by the terminal in the examples of FIGS. 16 to 19. .. Therefore, when the terminal cannot receive the data from the first MNO, it determines that the reliable data could not be received and discards the data. However, the terminal usually establishes a communication session with another MNO such as the third MNO. Therefore, even if the terminal does not receive the data of the first MNO, when it receives the data of the second MNO and the third MNO, it determines that the reliable data has been received and transmits the data to the terminal connection device. do it.
  • step S1448 the terminal attempts to transmit a data reception response to the MVNO via the first MNO, but in the examples of FIGS. 16 to 19, as shown in step S1449, due to a failure of the first MNO or the like, the terminal is sent from the terminal.
  • the data does not reach the MVNO from the first MNO.
  • the data reception response from the terminal reaches the MVNO via the second MNO in step S1450.
  • the amount of data may be reduced by collectively notifying the MVNO of the data reception response of the first MNO and the second MNO only in the communication session of the first MNO or the second MNO.
  • step S1452 the MVNO determines whether or not each MNO has a failure based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
  • step S1443 and step S1449 the terminal transmits only the NACK information of the first MNO in step S1448, the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is determined in step S1451.
  • the receive timer to do so expires. Therefore, the MVNO can determine in step S1452 that some kind of failure has occurred in the first MNO.
  • the terminal transmits data of both the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1450 using the communication session of the second MNO.
  • the failure of the communication session of the 1st MNO is a failure of only the downlink (MVNO ⁇ direction of the terminal), a failure of only the uplink (direction of the terminal ⁇ MVNO), or a failure of both the downlink and the uplink. Whether or not it exists can be determined by the MVNO.
  • step S1452 When the MVNO determines that a failure has occurred in step S1452, the MVNO performs the MNO change process in step S1460.
  • the MVNO changes from the communication session establishment state of the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1460. Change to the communication session establishment state of the 2nd MNO and the 3rd MNO.
  • the change process of step S1460 corresponds to the process of S1620 to S1631 of FIGS. 14 to 15.
  • the configuration of such a first example will be described.
  • a communication session is established in the first MNO and the second MNO, and data transmission / reception is performed only in the first MNO. Then, when a failure occurs in the first MNO, the route in which data transmission / reception is performed is changed from the route of the first MNO to the route of the second MNO.
  • the configuration of the second example will be described.
  • data transmission in the downlink direction (MVNO ⁇ terminal) is performed in the first MNO and the second MNO
  • data transmission in the uplink direction terminal ⁇ MVNO
  • the route in which data transmission / reception is performed is changed to only the route of the second MNO in both the down direction and the up direction.
  • the configuration of the third example will be described.
  • the first MNO and the second MNO carry out the data transmission in the down direction
  • the second MNO and the third MNO carry out the data transmission in the up direction. Then, when a failure occurs in the first MNO, data transmission / reception in the downward direction is continued only in the second MNO.
  • ⁇ Modification 4 of Embodiment 2> 20 to 22 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, in FIGS. 20 to 22, data is duplicated only in the downlink direction (MVNO ⁇ terminal direction) during normal times after a session is established with a plurality of MNOs, and the same data is communicated in a plurality of sessions. However, in the uplink direction (terminal ⁇ MVNO direction), an operation example in which data communication is performed by only one communication session without data duplication is shown.
  • the process from the terminal registration in step S1501 to the authentication response in step S1509 is the same as the process from step S1401 to step S1409 in FIG.
  • the terminal establishes two communication sessions with the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO. Two communication sessions have been established with the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • the business operator transmits the data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1520.
  • the MVNO performs a data duplication process for duplicating data in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • the MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the first MNO in step S1522, and the first MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal.
  • the MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the second MNO in step S1523, and the second MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal.
  • the terminal selects the same data (replica data) received from the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1524, and transmits the data selected in step S1525 to the terminal connection device.
  • step S1526 the terminal transmits a data reception response to the MVNO via the first MNO, which is the first priority MNO.
  • the data of the data reception response for example, ACK / NACK of data reception of both the communication session of the first MNO and the communication session of the second MNO may be used.
  • a data sequence number, information for identifying the MNO and the session, reception timing information, and the like may be added to the data reception response.
  • step S1527 the MVNO performs data reception response processing in the same manner as in step S1428 of FIG. In the example here, it is a normal time, and since the data reception response in step S1526 can be correctly received, data retransmission processing, quality analysis, and the like are performed in step S1527. As described below, if there is a problem with the communication session currently in use by the quality analysis, or if it is determined that another communication session is better, the MNO change process or the like is performed in step S1560 described later. It is said.
  • step S1530 The business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1530.
  • the MVNO performs a data duplication process in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • step S1532 the MVNO attempts to transmit duplicate data to the terminal via the first MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S1533, the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal from the first MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO arrives at the terminal from the second MNO in step S1534.
  • step S1540 the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is started in step S1540.
  • the terminal performs the data selection process in step S1535, and transmits the selected data to the terminal connection device in step S1536.
  • the data received from the second MNO is transmitted to the terminal connection device.
  • step S1537 the terminal attempts to transmit a data reception response to the MVNO via the first MNO, which is the first priority MNO, but in the examples of FIGS. 20 to 22, the failure of the first MNO as shown in step S1538. Therefore, even in the upstream direction, the data from the terminal does not reach the MVNO from the first MNO. Therefore, when a failure occurs in the first MNO as in steps S1533 and S1538, the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response for the first MNO shown in step S1540 expires. ..
  • step S1539 the MVNO determines whether or not it is necessary to change the upstream MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
  • the uplink MNO change request indicating the change from the first MNO to the second MNO and the retransmission data are sent as the uplink MNO change request. Attempts to transmit to the terminal via the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S1551, the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal from the first MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO arrives at the terminal from the second MNO in step S1552.
  • the terminal performs data selection processing in step S1553, and transmits data to the terminal connection device as needed in step S1554. Since the data received by the terminal at this timing is preliminary data that has been retransmitted, the data is transmitted to the terminal connection device as necessary.
  • the terminal receives the upstream MNO change request and changes the MNO for transmitting the upstream data from the first MNO to the second MNO.
  • the terminal transmits a data reception response to the MVNO via the second MNO. Of the data reception responses at this time, for example, NACK is used for the response to at least the downlink data of the first MNO.
  • step S1560 the MVNO determines whether or not it is necessary to change the MNO based on statistical information such as data reception response information and the number of retransmissions, and if it determines that it is necessary, performs the MNO change process.
  • .. 20 to 22 show an example in which the MVNO changes the MNO for performing data transmission from the first MNO to the third MNO because the failure has occurred in the first MNO.
  • the change process of step S1560 corresponds to the process of steps S1620 to S1631 of FIGS. 14 to 15.
  • ⁇ Modification 5 of Embodiment 2> The components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the fifth modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.
  • the wireless communication system according to the fifth modification can realize all of the second embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the second embodiment. When only one of the second embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the second embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
  • FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 1102 according to the present modification 5.
  • the MVNO 1102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
  • the upper core network 1102-1 in FIG. 23 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 1102-9, a PGW function module 1102-10, a business operator interface module 1102-11, and a data duplication / selection module 1102-16.
  • the operator interface module 1102-11 synchronizes between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them.
  • the operator interface module 1102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 1102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
  • the PGW function module 1102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of the IP packet, and also selects and switches the MNO according to the instruction of the MNO selection control module 1102-7.
  • the MNO interface module 1102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 1102-3.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 duplicates the data to be transmitted to each MNO and selects the data to be received from each MNO based on the data selection policy table 1102-18 when establishing a communication session with a plurality of MNOs. ..
  • the operator request management control module 1102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 1102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 1102-4 for inter-terminal association.
  • the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting the policy for selecting and switching the MNO for each terminal group.
  • the MNO selection policy table 1102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
  • the operator request management control module 1102-6 for a terminal group of the first operator via the operator interface module 1102-11, the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2. In addition, via the operator interface module 1102-11, the operator issues a list of importance for each terminal connection device related to each terminal of the terminal group in which the first operator is located, and an instruction to consider the importance order of the terminal-to-terminal connection devices. When the request management control module 1102-6 is reached, the information is stored in the MNO selection policy table 1102-4.
  • the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8 is, for example, billing information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, flat-rate for a specific period, flat-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the selection control module 1102-7. .. Further, in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2, 1102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator, when writing to these tables securely, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 1102-3.
  • the HSS module 1102-3 which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator.
  • the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective.
  • a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
  • the selection control module 1102-7 which is an information management unit, of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group via the MNO interface module 1102-9, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16, and the PGW function module 1102-10.
  • Group communication information which is information related to communication, is collected and stored in the database group 1102-12.
  • the database group 1102-12 includes a network monitor database 1102-13, a terminal monitor database 1102-14, and a billing information database 1102-15. The group communication information and the database group 1102-12 will be described below.
  • the network monitor database 1102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored.
  • the network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the terminal monitor database 1102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
  • the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 1102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
  • the selection control module 1102-7 comprehensively considers the above group communication information, and performs selection of a plurality of MNOs suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group and MNO switching control for each terminal. For example, the selection control module 1102-7 gives an instruction to distribute the MVNO bases based on the MVNO base information received from the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8, and the PGW function module 1102-10 responds to the instruction. The addressing control is performed. In this case, it is possible to reduce the influence on the service provision to the business operator even in the event of a large-scale failure peculiar to the MVNO base.
  • the data selection control module 1102-17 manages the data selection policy of the data selection policy table 1102-18.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 duplicates and selects a plurality of data based on the data selection policy managed by the data selection control module 1102-17.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 performs, for example, the data duplication process of step S1421 of FIG. 16 of the modification 3 of the second embodiment, the data selection process of step S1434 of FIG. 17, and the like.
  • the information in the data selection policy table 1102-18 is set by each business operator directly from the business operator interface module 1102-11 or via the business operator request management control module 1102-6.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 is a PGW function module based on the MNO selected by the selection control module 1102-7 and the data selection policy of the data selection control module 1102-17.
  • the data received from 1102-10 is duplicated for the required number of MNOs and communication sessions. Then, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 transmits the duplication data to each MNO via the MNO interface module 1102-9.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 When receiving from the terminal to the MVNO, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 has a plurality of MNOs based on the MNO selected by the selection control module 1102-7 and the data selection policy of the data selection control module 1102-17. Select data from the data received from the communication session of. Then, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 transmits the selected data to each business operator via the PGW function module 1102-10 and the business operator interface module 1102-11.
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 1105 according to the present modification 5, which corresponds to one of the terminals 1105aa to 1105bc (FIG. 9) of the second embodiment.
  • the terminal 1105 of FIG. 24 has a plurality of antennas, a plurality of transmitters / receivers, and a plurality of SIMs / eSIMs in order to establish a communication session at the same time as a plurality of MNOs. It is not always necessary to use multiple pieces of hardware for each of the antenna and the transmitter / receiver. For example, an antenna corresponding to the operating frequencies of multiple MNOs, a transmitter / receiver capable of time division multiplexing, and the like. One piece of hardware capable of sharing MNO communication may be used.
  • a terminal 1105 that can be connected to two MNOs at the same time is shown.
  • the first antenna 1105-1a, the first transmitter / receiver 1105-2a, and the first SIM / eSIM1105-6a are used for the connection with the first MNO.
  • a second antenna 1105-1b, a second transmitter / receiver 1105-2b, and a second SIM / eSIM1105-6b are used for connection with the second MNO.
  • the first antenna 1105-1a and the second antenna 1105-1b may be abbreviated as antennas 1105-1a and 1105-1b.
  • the first transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and the second transmitter / receiver 1105-2b may be abbreviated as the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b
  • the first SIM / eSIM1105-6a and the second SIM / eSIM1105-6b may be referred to as the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b.
  • SIM / eSIM1105-6a, 1105-6b may be abbreviated.
  • the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b are the signals received by the antennas 1105-1a and 1105-1b, which are down-converted from the radio frequency to the signal band, demodulated, error corrected, and the like. Perform processing.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame, and also performs the data selection policy table 1105. Based on -13, data is selected from the data received from the first MNO and the data received from the second MNO.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1105-3 performs, for example, the data selection process of step S1424 of FIG. 17 of the modification 3 of the second embodiment, the data duplication process of step S1431 of FIG.
  • the information in the data selection policy table 1105-13 may be set by the control information received from the operator via the MVNO, MNO and the processor 1105-5, or the terminal maintenance terminal via the terminal maintenance function module 1105-11. Etc. may be set.
  • the data selection policy table 1105-13 is managed by the data selection control module 1105-12.
  • the terminal connection device interface 1105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device.
  • the terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC, a personal computer, or the like, or an AGV, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like integrated with these.
  • the communication system of the transmitters / receivers 1105-2a and 1105-2b may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any of the MVNOs that can be incorporated. It may be a wireless system.
  • the processor 1105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 1105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 24, in the configuration in which the terminal 1105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 1105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble.
  • the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 1105 are formed as a message by the processor 1105-5, and the data duplication / selection module 1105-3, the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a, 1105-2b, and the antenna 1105. -1a, 1105-1b, transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO.
  • the data duplication / selection module 1105-3 replicates the required MNOs and the number of communication sessions from the above message based on the data selection policy table 1105-13 as in the case of data reception, and replicates the data to each MNO. To send.
  • a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside.
  • Milenage is usually used as the default setting.
  • the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method, the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM1105-6a and 1105-6b, so that it is used by default.
  • the authentication method to be used may be changed.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 3100 according to the third embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system 3100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and includes an MVNO network device 3102 and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 3105aa, 3105ab, 3105ac, 3105ba, 3105bb, 3105bc. It should be noted that one wireless communication terminal and the other wireless communication terminal form a terminal group.
  • the MVNO 3102 selects one MNO network and session suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group based on the group communication information, and controls the establishment or switching of the session.
  • the terminal such as the wireless communication terminal 3105aa measures or detects the group communication information by itself or acquires the group communication information from the network. Then, the terminal autonomously controls the selection of one MNO network and session, and the establishment or switching of the session based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group becomes appropriate.
  • the terminal such as the wireless communication terminal 3105aa measures or detects the group communication information by itself or acquires the group communication information from the network. Then, the terminal autonomously controls the selection of one MNO network and session, and the establishment or switching of the session based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group becomes appropriate.
  • first business operator there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 3100.
  • first business operator there are 1-1 terminal 3105aa, 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and 1-3 terminal 3105ac.
  • second operator there are 2-1 terminal 3105ba, 2-2 terminal 3105bb, and 2-3 terminal 3105bc.
  • the MVNO wireless communication system 3100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks.
  • the first MNO network includes a core network 3103a and a 1-1 base station 3104a and a 1-2 base station 3104ab connected to the core network 3103a.
  • the second MNO network includes a core network 3103b and a 2-1 base station 3104ba and a 2-2 base station 3104bb connected to the core network 3103b.
  • the third MNO network includes a core network 3103c and a third base station 3104ca and a third-2 base station 3104cc connected to the core network 3103c.
  • the core networks 3103a, 3103b, and 3103c include S-GW (Serving Gateway), MME (Mobility Management Entity), and the like.
  • the MVNO network device 3102 performs wireless communication with wireless communication terminals 3105aa, 3105ab, 3105ac, 3105ba, 3105bb, and 3105bc that can be connected to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the MVNO 3102 includes the core network 3103a of the first MNO, the core network 3103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 3102-1 connected to the core network 3103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 3102-1 includes P-GW (PacketDataNetworkGateway), HSS (HomeSubscriberServer), and the like. included.
  • the upper core network 3102-1 is connected to the system 3101a of the first operator and the system 3101b of the second operator.
  • the system 3101a of the first business operator and the system 3101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
  • the MVNO 3102 includes the upper core network 3102-1, the MNO selection policy table 3102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and group communication which is information on communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals. It includes an information management module 3102-7 that stores and manages information in a database group.
  • the terminal includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit as described in a modified example described later.
  • the database group of the terminal is substantially the same as the database group of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment, and holds the group communication information.
  • the information management unit of the terminal is substantially the same as the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment. Specifically, the information management unit of the terminal manages the group communication information held in the database group. Further, the information management unit of the terminal selects one MNO network and session for the terminal based on the group communication information so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy.
  • the information management unit of the terminal autonomously controls the establishment or switching of the session of the terminal based on the selection result. By controlling the information management unit in this way, it is possible to optimize communication for each terminal group regarding the MNO selection policy and the like.
  • the information management unit is a selection control module provided integrally with the database group
  • the information management unit may be provided separately from the database group, or may be another module. May be good.
  • the quality of communication lines fluctuates with time due to the effects of changes in the environment and movement of objects over time.
  • the quality of the communication line may be significantly deteriorated due to a network failure or the like. Therefore, the terminal manages the communication line quality for each terminal group as group communication information, selects the MNO suitable for the MNO or the session selection policy, and switches the communication session based on the group communication information.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator are the first MNOs as the lowest priced MNOs among various rate plans. Is selected.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac each have the 1-1 base station 3104aa and the 1-first of the core network 3103a of the 1st MNO according to the selection result. 2 Establish and communicate with any of the base stations 3104ab in a wireless section.
  • this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator have the transmission speed, the transmission delay amount, and the transmission speed and the transmission delay amount at regular intervals or as needed. It is assumed that the communication quality in the network such as error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and the line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "the amount of communication used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO”. Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", “Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed”, “Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and puts it in the database group. It is assumed that it has been saved.
  • the 1-3 terminal 3105ac detects the deterioration of the line quality of the wireless communication line 3106-1a with the 1-2 base station 3104ab based on its own measurement result.
  • the 1-3 terminal 3105ac measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-1 base station 3104aa and the communication line quality of the 2-1 base station 3104ba. Suppose it is measured or detected.
  • the 1-3 terminal 3105ac is based on the "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", the “latest information of group communication information acquired regularly or at any time", or the aggregated results thereof.
  • the 1-1 base station 3104aa of the core network 3103a of the first MNO whose cost can be reduced is selected, and the communication session is established independently.
  • the 1-3 terminals 3105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3106-1b.
  • the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3102-7 of MVNO3102, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information.
  • the terminal autonomously selects the MNO network and communication session, and establishes and switches the communication session when the communication line between the MNO and the base station fails. To explain.
  • the MNO selection policy of the second operator is set to "Priority 1: Continue communication in case of failure, Priority 2: Minimize communication cost".
  • Priority 1 Continue communication in case of failure
  • Priority 2 Minimize communication cost
  • the 2-1 terminal 3105ba belonging to the terminal group of the second operator establishes a communication session with the 1-2 base station 3104ab of the 1st MNO3103a, and the 2-2 terminal
  • the 3105bb establishes a communication session with the 2nd-2nd base station 3104bb of the 2nd MNO3103b
  • the 2nd-3rd terminal 3105bc establishes a communication session with the 3rd-2nd base station 3104bb of the 3rd MNO3103c, and communicates with each other. It shall be.
  • this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
  • the 2-1 terminal 3105ba, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator are regularly or as needed like the terminal group of the first business operator.
  • communication quality in the network such as transmission speed, transmission delay amount, error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
  • the 2-1 terminal 3105ba, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3105bc are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "the amount of communication used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO”. Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", “Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed”, “Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and puts it in the database group. It is assumed that it has been saved.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3105bb detects the communication line failure of the 2nd MNO3103b or the wireless line failure of 3106-2a based on its own measurement result.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3105bb measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-2 base station 3104ab and the communication line quality of the 3-1 base station 3104ac. Suppose it is measured or detected.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3105bb is based on the "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", the “latest information of group communication information acquired regularly or at any time", or the aggregated results thereof.
  • the 3-1 base station 3104ca of the core network 3103c of the third MNO whose cost can be reduced is selected, and the communication session is established independently.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3105bb belonging to the terminal group of the second operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3106-2b.
  • the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3102-7 of MVNO3102, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information.
  • the terminal measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or uses the MVNO connected to the three MNO networks (first to third MNO networks) to obtain the group communication information from the network.
  • get. 26 to 28 show a sequence in which the terminal autonomously selects one MNO and a communication session based on the group communication information so that communication for each terminal group is appropriate, and establishes or switches the communication session. An example is shown.
  • step S3201 the business operator registers the terminal of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO before starting the communication.
  • This registration and setting may be performed by a message via a telecommunication line.
  • the terminal After turning on the power, the terminal accesses its own SIM (Subscriber Identity Module), performs a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) search, and selects the MNO to be connected according to the specified procedure.
  • SIM Subscriber Identity Module
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal transmits a connection request to the first MNO in step S3202.
  • the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S3203
  • the wireless connection path is established.
  • the MVNO since the MVNO has an authentication function such as HSS, the MVNO transmits an authentication request to the terminal in step S3204, and the terminal transmits an authentication response to the MVNO in step S3205.
  • the authentication process is performed between the terminal and the MVNO.
  • the transmission and reception of these messages may be performed in a plurality of steps, or may be performed in cooperation between the HSS of the MNO and the HSS of the MVNO.
  • the session between the terminal and the MVNO is established. The same process is performed on all terminals in the group terminal.
  • the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO measure or detect the communication line quality and failure information for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group established above in step S3206.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 are, for example, radio line quality information obtained by receiving signals from each terminal at the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO, that is, received power and SINR (Signal). -to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLockError Rate), etc., or information related to the synchronization status of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.) may be used. ..
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, or the like.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be, for example, maintenance management information and device failure information for the entire network (abnormal congestion in some devices in each MNO, device damage information, signal blockage information due to maintenance, etc., test operation. Moderate status information).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal transmitted from the terminal and predicted to be received by the MVNO. More specifically, when the health check signal is transmitted from the MVNO and the corresponding response is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor.
  • At least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group for which the session has been established measures or detects the communication line quality and failure information by themselves in step S3207. Then, at least one or more terminals transmit communication line quality and failure information to the MVNO via the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3207 are, for example, the quality information of the wireless line received and obtained at each terminal, that is, the received power, SINR (Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLock Error). Rate) or the like, or information related to the synchronization state of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3207 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, or the like.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3207 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
  • the MVNO updates the information on the connection cost for each terminal group regularly or at any time.
  • the terminal belonging to the MVNO wireless communication system receives the group communication information notified from the MVNO periodically or at any time in step S3208. Further, when the terminal detects the deterioration of the communication line quality or the occurrence of a failure, the terminal transmits a group communication information request to the MVNO in step S3209-1, and the MVNO receiving the request steps.
  • the group communication information may be transmitted to the terminal in S3209-2, and the terminal may receive the group communication information. After that, at least one of step S3208 and step S3209 (step S3409-1 and step S3409-2) is performed regularly or at any time.
  • step S3211 the terminal fails in the communication line with the first MNO based on the "group communication information" measured by the terminal itself or notified periodically or at any time from the network. Detect quality degradation. This detection is used as a base station of the first MNO or as a switching trigger of the first MNO.
  • the terminal resumes or continues communication by performing the processing after step S3212. Specifically, the terminal uses the group communication information acquired periodically or at any time in step S3212 to obtain another base station of the first MNO, a base station of the second MNO, and a third MNO that have been communicating so far. It is decided to measure the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel for the base station of. Then, in step S3213, the terminal measures their synchronization channel and broadcast channel.
  • step S3214 the terminal selects to switch to one of the first MNO base station, the second MNO base station, and the third MNO base station based on the measurement result. At this time, the terminal also changes the eSIM as necessary.
  • the terminal has the first process of steps S3215-1a to S3216-2a, the second process of steps S3215-1b to S3216-2b, and steps S3215-1c to S3216-2c. Perform any of the third processing of.
  • the terminal When performing the first process, the terminal transmits the connection request to the first MNO in step S3215-1a, and receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S3215-2a. Then, the terminal transmits the authentication request to the first MNO in step S3216-1a, and receives the authentication response from the first MNO in step S3216-2a, so that communication is established between the terminal and the first MNO. ..
  • the terminal When performing the second process, the terminal transmits the connection request to the second MNO in step S3215-1b, and receives the connection response from the second MNO in step S3215-2b. Then, the terminal transmits the authentication request to the second MNO in step S3216-1b, and receives the authentication response from the second MNO in step S3216-b, so that communication is established between the terminal and the second MNO. ..
  • the terminal When performing the third process, the terminal transmits the connection request to the third MNO in step S3215-1c, and receives the connection response from the third MNO in step S3215-2c. Then, the terminal transmits the authentication request to the third MNO in step S3216-1c, and receives the authentication response from the third MNO in step S3216-2c, so that communication is established between the terminal and the third MNO. ..
  • the terminal manages the group communication information which is the information related to the communication of the wireless communication terminal belonging to the terminal group and other wireless communication terminals, and is based on the group communication information.
  • One MNO network and session is selected for the terminal, and based on the selection result, autonomous control of establishment or switching of the session of the terminal is performed.
  • the terminals in the terminal group can maintain appropriate communication line quality including wireless and wired, and can continue communication.
  • FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 3300 according to the first modification of the third embodiment.
  • one terminal is suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group based on the group communication information obtained by communicating with other terminals capable of connecting to the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It autonomously controls the selection of MNO networks and sessions, and the establishment or switching of sessions.
  • first business operator there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 3300.
  • first business operator there are 1-1 terminal 3305aa, 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and 1-3 terminal 3305ac.
  • second operator there are 2-1 terminal 3305ba, 2-2 terminal 3305bb, and 2-3 terminal 3305bc.
  • the MVNO wireless communication system 3300 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks.
  • the first MNO network includes a core network 3303a and a 1-1 base station 3304aa and a 1-2 base station 3304ab connected to the core network 3303a.
  • the second MNO network includes a core network 3303b and a 2-1 base station 3304ba and a 2-2 base station 3304bb connected to the core network 3303b.
  • the third MNO network includes a core network 3303c and a third base station 3304ca and a third-2 base station 3304cc connected to the core network 3303c.
  • the core networks 3303a, 3303b, and 3303c include S-GW (Serving Gateway), MME (Mobility Management Entity), and the like.
  • the MVNO 3302 includes the core network 3303a of the first MNO, the core network 3303b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 3302-1 connected to the core network 3303c of the third MNO as the MVNO network.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 3302-1 includes P-GW (PacketDataNetworkGateway), HSS (HomeSubscriberServer), and the like. included.
  • the MVNO network device 3302 is similar to the upper core network 3102-1, MNO selection policy table 3102-2 and information management module 3102-7 of the third embodiment, and has the same upper core network 3302-1 and MNO selection policy table 3302. -2 and the information management module 3302-7 are included.
  • the upper core network 3302-1 is connected to the system 3301a of the first operator and the system 3301b of the second operator.
  • the system 3301a of the first business operator and the system 3301b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
  • the terminal includes a database group and an information management unit similar to the database group and the information management unit of the third embodiment.
  • the quality of communication lines fluctuates with time due to the effects of changes in the environment and movement of objects over time.
  • the quality of the communication line may be significantly deteriorated due to a network failure or the like. Therefore, the terminal manages the communication line quality for each terminal group as group communication information, selects the MNO suitable for the MNO or the session selection policy, and switches the communication session based on the group communication information.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa, the 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac, which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the first MNOs as the lowest priced MNOs among various rate plans. Is selected.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac each have the 1-1 base station 3304aa and the 1-first of the core network 3303a of the 1st MNO according to the selection result. 2 Establish and communicate with any of the base stations 3304ab in the radio section.
  • this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa, the 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator have the transmission speed, the transmission delay amount, and the transmission speed and the transmission delay amount at regular intervals or as needed. It is assumed that the communication quality in the network such as error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and the line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa, the 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "the amount of communication used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO”. Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", “Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed”, “Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and puts it in the database group. It is assumed that it has been saved.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator wirelessly communicates with the other terminals 1-2 terminal 3305ab and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac which are other terminals belonging to the terminal group of the first operator. It is assumed that they are connected by lines 3306-1c and 3306-1d. Then, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa is connected to another terminal for determining that the 1-2 terminal 3305ab and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac are continuing the communication session with the 1-2 base station 3304ab. The information shall be appropriately received from the wireless communication lines 3306-1c and 3306-1d as group communication information.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa has detected the deterioration of the line quality of the wireless communication line 3306-1a with the 1-1 base station 3304aa based on its own measurement result, or the 1st 1-. 1 It is assumed that the wireless communication line 3306-1a with the base station 3304aa is disconnected.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-2 base station 3304ab and the communication line quality of the 2-1 base station 3304ba. Measure or detect.
  • the 1-1 terminal 3305aa has "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", “latest information of group communication information acquired from the network regularly or at any time”, and connection information of other terminals. , Or, from the aggregated results, select the 1-2 base station 3304ab of the core network 3303a of the first MNO whose cost can be reduced, and establish the communication session independently. As a result, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3306-1b.
  • the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3302-7 of MVNO3302, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information. Further, among the group communication information, the connection information of other terminals notified periodically or at any time from other terminals is the information obtained by the inter-terminal communication.
  • the MNO selection policy of the second operator is set to "Priority 1: Continue communication in case of failure, Priority 2: Minimize communication cost".
  • Priority 1 Continue communication in case of failure
  • Priority 2 Minimize communication cost
  • the 2-1 terminal 3305ba belonging to the terminal group of the second operator establishes a communication session with the 1-2 base station 3304ab of the 1st MNO3303a, and the 2-2 terminal
  • the 3305bb establishes a communication session with the 2-2 base station 3304bb of the 2nd MNO3303b
  • the 2-3 terminal 3305bc establishes a communication session with the 3-2 base station 3304cc of the 3rd MNO3303c and communicates with each other. It shall be.
  • this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
  • the 2-1 terminal 3305ba, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator are regularly or as needed like the terminal group of the first business operator.
  • communication quality in the network such as transmission speed, transmission delay amount, error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
  • the 2-1 terminal 3305ba, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "traffic volume used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO”. Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", “Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed”, “Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and stores them in the management database. It is assumed that it has been saved.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3305bb belonging to the terminal group of the second operator wirelessly communicates with the other terminals 2-1 terminal 3305ba and the 2-3 terminal 3305bb which belong to the terminal group of the second operator. It is assumed that they are connected by lines 3306-2c and 3306-2d. Then, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb determines that the 2-1 terminal 3305ba and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc continue the communication session with the 1-2 base station 3304ab and the 3-2 base station 3304cc. It is assumed that the connection information of other terminals for the above is appropriately received from the wireless communication lines 3306-2c and 3306-2d as group communication information.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3305bb has detected the communication line failure of the 2nd MNO3303b or the wireless line failure of the 3306-2a based on its own measurement result.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3305bb measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-2 base station 3304ab and the communication line quality of the 3-1 base station 3304ac. Measure or detect.
  • the 2-2 terminal 3305bb is "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", “latest information of group communication information acquired regularly or at any time", connection information of other terminals, or From the aggregated results, the 3-1 base station 3304ca of the core network 3303c of the third MNO whose cost can be reduced is selected, and the communication session is established independently. As a result, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb belonging to the terminal group of the second operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3306-2b.
  • the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3302-7 of MVNO3302, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information. Further, among the group communication information, the connection information of other terminals notified periodically or at any time from other terminals is the information obtained by the inter-terminal communication.
  • the terminal measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or uses the MVNO connected to the three MNO networks (first to third MNO networks) to obtain the group communication information from the network.
  • the terminal autonomously selects one MNO and a communication session based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group becomes appropriate, and establishes the communication session.
  • an example of a switching sequence is shown.
  • step S3401 the business operator registers the terminal of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO before starting the communication.
  • This registration and setting may be performed by a message via a telecommunication line.
  • the terminal After turning on the power, the terminal accesses its own SIM (Subscriber Identity Module), performs a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) search, and selects the MNO to be connected according to the specified procedure.
  • SIM Subscriber Identity Module
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal transmits a connection request to the first MNO in step S3402.
  • the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S3403
  • the wireless connection path is established.
  • the MVNO since the MVNO has an authentication function such as HSS, the MVNO transmits an authentication request to the terminal in step S3404, and the terminal transmits an authentication response to the MVNO in step S3405. Then, the authentication process is performed between the terminal and the MVNO.
  • transmission and reception of these messages may be performed in a plurality of steps, or cooperation may be performed between the HSS of the MNO and the HSS of the MVNO.
  • the session between the terminal and the MVNO is established. The same process is performed on all terminals in the group.
  • the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO measure or detect the communication line quality and failure information for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group established above in step S3406.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 are, for example, radio line quality information obtained by receiving signals from each terminal at the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO, that is, received power and SINR (Signal). -to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLockError Rate), etc., or information related to the synchronization status of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.) may be used. ..
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, or the like.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be, for example, maintenance management information and device failure information for the entire network (abnormal congestion in some devices in each MNO, device damage information, signal blockage information due to maintenance, test operation, etc.). Moderate status information).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal predicted to be received by the MVNO transmitted from the terminal. More specifically, when the health check signal is transmitted from the MVNO and the corresponding response is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor.
  • At least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group for which the session has been established measures or detects the communication line quality and failure information by themselves in step S3407. Then, at least one or more terminals transmit communication line quality and failure information to the MVNO via the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3407 are, for example, the quality information of the wireless line received and obtained at each terminal, that is, the received power, SINR (Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLock Error). Rate) or the like, or information related to the synchronization state of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.).
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3407 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, and the like.
  • the communication line quality and failure information in step S3407 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
  • the MVNO updates the information on the connection cost for each terminal group regularly or at any time.
  • the terminal belonging to the MVNO wireless communication system receives the group communication information notified from the MVNO periodically or at any time in step S3408. Further, when the terminal detects the deterioration of the communication line quality or the occurrence of a failure, the terminal transmits a group communication information request to the MVNO in step S34091, and the MVNO receiving the request steps.
  • the group communication information may be transmitted to the terminal in S3409-2, and the terminal may receive the group communication information.
  • terminals in the same terminal group perform Direct Communication in step S3417 to send and receive connection information of other terminals as group communication information.
  • step S3408 at least one of step S3408, step S3409 (step S3409-1 and step S3409-2), and step S3417 is performed regularly or at any time.
  • step S3411 the terminal communicates with the first MNO based on the "group communication information" measured by the terminal itself or notified periodically or at any time from the network or another terminal. Detect line failures or quality degradation. This detection is used as a base station of the first MNO or as a switching trigger of the first MNO.
  • the terminal resumes or continues communication by performing the processing after step S3412. Specifically, the terminal uses the group communication information acquired periodically or at any time in step S3412 to obtain another base station of the first MNO, a base station of the second MNO, and a third MNO that have been communicating so far. It is decided to measure the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel for the base station of. Then, in step S3413, the terminal measures their synchronization channel and broadcast channel.
  • step S3414 the terminal selects to switch to one of the first MNO base station, the second MNO base station, and the third MNO base station based on the measurement result. At this time, the terminal also changes the eSIM as necessary.
  • the terminal returns to the result of the switching selection, the first process of step S3415-1a to step S3412-2a, the second process of step S3415-1b to step S3412-2b, and step S3415-1c to step S3416-. Perform any of the third processing of 2c.
  • the first to third processes are the same as the first to third processes (steps S3415-1a to S3416-2c in FIG. 28) described in the third embodiment.
  • the terminal can share and utilize the group communication information with other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal. .. Therefore, the terminals in the terminal group can maintain appropriate communication line quality including wireless and wired, and can continue communication.
  • ⁇ Modification 2 of Embodiment 3> 33 and 34 will be used to describe the components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the third embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system according to the second modification can realize all of the third embodiment and the first modification of the third embodiment. When only one of the third embodiment and the first modification of the third embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
  • FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 3102 according to the second modification.
  • the MVNO3102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
  • the upper core network 3102-1 in FIG. 33 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 3102-9, a PGW function module 3102-10, and a business operator interface module 3102-11.
  • the operator interface module 3102-11 balances between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them.
  • the operator interface module 3102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 3102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
  • the PGW function module 3102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of the IP packet, and switches the MNO according to the instruction of the MNO information management module 3102-7.
  • the MNO interface module 3102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 3102-3.
  • the operator request management control module 3102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 3102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 3102-4 for inter-terminal association.
  • the MNO selection policy table 3102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting what kind of policy is used to switch the MNO for each terminal group.
  • the MNO selection policy table 3102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
  • the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 3102-2.
  • the operator issues a list of importance for each terminal connection device related to each terminal of the terminal group in which the first operator is located, and an instruction to consider the importance order of the terminal-to-terminal connection devices.
  • the request management control module 3102-6 is reached, the information is stored in the MNO selection policy table 3102-4.
  • the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8 is, for example, billing information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, flat-rate for a specific period, flat-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the information management module 3102-7. Further, in the MNO selection policy table 3102-2, 3102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator, when writing to these tables securely, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 3102-3.
  • the HSS module 3102-3 which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator.
  • the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective.
  • a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
  • the information management module 3102-7 collects group communication information, which is information related to communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals, via the MNO interface module 3102-9 and the PGW function module 3102-10. Then, the information management module 3102-7 stores the group communication information in the database group including the network monitor database 3102-13, the terminal monitor database 3102-14, and the billing information database 3102-15.
  • group communication information and the database group will be described below.
  • the network monitor database 3102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored.
  • the network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the terminal monitor database 3102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
  • the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 3102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
  • the information management module 3102-7 notifies the terminal of the group communication information collected and stored as described above periodically or at any time for each terminal group and each terminal. Further, when the information management module 3102-7 receives a group communication information request from an arbitrary terminal belonging to an arbitrary terminal group, the information management module 3102-7 sends group communication information to the terminal that has transmitted the group communication information request in response to the group communication information request. Send.
  • FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 3105 according to the second modification, which corresponds to one of the terminals 3105aa to 3105bc (FIG. 25) of the third embodiment.
  • the transmitter / receiver 3105-2 performs down-conversion of the signal received by the antenna 3105-1 from the radio frequency to the signal band, and processing of the received radio layer 1 such as demodulation and error correction.
  • the data processing unit 3105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 3105-2 in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame.
  • the terminal connection device interface 3105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device.
  • the terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), a personal computer, or an AGV (Automated Guided Vehicle) integrated with these, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like.
  • the communication system of the transmitter / receiver 3105-2 may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any wireless system that the MVNO can incorporate. ..
  • the processor 3105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 3105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 34, in the configuration in which the terminal 3105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 3105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble. At this time, the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 3105 are formed as a message by the processor 3105-5, and pass through the data processing unit 3105-3, the transmitter / receiver 3105-2, and the antenna 3105-1. It is sent to the MVNO.
  • the SIM / eSIM3105-6 that cooperates with the HSS module 3102-3 (Fig. 33), which is the terminal information management control module of the MVNO, has an authentication function that issues an encryption key.
  • a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside.
  • Milenage is usually used as the default setting.
  • the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method
  • the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM3105-6 to set the authentication method to be used by default. It may be possible to change it.
  • it is not possible to set a large number of authentication methods themselves in a normal standard it is possible to realize a different authentication method for each business operator, so that a highly reliable network system can be constructed.
  • the terminal 3105 receives the group communication information notified to the terminal 3105 periodically or at any time from the information management module 3102-7 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO 3102 by the antenna 3105-1.
  • the group communication information received by the antenna 3105-1 is output to the switching control module 3105-9 including the database group via the transmitter / receiver 3105-2, the data processing unit 3105-3, the processor 3105-5, and the like.
  • the switching control module 3105-9 classifies the received group communication information into the database group of the switching control module 3105-9 and stores it.
  • the database group of the switching control module 3105-9 is almost the same as the database group of the information management module 3102-7 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO3102, and the network monitor database 3105-9a, the terminal monitor database 3105-9b, and so on. It includes a billing information database 3105-9c.
  • the switching control module 3105-9 of the terminal 3105 transmits a group communication information request to the information management module 3102-7 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO 3102.
  • the terminal 3105 receives the group communication information notified from the information management module 3102-7 to the terminal 3105 by the antenna 3105-1.
  • the group communication information received by the antenna 3105-1 is also classified and stored in the database group of the switching control module 3105-9 by the switching control module 3105-9 in the same manner as described above.
  • the operator request management control module 3105-10 of the terminal 3105 and the MNO selection policy tables 3105-10a and 3105-10b included therein are the operator request management control module 3102-6 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO 3102 and the MNO selection included therein. It is the same as the policy table 3102-2, 3102-4.
  • the MNO selection policy table 3105-10a for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 3105-10b for inter-terminal association included in the operator request management control module 3105-10 of the terminal 3105 are the terminal maintenance function module 3105. Written by a terminal maintenance terminal or the like via -11.
  • the switching control module 3105-9 which is an information management unit, is suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy tables 3105-10a and 3105-10b based on the group communication information collected in the switching control module 3105-9. Select one MNO network and session, and establish or switch sessions independently.
  • the MVNO maintenance terminal may access the operator request management control module 3105-10 via the terminal maintenance function module 3105-11 to write or read. Further, the MVNO maintenance terminal may access the switching control module 3105-9 and SIM / eSIM to read or write. With this configuration, it is possible to change the MNO switching control algorithm of the switching control module 3105-9 and change the parameters related to the SIM / eSIM service.
  • terminal-to-terminal communication may be performed in a frequency band different from the frequency band used for communication with the MNO base station.
  • the terminal 3105 may be provided with an antenna and a transmitter / receiver of a system different from those of these devices, which use a frequency band different from the frequency bands of the antenna 3105-1 and the transmitter / receiver 3105-2.
  • the data processing unit 3105-3 may be configured by combining a device that processes data for communication with the base station and a device of another system that processes data for communication between terminals, or is used for communication with the base station. And may consist of equipment that processes data for both for terminal-to-terminal communication.
  • modules and devices other than these may be shared for communication with the base station and communication between terminals.
  • the network monitor database 3105-9a, the terminal monitor database 3105-9b, and the billing information database 3105-9c included in the switching control module 3105-9 are obtained from terminal-to-terminal communication.
  • Group communication information can be stored.
  • the switching control module 3105-9 can perform MNO switching control using the group communication information.
  • FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 4100 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system 4100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and includes an MVNO network device 4102 and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 4105aa, 4105ab, 4105ac, 4105ba, 4105bb, 4105bc. It should be noted that one wireless communication terminal included in the plurality of wireless communication terminals and the other wireless communication terminals form a terminal group.
  • a terminal such as the wireless communication terminal 4105aa measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or acquires the group communication information from the network. Then, the terminal determines the number of MNO networks and sessions (one or more) selected for the terminal based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group is appropriate, and for the terminal. It autonomously controls the selection of a determined number of MNO networks and sessions, and the establishment or switching of sessions.
  • a terminal such as the wireless communication terminal 4105aa measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or acquires the group communication information from the network. Then, the terminal determines the number of MNO networks and sessions (one or more) selected for the terminal based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group is appropriate, and for the terminal. It autonomously controls the selection of a determined number of MNO networks and sessions, and the establishment or switching of sessions.
  • first business operator there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 4100.
  • first business operator there are 1-1 terminal 4105aa, 1-2 terminal 4105ab, and 1-3 terminal 4105ac.
  • second operator there are 2-1 terminal 4105ba, 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and 2-3 terminal 4105bc.
  • the MVNO wireless communication system 4100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks.
  • the first MNO network includes a core network 4103a and a 1-1 base station 4104aa and a 1-2 base station 4104ab connected to the core network 4103a.
  • the second MNO network includes a core network 4103b and a 2-1 base station 4104ba and a 2-2 base station 4104bb connected to the core network 4103b.
  • the third MNO network includes a core network 4103c and a third base station 4104ca and a third-2 base station 4104cc connected to the core network 4103c.
  • the core networks 4103a, 4103b, 4103c include S-GW, MME, and the like.
  • the MVNO network device 4102 performs wireless communication with wireless communication terminals 4105aa, 4105ab, 4105ac, 4105ba, 4105bb, 4105bc that can be connected to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the MVNO 4102 includes the core network 4103a of the first MNO, the core network 4103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 4102-1 connected to the core network 4103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 4102-1 includes P-GW, HSS, and the like.
  • the upper core network 4102-1 is connected to the system 4101a of the first operator and the system 4101b of the second operator.
  • the system 4101a of the first business operator and the system 4101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
  • the MVNO 4012 includes the upper core network 4102-1, the MNO selection policy table 4102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and group communication which is information on communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals. It includes an information management module 4102-7 that stores and manages information in a database group.
  • the terminal includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit as in the third embodiment.
  • the information management unit of the terminal according to the fourth embodiment determines the number of MNO networks and sessions (one or more) selected for the terminal based on the group communication information. Then, the information management unit of the terminal according to the fourth embodiment selects the number of MNO networks and sessions determined for the terminal so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy based on the group communication information, and based on the selection result. It autonomously controls the establishment or switching of terminal sessions.
  • Each terminal can establish the above-determined number of MNO networks and sessions.
  • the number determined is two, and each terminal establishes two sessions.
  • communication continuation tolerance Becomes stronger.
  • communication continuation tolerance Becomes stronger.
  • communication can be continued in another session established at the same time, so that data can be communicated without interruption.
  • the reliability can be improved as compared with the wireless communication system of the third embodiment in which each terminal establishes only one session.
  • the first operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes the improvement of reliability by establishing multiple sessions for each terminal and the reduction of communication costs.
  • the 1-1 terminal 4105aa, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator are the lowest prices in the entire terminal group among various rate plans.
  • the first MNO is selected as the MNO having the lowest communication cost and the second MNO is selected as the MNO having the second lowest communication cost.
  • the 1-1 terminal 4105aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is the closest first of the first MNO base stations having the lowest communication cost as the first session.
  • -1 It is connected to the core network 4103a of the first MNO and the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO via the base station 4104aa.
  • the 1-1 terminal 4105aa uses the second MNO core network 4103b via the nearest 2-1 base station 4104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost.
  • And is connected to the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO.
  • the 1-1 terminal 4105aa can perform low-priced communication with the system 4101a of the first operator.
  • the 1-2 terminal 4105ab and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the closest to the base station of the first MNO having the lowest communication cost as the first session. It is connected to the core network 4103a of the first MNO and the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO via the 1-2 base station 4104ab. In addition, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac use the closest 2-1 base station 4104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost as the second session. Through, it is connected to the core network 4103b of the second MNO and the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO. As a result, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac can perform low-priced communication with the system 4101a of the first operator.
  • the 1-1 terminal 4105aa, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first business operator are groups that are periodically notified by the information management module 4102-7. You are getting communication information. At this time, it is assumed that the 1-3 terminal 4105ac detects the deterioration of the line quality of the wireless communication line 4106-1a with the 1-2 base station 4104ab.
  • the 1-3 terminal 4105ac is a terminal group of the first operator based on the latest information of the group communication information acquired regularly or at any time, or the aggregated result.
  • the communication session with the 1st MNO is continued, and the 1-1 base station 4104aa of the core network 4103a of the 1st MNO is transmitting the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel by downlink, and the operation is continued.
  • the 1-3 terminal 4105ac autonomously establishes a communication session with the 1-1 base station 4104aa of the core network 4103a of the 1st MNO when a positive result is obtained in any of the judgments. ..
  • the 1-3 terminal 4105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 4106-1b with the 1-1 base station 4104aa. It becomes.
  • the group communication information includes (1) communication line quality and failure information measured or detected immediately before the terminal establishes or switches the session, or immediately before the network is selected, and (2) periodically or at any time from the network. Communication line quality and failure information of the network to be notified, (3) connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal concerned, which are notified regularly or at any time from the network, and (4) periodical from the network. Or, information on connection costs of multiple terminals belonging to the terminal group, which is notified at any time, and (5) measured by other terminals, which are notified regularly or at any time from other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal.
  • the network referred to here may be at least one of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks.
  • the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is, for example, the information notified from the information management module 4102-7 of MVNO4102, and these information are sent to the terminal group of each business operator. Information collected from each terminal to which it belongs.
  • the second operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes communication resistance to maintain the continuation of communication even in the event of a failure of a specific MNO.
  • the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 4105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator are the information notified from the information management module 4102-7 from the network.
  • One or more MNOs so that the connection destination MNOs of terminals in the same terminal group do not overlap as much as possible based on the connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal, which are notified regularly or at any time. And select and switch communication sessions.
  • the 2-1 terminal 4105ba establishes a communication session with, for example, the 1-1 base station 4104aa of the first MNO4103a and the 2-1 base station 4104ba of the second MNO4103b, which have good quality.
  • the 2-2 terminal 4105bab acquires the connection information indicating the establishment of the communication session of the 2-1 terminal 4105ba from the connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group notified periodically or at any time.
  • the connection information of other terminals will be described as the information included in the group communication information from the information management module 4102-7, but the information obtained by the terminal-to-terminal communication as in the first modification of the third embodiment. It may be.
  • the 2-2 terminal 4105bb selects the MNO and the base station so as to reduce the overlap with the MNO and the base station connected to the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, and conducts a communication session.
  • Establish. the 2-2 terminal 4105bb selects the 3-1 base station 4104ca of the 3rd MNO4103c that does not overlap with the 1st MNO4103a and the 2nd MNO4103b as the first session, and the 1st-2nd base station of the 1st MNO4103a other than the 3rd MNO4103c. 4104ab is selected as the second session. Then, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb establishes a communication session with the selected 3-1 base station 4104ca and the 1-2 base station 4104ab.
  • the 2-3 terminal 4105bc is the communication session of the 2-1 terminal 4105ba and the 2-2 terminal 4105bb from the connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group notified periodically or at any time. Acquire connection information indicating establishment.
  • the 2-3 terminal 4105bc Based on the acquired connection information, the 2-3 terminal 4105bc has less overlap with the MNO and the base station to which the 2-1 terminal 4105ba and the 2-2 terminal 4105bb are connected, so that the MNO and the base station do not overlap with each other. Select to establish a communication session. For example, the 2-3 terminal 4105bc selects the 2-2 base station 4104bb of the 2nd MNO4103b and the 3-2 base station 4104bb of the 3rd MNO4103c to establish a communication session.
  • connection destination MNOs are made uniform for the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 4105bc of the terminal group of the second operator, so that the system of the second operator It is possible to perform communication with 4101b with high resistance to communication failure.
  • the group communication information for making a decision based on the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is (1) network communication measured or detected immediately before the decision to establish or switch a session on the network, or immediately before network selection.
  • Line quality and failure information (2) connection information of all terminals belonging to the terminal group measured or detected immediately before the decision to establish or switch a session on the network, or immediately before selecting the network, and (3) belonging to the terminal group.
  • the network referred to here may be at least one of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks. This information is notified to the terminal from the MVNO information management module 4102-7 for each terminal group as group communication information.
  • MNO selection policies for each terminal group include, for example, (1) a policy that emphasizes low communication costs, (2) a policy that emphasizes communication tolerance that maintains communication continuity, and (3) local disasters.
  • the amount of communication traffic should be the thickness of the contract line
  • Correspondingly leveling policy (5) Policy to select a session with good communication quality to improve communication quality, (6) Policy with different frequency bands to improve resistance to wireless communication interference, etc.
  • a policy to select, or a combination of these, etc. is used.
  • FIGS. 36 to 38 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 36 to 38 show an operation example in which the terminal autonomously changes the MNO after establishing a session with a plurality of MNOs.
  • step S4201 the business operator registers the terminal and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO. Based on the MNO selection policy, the MVNO selects group communication information to be notified periodically or at any time to a plurality of terminals in the terminal group. The terminal establishes an initial communication session based on the group communication information received in the past and the MNO selection information set in the terminal in advance.
  • the terminal transmits a connection request to the MVNO to the first MNO in step S4202, and receives a connection response from the first MNO in step S4203.
  • the terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S4204, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S4205.
  • step S4206 the terminal communicates with the second MNO by performing the processes of step S4202, step S4203, step S4204, and step S4205 with respect to the second MNO.
  • Establish a session the processing at the normal time and the processing at the time of failure will be described.
  • the terminal connection device transmits a data transmission instruction to the terminal in step S4220.
  • the terminal performs a data duplication process for duplicating data in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • the terminal transmits the duplicated data to the first MNO, and the first MNO transmits the duplicated data to the MVNO.
  • the terminal transmits the duplicated data to the second MNO, and the second MNO transmits the duplicated data to the MVNO.
  • the MVNO selects the same data (replica data) received from the first MNO and the second MNO in step S4224, and transmits the data selected in step S4225 to the operator.
  • the MVNO transmits the data reception response to the terminal in the communication session of the first MNO in step S4226, and transmits the data reception response to the terminal in the communication session of the second MNO in step S4227.
  • the data of the data reception response for example, ACK / NACK may be used.
  • a data sequence number, information for identifying the MNO and the session, reception timing information, and the like may be added to the data reception response.
  • the terminal performs data reception response processing in step S4228.
  • it is a normal time, and since the data reception response of step S4226 and step S4227 can be correctly received, data retransmission processing, quality analysis, and the like are performed.
  • the MNO change process or the like is performed in step S4251 described later.
  • the terminal connection device transmits a data transmission instruction to the terminal in step S4230.
  • step S4231 the terminal performs a data duplication process in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO.
  • step S4232 the terminal attempts to transmit duplicate data to the MVNO via the first MNO.
  • the data from the terminal since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S4233, the data from the terminal does not reach the MVNO via the first MNO.
  • the data from the terminal reaches the MVNO via the second MNO in step S4234.
  • the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is started in step S4241.
  • the MVNO performs the data selection process in step S4235, and transmits the selected data to the business operator in step S4236.
  • the data received from the second MNO is transmitted to the operator.
  • step S4237 the MVNO attempts to transmit a data reception response to the terminal via the first MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal via the first MNO.
  • the data from the MVNO will reach the terminal via the second MNO in step S4239.
  • the terminal can determine that the first MNO has a failure.
  • the response to at least the uplink data of the first MNO is NACK.
  • the terminal can determine that the data reception response is not received by the MVNO via the first MNO and the failure has occurred in the first MNO.
  • the reception timer is effective in a configuration in which the terminal receives the data reception response via only one MNO communication session (for example, only the first MNO).
  • step S4240 the terminal performs data reception response processing including data retransmission and quality analysis of the communication session of each MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
  • the terminal may analyze statistical information such as data reception response information and the number of retransmissions.
  • the terminal receives the terminal group information from the MVNO in step S4250.
  • the terminal performs the MNO change process in step S4251 based on the statistical information obtained in step S4240 and the terminal group information received in step S4250.
  • the terminal since the failure has occurred in the first MNO, the terminal determines that the MNO connected to the terminal is changed from the first MNO to the third MNO.
  • the terminal autonomously transmits a connection request to the third MNO in step S4252, and receives a connection response from the third MNO in step S4253.
  • the terminal transmits an authentication request for establishing a communication session via the third MNO to the MVNO via the third MNO.
  • the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the third MNO, and a communication session is established.
  • the terminal is suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group based on the group communication information such as the information of the terminal group to which it belongs and the quality information of its own communication session. Independently select an appropriate MNO. As a result, it is possible to reduce the management load of a network such as an MVNO, and to quickly respond to a failure or the like at each terminal.
  • ⁇ Modification 2 of Embodiment 4> 39 and 40 will be used to describe the components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment.
  • the wireless communication system according to the second modification can realize all of the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the fourth embodiment. When only one of the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the fourth embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
  • FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 4102 according to the second modification.
  • the MVNO4102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
  • the upper core network 4102-1 in FIG. 39 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module.
  • the MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 4102-9, a PGW function module 4102-10, a business operator interface module 4102-11, and a data duplication / selection module 4102-16.
  • the operator interface module 4102-11 balances between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them.
  • the operator interface module 4102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 4102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
  • the PGW function module 4102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of an IP packet, and selects an MNO based on an instruction from the MNO information management module 4102-7 and access information from each terminal.
  • the MNO interface module 4102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 4102-3.
  • the data duplication / selection module 4102-16 duplicates the data to be transmitted to each MNO and selects the data to be received from each MNO based on the data selection policy table 4102-18 when establishing a communication session with a plurality of MNOs. ..
  • the operator request management control module 4102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 4102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 4102-4 for inter-terminal association.
  • the MNO selection policy table 4102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting the policy for selecting and switching the MNO for each terminal group.
  • the MNO selection policy table 4102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
  • the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 4102-5.
  • the operator issues a list of importance for each terminal connection device related to each terminal of the terminal group in which the first operator is located, and an instruction to consider the importance order of the terminal-to-terminal connection devices.
  • the request management control module 4102-6 is reached, the information is stored in the MNO selection policy table 4102-4.
  • the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8 is, for example, charged information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, fixed-rate for a specific period, fixed-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the information management module 4102-7. Further, in the MNO selection policy table 4102-2, 4102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator, when writing to these tables securely, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 4102-3.
  • the HSS module 4102-3 which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator.
  • the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective.
  • a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
  • the information management module 4102-7 provides information on communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals via the MNO interface module 4102-9, the data duplication / selection module 4102-16, and the PGW function module 4102-10. Collect group communication information that is. Then, the information management module 4102-7 stores the group communication information in the database group including the network monitor database 4102-13, the terminal monitor database 4102-14, and the billing information database 4102-15. The group communication information and the database group will be described below.
  • the network monitor database 4102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored.
  • the network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
  • the terminal monitor database 4102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
  • the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 4102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
  • the information management module 4102-7 notifies the terminal of the group communication information collected and stored as described above periodically or at any time for each terminal group and each terminal. Further, when the information management module 4102-7 receives a group communication information request from an arbitrary terminal belonging to an arbitrary terminal group, the information management module 4102-7 sends the group communication information to the terminal that transmitted the group communication information request in response to the group communication information request. Send.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 4105 according to the second modification, which corresponds to one of the terminals 4105aa to 4105bc (FIG. 35) of the fourth embodiment.
  • the terminal 4105 of FIG. 40 has a plurality of antennas, a plurality of transmitters / receivers, and a plurality of SIMs / eSIMs in order to establish a communication session at the same time as a plurality of MNOs. It is not always necessary to use multiple pieces of hardware for each of the antenna and the transmitter / receiver. For example, an antenna corresponding to the operating frequencies of multiple MNOs, a transmitter / receiver capable of time division multiplexing, and the like. One piece of hardware capable of sharing MNO communication may be used.
  • FIG. 40 an example of a terminal 4105 that can be connected to two MNOs at the same time is shown.
  • the first antenna 4105-1a, the first transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, and the first SIM / eSIM4105-6a are used for the connection with the first MNO.
  • a second antenna 4105-1b, a second transmitter / receiver 4105-2b, and a second SIM / eSIM4105-6b are used for connection with the second MNO.
  • the first antenna 4105-1a and the second antenna 4105-1b may be abbreviated as antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b.
  • the first transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and the second transmitter / receiver 4105-2b may be abbreviated as the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and 4105-2b
  • the first SIM / eSIM4105-6a and the second SIM / eSIM4105-6b may be referred to.
  • SIM / eSIM4105-6a, 4105-6b may be abbreviated.
  • the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, 4105-2b is a signal received by the antennas 4105-1a, 4105-1b, which is down-converted from the radio frequency to the signal band, demodulated, error corrected, and the like. Perform processing.
  • the data duplication / selection module 4105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and 4105-2b in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame, and also performs the data selection policy table 4105. Based on -13, data is selected from the data received from the first MNO and the data received from the second MNO.
  • the information in the data selection policy table 4105-13 may be set by the control information received from the operator via the MVNO, MNO and the processor 4105-5, or the terminal maintenance terminal via the terminal maintenance function module 4105-11. Etc. may be set.
  • the data selection policy table 4105-13 is managed by the data selection control module 4105-12.
  • the terminal connection device interface 4105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device.
  • the terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC, a personal computer, or the like, or an AGV, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like integrated with these.
  • the communication system of the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and 4105-2b may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any of the MVNOs that can be incorporated. It may be a wireless system.
  • the processor 4105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 4105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 40, in the configuration in which the terminal 4105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 4105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble.
  • the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 4105 are formed as a message by the processor 4105-5, and the data duplication / selection module 4105-3, the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, 4105-2b, and the antenna 4105. -1a, 4105-1b, transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO.
  • the data duplication / selection module 4105-3 duplicates the required MNO and the number of communication sessions from the above message based on the data selection policy table 4105-13 as in the case of data reception, and duplicates the data to each MNO. To send.
  • a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside.
  • Milenage is usually used as the default setting.
  • the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method, the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM4105-6a and 4105-6b, so that it is used by default.
  • the authentication method to be used may be changed.
  • the terminal 4105 receives the group communication information notified to the terminal 4105 periodically or at any time from the information management module 4102-7 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102 by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b.
  • the group communication information received by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b is selected including the database group via the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, 4105-2b, the data duplication / selection module 4105-3, the processor 4105-5, and the like. It is output to the control module 4105-9.
  • the selection control module 4105-9 classifies the received group communication information into the database group of the selection control module 4105-9 and stores it.
  • the database group of the selection control module 4105-9 is almost the same as the database group of the information management module 4102-7 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102, and the network monitor database 4105-9a, the terminal monitor database 4105-9b, and the database monitor database 4105-9b. It includes a billing information database 4105-9c.
  • the selection control module 4105-9 of the terminal 4105 transmits a group communication information request to the information management module 4102-7 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102.
  • the terminal 4105 receives the group communication information notified from the information management module 4102-7 to the terminal 4105 by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b.
  • the group communication information received by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b is also classified and stored in the database group of the selection control module 4105-9 by the selection control module 4105-9 in the same manner as described above.
  • the operator request management control module 4105-10 of the terminal 4105 and the MNO selection policy tables 4105-10a and 4105-10b included therein are the operator request management control module 4102-6 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102 and the MNO selection included therein. It is the same as the policy table 4102-2, 4102-4.
  • the MNO selection policy table 4105-10a for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 4105-10b for inter-terminal association included in the operator request management control module 4105-10 of the terminal 4105 are the terminal maintenance function module 4105. Written by a terminal maintenance terminal or the like via -11.
  • the selection control module 4105-9 which is an information management unit, has an MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy tables 4105-10a and 4105-10b based on the group communication information collected in the selection control module 4105-9. And the number of communication sessions is determined, the determined number of MNO networks and sessions are selected, and the sessions are established or switched independently.
  • the MVNO maintenance terminal may access the operator request management control module 4105-10 via the terminal maintenance function module 4105-11 to write or read. Further, the MVNO maintenance terminal may access the selection control module 4105-9 and the SIM / eSIM to read or write. With this configuration, it is possible to change the MNO selection control algorithm of the selection control module 4105-9 and change the parameters related to the SIM / eSIM service.
  • the MVNO is provided to a plurality of bases in order to prevent the network system from being unable to provide the telecommunications service due to a natural disaster in one area or the like.
  • Distributed depending on the MVNO, if it is not possible to distribute to multiple bases, or even if it can be distributed to multiple bases, the distribution of functions is insufficient (when a failure occurs in a specific base, it is also possible to provide services at other bases. There are cases where the impact is spillover).
  • each MVNO if the services and prices provided by each MVNO are changed sequentially, or if the MVNO and MNO are connected, and if the RAT (Radio Access Technology) or roaming destination that connects the same MNO is different, the MVNO's Dispersion is difficult.
  • RAT Radio Access Technology
  • the system minimizes the influence on the service to each business operator, and the price is lower than usual.
  • a system that provides services or a system that provides services with better connectivity in normal times will be described.
  • FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 6000 according to the fifth embodiment. Since the wireless communication system 6000 according to the fifth embodiment is substantially the same as the wireless communication system 400 according to the third modification of the first embodiment, different parts will be mainly described.
  • the wireless communication system 6000 is a system that provides a communication session to the terminal group of the first operator, and is a system that is required to have high reliability. Therefore, the first business operator has a redundant configuration including the first redundant system 6001a of the first business operator and the second redundant system 6001b of the first business operator.
  • the wireless communication system 6000 includes an MVNO network device 6002a at the first base and an MVNO network device 6002b at the second base.
  • the MVNO network device 6002a at the first base is a network device that cannot be distributed to multiple bases, or even if there are multiple bases, the functional distribution is insufficient (when a failure occurs at a specific base, the service is provided at another base. It is assumed that it is a network device (which also affects). Therefore, a redundant system is configured by further providing the MVNO network device 6002b of the second base where the bases are sufficiently separated and the functions are independent.
  • the MVNO network device of the first base may be abbreviated as "first MVNO”
  • the MVNO network device of the second base may be abbreviated as "second MVNO”.
  • the first MVNO6002a and the second MVNO6020b are connected to a network of three MNOs (first MNO6003a, second MNO6003b, third MNO6003c).
  • first redundant system 6001a and second redundant system 6001b there is a first operator (first redundant system 6001a and second redundant system 6001b) as an operator using the wireless communication system 6000 having a redundant configuration of the first MVNO 6002a and the second MVNO 6002b.
  • first redundant system 6001a and second redundant system 6001b As a terminal group of the first operator, there are nine terminals, 1-1 terminal 6005aa to 1-9 terminal 6005ai.
  • terminals are connected to, for example, a first operator's 1-1 terminal connection device 6007aa to a first operator's 1st-9th terminal connection device 6007ai by a wired cable, and a plurality of terminals are wirelessly connected via a base station. It is connected to the MNO.
  • the terminal connection device of each first business operator is a device that provides an application of the first business operator, and is used in various ways for each business operator.
  • the importance of the terminal connection device is defined for the first operator, and the 1-1 terminal connection device 6007aa (importance: highest)> the 1-2 terminal connection device 6007ab> the 1-3 terminal connection.
  • the first redundant system 6001a of the first operator has "high reliability” in the MNO selection policy table 6002a-2 for a certain terminal group designated with the first MVNO 6002a. (Distribution setting of connection MNO) ". Similarly, the first redundant system 6001a of the first operator has "high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)" in the MNO selection policy table 6002b-2 for a certain terminal group designated with the second MVNO 6002b. And set.
  • the table may be set remotely via a transmission line, or may be converted to a required format via an MVNO maintenance terminal and set.
  • the MVNOs connected to the 1-1 terminal 6005aa to the 1-9th terminal 6005ai belonging to the terminal group of the first operator are uniformed (connected to different MVNOs as much as possible). .. Then, when it is determined that the MNO is not uniform, the MVNO is uniform based on the connection information of the terminals stored in the network monitor database in the switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7. The MVNO network and session are switched so as to be.
  • the first redundant system 6001a of the first operator sets the "terminals" in the MNO selection policy tables 6002a-4 and 6002b-4 for inter-terminal association for a certain terminal group designated between the MVNOs 6002a and 6002b.
  • the switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7 determine whether the 1-1 terminal 6005aa to the 1-9th terminal 36005ai are connected to the MNO in the order of importance set by the operator.
  • the switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7 are connected to the terminal based on the connection information of the terminal stored in the network monitor database.
  • the MNO network and session are switched so that the MNOs are connected in the order of importance. In the above, it is the operator who writes to the MNO selection policy table.
  • the operation of the first redundant system 6001a of the first business operator has been described.
  • the operation of the second redundant system 6001b of the first operator differs depending on the redundant configuration of the first operator.
  • the second redundant system 6001b performs communication between redundant systems (not shown). The status is matched with the first redundant system 6001a, but no instruction is given to each MVNO.
  • the redundant configuration of the first operator is 0/1 system (the terminal connected to the first redundant system 6001a is not connected to the second redundant system 6001b, but is connected to the second redundant system 6001b.
  • the second redundant system 6001b is implemented by the first redundant system 6001a for the terminal not set in the first redundant system 6001a. Make the same settings as the one you did. In this case, for example, of the nine terminals, five are connected to the first redundant system 6001a and four are connected to the second redundant system 6001b.
  • the 1-1 terminal 6005aa connected to the 1-1 terminal connecting device 6007aa of the first operator, which has the highest importance, is connected to the base station of the first MNO6003a and connected to the first MVNO6003a.
  • the 1-2 terminal 6005ab connected to the 1-2 terminal connecting device 6007ab of the first operator, which has the second highest importance is connected to the base station of the second MNO6003b different from the first MNO6003a. It is connected to a second MVNO6002b different from the first MVNO6002a.
  • the first to third terminal 6005ac connected to the first operator 1-3 terminal connecting device 6007ac which is the third most important, is a base station of the third MNO6003c different from the first MNO6003a and the second MNO6003b. Is connected to the first MVNO6002a, which is different from the second MVNO6002b.
  • the terminals connected to the terminal connection device of the first operator having the highest importance of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 are the first MNO, the second MNO, the third MNO, the first MNO, and the second MNO.
  • the service provision to the first operator is completely cut off.
  • the influence thereof can be reduced, so that it is possible to provide a communication service having a high tolerance in the event of a failure.
  • the function unit that integrates and controls a plurality of MVNOs (hereinafter referred to as the multiple MVNO management control function unit) manages the operation. Control may be performed.
  • the plurality of MVNO management control units may manage the price information for each MVNO and select a cheap MVNO. At that time, if the payment is made at the end of the month, the MVNO whose price is finally the cheapest may be selected by predicting the amount of data expected to be used within the month.
  • a configuration in which MVNOs are distributed at a specific ratio is also effective as an MVNO selection policy in a plurality of MVNO management control units. According to such a configuration, it is possible to use an inexpensive MVNO while reducing the influence of the occurrence of a specific MVNO failure. Further, for example, if the maintenance information of the MVNO is notified in advance, it is desirable to set the MVNO selection policy that does not allocate in that time zone. Further, for example, it is desirable that one operator can set a plurality of terminal groups.

Abstract

The purpose of the present invention is to provide technology with which it is possible to optimize communication with respect to a terminal group of wireless communication terminals. A wireless communication network comprising a database that holds group communication information pertaining to the communication of a plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group. The wireless communication network device also comprises an information management unit for managing the group communication information held in the database, selecting one or more MNO networks and sessions for each wireless communication terminal on the basis of the group communication information, and controlling the session establishment or switching of a wireless communication terminal on the basis of the selection result.

Description

無線通信ネットワーク装置、無線通信端末、無線通信システム、及び、通信方法Wireless communication network devices, wireless communication terminals, wireless communication systems, and communication methods
　本開示は、線通信ネットワーク装置、無線通信端末、無線通信システム、及び、通信方法であり、特に複数のＭＮＯ（Mobile Network Operator）ネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯ（Mobile Virtual Network Operator）ネットワークに関する。 The present disclosure relates to a line communication network device, a wireless communication terminal, a wireless communication system, and a communication method, and particularly relates to an MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) network connected to a plurality of MNO (Mobile Network Operator) networks.
　移動体通信システムのサービス事業者の一形態として、周波数ライセンスをもつ移動体通信事業者（Mobile Network Operator：以下「ＭＮＯ」）の設備の全てまたは一部を利用して、通信サービスを提供する仮想移動体事業者（Mobile Virtual Network Operator：以下「ＭＶＮＯ」）がある。 As a form of mobile communication system service operator, a virtual network operator that provides communication services using all or part of the equipment of a mobile network operator (hereinafter referred to as "MNO") with a frequency license. There is a mobile operator (Mobile Virtual Network Operator: hereinafter referred to as "MVNO").
　ＭＶＮＯは、ＭＮＯのネットワークを活用して、ＭＮＯの通信サービスとは異なる料金体系のサービスや無線通信端末（以下「端末」と略記する）からなる通信帯域保証サービス等をユーザに提供する事業を実施している。その中で、複数のＭＮＯネットワークを接続したＭＶＮＯシステムを構築し、端末毎に適切なＭＮＯの回線を利用して通信サービスを提供するＭＶＮＯが存在する。 MVNO is implementing a business that utilizes the MNO network to provide users with services with a charge system different from that of MNO communication services and communication band guarantee services consisting of wireless communication terminals (hereinafter abbreviated as "terminals"). doing. Among them, there is an MVNO that constructs an MVNO system in which a plurality of MNO networks are connected and provides a communication service by using an appropriate MNO line for each terminal.
　一般に、このような複数のＭＮＯネットワークを接続したＭＶＮＯシステムにおいて、端末がどのＭＮＯネットワークを選択するかについては、予め設定された優先度に基づいて切り替えていることが多い。例えば特許文献１には、予め設定された固定的なパラメータに制限されないＭＮＯネットワークの選択方法が示されている。この選択方法では、コネクションに関するパラメータを考慮して、単一の端末について適切なＭＮＯネットワークを選択する。 In general, in an MVNO system in which a plurality of MNO networks are connected, which MNO network the terminal selects is often switched based on a preset priority. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a method of selecting an MNO network that is not limited to preset fixed parameters. In this selection method, the appropriate MNO network is selected for a single terminal, taking into account the parameters related to the connection.
特許第５７７０２５７号公報Japanese Patent No. 5770257
　しかしながら、特許文献１の方法では、そのユーザが所有する端末を含む端末グループ全体の通信が適切になるようにＭＮＯネットワークを選択しない。また、通信回線が切断され、パラメータを伝送ができない端末について、適切なＭＮＯネットワークを選択することもできないという課題があった。 However, in the method of Patent Document 1, the MNO network is not selected so that the communication of the entire terminal group including the terminal owned by the user is appropriate. Further, there is a problem that an appropriate MNO network cannot be selected for a terminal whose communication line is disconnected and parameters cannot be transmitted.
　この結果、例えば、ある事業を行う１のユーザが、多くのＩｏＴ端末を接続しているような場合において、端末グループ全体で契約条件に合うように端末の接続先を管理することや、端末を接続するアプリケーション装置の優先度に基づいて端末の接続優先度を持たせることなどができないことがあった。 As a result, for example, when one user who conducts a certain business connects many IoT terminals, the connection destinations of the terminals can be managed so as to meet the contract conditions in the entire terminal group, or the terminals can be used. In some cases, it was not possible to give the connection priority of the terminal based on the priority of the application device to be connected.
　また例えば、一般的に、移動通信端末の位置、ネットワークの負荷、ネットワークの障害の有無等に起因して、移動体通信端末の接続に適切なネットワークが変化する。しかしながら、従来技術では、回線が切断された端末に対して、適切なＭＮＯネットワークを選択することができないことがあった。 Also, for example, in general, the network suitable for connecting a mobile communication terminal changes depending on the position of the mobile communication terminal, the network load, the presence or absence of a network failure, and the like. However, in the prior art, it may not be possible to select an appropriate MNO network for a terminal whose line is disconnected.
　そこで、本開示は、上記のような問題点を鑑みてなされたものであり、無線通信端末の端末グループについて通信を適切化可能な技術を提供することを目的とする。 Therefore, the present disclosure has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present disclosure is to provide a technique capable of optimizing communication for a terminal group of wireless communication terminals.
　本開示に係る無線通信ネットワーク装置は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末と無線通信を行う無線通信ネットワーク装置であって、端末グループに属する複数の前記無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を保持するデータベースと、前記データベースに保持された前記グループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末毎に１つ以上の前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、前記無線通信端末の前記セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行う情報管理部とを備え、前記グループ通信情報は、前記ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び前記複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークで、前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した前記ネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、前記ネットワークで、前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末の接続情報と、前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末の接続費用に関する情報と、前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される通信回線品質及び通信回線の障害情報との少なくともいずれか１つを含む。 The wireless communication network device according to the present disclosure is a wireless communication network device that performs wireless communication with a wireless communication terminal connectable to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to the plurality of MNO networks, and is a plurality of wireless communication network devices belonging to the terminal group. A database that holds group communication information that is information related to communication of the wireless communication terminal and the group communication information held in the database are managed, and one or more for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information. The MNO network and the session are selected, and based on the selection result, the wireless communication terminal is provided with an information management unit that controls establishment or switching of the session, and the group communication information is the MVNO network and the above. Communication line quality and failure information of the network measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network in at least one of the plurality of MNO networks, and the network. The connection information of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network, and the connection information of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group. It includes at least one of information on connection costs and communication line quality and communication line failure information notified once or repeatedly from the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group.
　本開示によれば、端末グループに属する複数の無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、無線通信端末毎に１つ以上のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、無線通信端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行う。このような構成によれば、無線通信端末の端末グループについて通信を適切化することができる。 According to the present disclosure, group communication information, which is information related to communication of a plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to a terminal group, is managed, and one or more MNO networks and sessions are established for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information. The selection is made, and the establishment or switching of the session of the wireless communication terminal is controlled based on the selection result. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize communication for a terminal group of wireless communication terminals.
　本開示の目的、特徴、局面及び利点は、以下の詳細な説明と添付図面とによって、より明白となる。 The purpose, features, aspects and advantages of this disclosure will be made clearer by the following detailed description and accompanying drawings.
実施の形態１に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施の形態１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施の形態１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施の形態１の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on modification 1 of Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施の形態１の変形例２に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on modification 2 of Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施の形態１の変形例３に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 3 of Embodiment 1. 実施の形態１の変形例４に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the MVNO network apparatus which concerns on modification 4 of Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施の形態１の変形例４に係る端末の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal which concerns on the modification 4 of Embodiment 1. 実施の形態２に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. 実施の形態２に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. 実施の形態２に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. 実施の形態２の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例２に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例２に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 3 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 3 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 3 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 3 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例４に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 4 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例４に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 4 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例４に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 4 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例５に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the MVNO network apparatus which concerns on the modification 5 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態２の変形例５に係る端末の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal which concerns on the modification 5 of Embodiment 2. 実施の形態３に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 3. 実施の形態３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 3. FIG. 実施の形態３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 3. FIG. 実施の形態３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 3. FIG. 実施の形態３の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 3. 実施の形態３の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 3. 実施の形態３の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 3. 実施の形態３の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 3. 実施の形態３の変形例２に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the MVNO network apparatus which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 3. 実施の形態３の変形例２に係る端末の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 3. 実施の形態４に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 4. FIG. 実施の形態４の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 4. 実施の形態４の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 4. 実施の形態４の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows the operation example of the wireless communication system which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 4. 実施の形態４の変形例２に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the MVNO network apparatus which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 4. 実施の形態４の変形例２に係る端末の構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the terminal which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 4. 実施の形態５に係る無線通信システムの例示的な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system which concerns on Embodiment 5.
　以下で説明する実施の形態及び変形例に係る構成要素のうち、それまでに図示した構成要素と同じまたは類似する構成要素については同じまたは類似する参照符号を付し、異なる構成要素について主に説明する。以下、実施の形態に係る無線通信システムを図に基づいて説明する。 Among the components according to the embodiments and modifications described below, the components that are the same as or similar to the components shown so far are designated by the same or similar reference numerals, and different components are mainly described. To do. Hereinafter, the wireless communication system according to the embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings.
　＜実施の形態１＞
　図１は、本実施の形態１に係る無線通信システム１００の例示的な構成を示す図である。無線通信システム１００は、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供するシステムであり、無線通信ネットワーク装置であるＭＶＮＯ（Mobile Virtual Network Operator）ネットワーク装置１０２と、複数の無線通信端末１０５ａａ、１０５ａｂ、１０５ａｃ、１０５ｂａ、１０５ｂｂ、１０５ｂｃとを備える。なお、以下の説明では、無線通信端末を「端末」と略記することもあり、通信セッションを「セッション」と略記することもある。この略記は、本実施の形態１以外においても同様に用いる。 <Embodiment 1>
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of a wireless communication system 100 according to the first embodiment. The wireless communication system 100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and is a wireless communication network device MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator) network device 102, and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 105aa, 105ab. It includes 105ac, 105ba, 105bb, and 105bc. In the following description, the wireless communication terminal may be abbreviated as "terminal", and the communication session may be abbreviated as "session". This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
　図１の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム１００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者と第２事業者とが存在している。第１事業者の端末グループとして、第１－１端末１０５ａａ、第１－２端末１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末１０５ａｃが存在している。第２事業者の端末グループとして、第２－１端末１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末１０５ｂｂ、及び、第２－３端末１０５ｂｃが存在している。 In the example of FIG. 1, there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 100. As the terminal group of the first operator, there are the 1-1 terminal 105aa, the 1-2 terminal 105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 105ac. As the terminal group of the second operator, there are 2-1 terminal 105ba, 2-2 terminal 105bb, and 2-3 terminal 105bc.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム１００は、ＭＮＯ（Mobile Network Operator）ネットワークとして、第１ＭＮＯネットワーク、第２ＭＮＯネットワーク、及び、第３ＭＮＯネットワークを含む。第１ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク１０３ａと、コアネットワーク１０３ａに接続された第１－１基地局１０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局１０４ａｂとを含む。第２ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク１０３ｂと、コアネットワーク１０３ｂに接続された第２－１基地局１０４ｂａ及び第２－２基地局１０４ｂｂとを含む。第３ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク１０３ｃと、コアネットワーク１０３ｃに接続された第３－１基地局１０４ｃａ及び第３－２基地局１０４ｃｂとを含む。 The MVNO wireless communication system 100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO (Mobile Network Operator) networks. The first MNO network includes a core network 103a and a 1-1 base station 104aa and a 1-2 base station 104ab connected to the core network 103a. The second MNO network includes the core network 103b and the 2-1 base station 104ba and the 2-2 base station 104bb connected to the core network 103b. The third MNO network includes a core network 103c and a third base station 104ca and a third-2 base station 104cc connected to the core network 103c.
　なお、以下の説明では、ＭＮＯネットワークを「ＭＮＯ」と略記することもある。また、第１ＭＮＯネットワーク及びそのコアネットワークを「第１ＭＮＯ」と略記することもある。同様に、第２ＭＮＯネットワーク及びそのコアネットワークを「第２ＭＮＯ」と略記することもあり、第３ＭＮＯネットワーク及びそのコアネットワークを「第３ＭＮＯ」と略記することもある。この略記は、本実施の形態１以外においても同様に用いる。 In the following explanation, the MNO network may be abbreviated as "MNO". Further, the first MNO network and its core network may be abbreviated as "first MNO". Similarly, the second MNO network and its core network may be abbreviated as "second MNO", and the third MNO network and its core network may be abbreviated as "third MNO". This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
　例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、コアネットワーク１０３ａ、１０３ｂ、１０３ｃには、Ｓ－ＧＷ（Serving Gateway）、ＭＭＥ（Mobility Management Entity）等が含まれる。例えば、無線通信システムが５Ｇ方式のシステムであれば、コアネットワーク１０３ａ、１０３ｂ、１０３ｃには、ＵＰＦ（User Plane Function）、ＳＭＦ（Session Management Function）、ＡＭＦ（Access and Mobility management Function）等が含まれる。 For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the core networks 103a, 103b, 103c include S-GW (Serving Gateway), MME (Mobility Management Entity), and the like. For example, if the wireless communication system is a 5G system, the core networks 103a, 103b, 103c include UPF (User Plane Function), SMF (Session Management Function), AMF (Access and Mobility management Function), and the like. ..
　ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置１０２は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続する上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１において、当該コアネットワーク１０２－１に接続可能な無線通信端末１０５ａａ、１０５ａｂ、１０５ａｃ、１０５ｂａ、１０５ｂｂ、１０５ｂｃと無線通信を行う。以下の説明では、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置、及び、ＭＶＮＯネットワークのそれぞれを「ＭＶＮＯ」と略記することもある。この略記は、本実施の形態１以外においても同様に用いる。 The MVNO network device 102 communicates wirelessly with wireless communication terminals 105aa, 105ab, 105ac, 105ba, 105bb, and 105bc that can be connected to the core network 102-1 in the upper core network 102-1 that connects to a plurality of MNO networks. Do. In the following description, each of the MVNO network device and the MVNO network may be abbreviated as "MVNO". This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
　ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ａ、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ｂ、及び、第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ｃと接続された上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１を、ＭＶＮＯネットワークとして含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１を構成するＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールには、Ｐ－ＧＷ（Packet Data Network Gateway）、ＨＳＳ（Home Subscriber Server）等が含まれる。 The MVNO 102 includes the core network 103a of the first MNO, the core network 103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 102-1 connected to the core network 103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 102-1 includes P-GW (PacketDataNetworkGateway), HSS (HomeSubscriberServer), and the like. included.
　上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１は、第１事業者のシステム１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム１０１ｂと接続される。第１事業者のシステム１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム１０１ｂは、例えば、事業者が事業者グループに属する複数の端末から情報を収集するデータサーバであってもよいし、これら収集した情報に基づいて事業者グループに属する複数の端末にサービスを提供するアプリケーションサーバであってもよい。なお、以下の説明では、第１事業者のシステムを「第１事業者」と略記することもあり、第２事業者のシステムを「第２事業者」と略記することもある。この略記は、本実施の形態１以外においても同様に用いる。 The upper core network 102-1 is connected to the system 101a of the first operator and the system 101b of the second operator. The system 101a of the first business operator and the system 101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above. In the following description, the system of the first business operator may be abbreviated as "first business operator", and the system of the second business operator may be abbreviated as "second business operator". This abbreviation is also used in other than the first embodiment.
　ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１のほか、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが設定されるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２と、端末グループに属する複数の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報に基づいてＭＮＯを切り替える情報管理モジュールの一種である切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７とを含む。切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、後述する変形例などで説明するように、データベースであるデータベース群と、情報管理部とを含む。 The MVNO 102 includes the upper core network 102-1, the MNO selection policy table 102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and the group communication information which is information related to the communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group. It includes a switching control module 102-7, which is a kind of information management module that switches the MNO based on the above. The switching control module 102-7 includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit, as will be described in a modified example described later.
　切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７のデータベース群は、ネットワークで収集したデータを格納するデータベース（ネットワークモニタデータベース）、端末で収集したデータを格納するデータベース（端末モニタデータベース）、また、課金に関係する情報を集約したデータベース（課金情報用データベース）を含む。切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７のデータベース群は、これらデータベースの情報を、端末グループに属する複数の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報として保持する。 The database group of the switching control module 102-7 aggregates the database that stores the data collected by the network (network monitor database), the database that stores the data collected by the terminal (terminal monitor database), and the information related to billing. Includes the database (database for billing information). The database group of the switching control module 102-7 holds the information of these databases as group communication information which is information related to the communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group.
　切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７の情報管理部は、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７のデータベース群に保持されたグループ通信情報を管理する。これにより、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７のデータベース群の情報は、定期的、または、オンデマンドで収集及び更新される。また、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７の情報管理部は、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、端末毎に１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択する。本実施の形態１では、情報管理部は、グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するように、端末毎に１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択する。 The information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 manages the group communication information held in the database group of the switching control module 102-7. As a result, the information of the database group of the switching control module 102-7 is collected and updated regularly or on demand. Further, the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 selects one MNO network and session for each terminal based on the group communication information. In the first embodiment, the information management unit selects one MNO network and session for each terminal based on the group communication information so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 102-2.
　情報管理部は、選択結果に基づいて、端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行う。このような情報管理部の制御により、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーなどについて端末グループ毎の通信を適切化することができる。なお、以下の説明では、情報管理部は、データベース群と一体的に設けられた切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７である場合について説明するが、データベース群と個別に設けられてもよいし、他のモジュールであってもよい。 The information management unit controls the establishment or switching of terminal sessions based on the selection result. By controlling the information management unit in this way, it is possible to optimize communication for each terminal group regarding the MNO selection policy and the like. In the following description, the case where the information management unit is the switching control module 102-7 provided integrally with the database group will be described, but the information management unit may be provided separately from the database group or other modules. It may be.
　図１を用いて、ＭＮＯネットワーク及び通信セッションの選択、並びに、通信セッションの確立及び切り替えを説明する。 The selection of the MNO network and the communication session, and the establishment and switching of the communication session will be described with reference to FIG.
　ＭＶＮＯでは、様々な料金プランが規定されており、一般に、各ＭＮＯとの接続条件（契約約款）が異なることに起因してＭＮＯ毎に料金（接続費用）が異なる。例えば、ＭＮＯ毎に、従量課金であったり、特定期間定額であったり、特定の通信量までは定額でそれ以上の通信量には従量課金であったり様々である。これらの情報は、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内の課金情報用データベースに格納されている。さらに、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、必要に応じてネットワークモニタデータベースや、端末モニタデータベースを用いて、「端末グループ全体の端末毎及びＭＮＯ毎の利用通信量」等を収集及び算出して、課金情報用データベースに格納する。 Various rate plans are stipulated in the MVNO, and in general, the rate (connection cost) differs for each MNO due to the difference in connection conditions (contract terms) with each MNO. For example, there are various types such as pay-as-you-go billing for each MNO, flat-rate billing for a specific period, flat-rate billing up to a specific traffic volume, and pay-as-you-go billing for more traffic. This information is stored in the billing information database in the switching control module 102-7. Further, the switching control module 102-7 collects and calculates "the amount of communication used for each terminal and each MNO of the entire terminal group" and the like by using the network monitor database and the terminal monitor database as necessary, and charges. Store in the information database.
　例えば、第１事業者が、通信コストの低価格化を重視していると仮定する。このとき、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２には、第１事業者１０１ａによって「通信コスト最小化」が設定される。 For example, suppose that the first company attaches great importance to reducing communication costs. At this time, "minimize communication cost" is set in the MNO selection policy table 102-2 by the first operator 101a.
　この場合、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、様々な料金プランの中で、例えば、端末グループ全体の端末で、最も低価格になるＭＮＯネットワークを導出したり、または、過去の実績から通信量を推定して最終的な支払い（月毎の支払いであれば、その月における最終的な通信量による支払い額）が最も低価格になるＭＮＯネットワークを導出したりする。 In this case, the switching control module 102-7 derives the lowest priced MNO network among the terminals of the entire terminal group among various rate plans, or estimates the communication volume from the past results. Then, the MNO network with the lowest final payment (in the case of monthly payment, the payment amount based on the final communication volume in that month) is derived.
　ここで、上記導出により、第１ＭＮＯネットワークが最も通信コストが安くなるＭＮＯネットワークとして導出されたとする。切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、当該導出結果に基づいてＭＮＯ及び通信セッションの選択を行う。これにより、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末１０５ａａ、第１－２端末１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末１０５ａｃと接続している現状のＭＮＯネットワークが、第１ＭＮＯネットワークでない場合、これら端末と、最も低価格と導出された第１ＭＮＯネットワークとを接続するようにネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えが適宜行われる。 Here, it is assumed that the first MNO network is derived as the MNO network with the lowest communication cost by the above derivation. The switching control module 102-7 selects the MNO and the communication session based on the derivation result. As a result, if the current MNO network connected to the 1-1 terminal 105aa, the 1-2 terminal 105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is not the first MNO network, The network and session are appropriately switched so as to connect these terminals with the lowest priced and derived first MNO network.
　この結果、図１の例では、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末１０５ａａは、通信コストが安い第１ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第１－１基地局１０４ａａを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ａ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１と接続され、第１事業者のシステム１０１ａと低価格な通信を行うことが可能となる。同様に、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－２端末１０５ａｂ及び第１－３端末１０５ａｃは、通信コストが安い第１ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第１－２基地局１０４ａｂを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ａ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１と接続され、第１事業者のシステム１０１ａと低価格な通信を行うことが可能となる。 As a result, in the example of FIG. 1, the 1-1 terminal 105aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is the closest 1-1 base station 104aa among the base stations of the first MNO having a low communication cost. Through this, it is connected to the core network 103a of the first MNO and the core network 102-1 higher than the MVNO, and it becomes possible to perform low-priced communication with the system 101a of the first operator. Similarly, the 1-2 terminal 105ab and the 1-3 terminal 105ac, which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the closest 1-2 base stations 104ab among the first MNO base stations having low communication costs. It is possible to connect to the core network 103a of the first MNO and the core network 102-1 higher than the MVNO via the above, and to perform low-priced communication with the system 101a of the first operator.
　別例として、第２事業者は、特定のＭＮＯの障害発生時においても、通信を継続できる端末を残して、サービスを最大限維持できるように、通信の高信頼性を重視していると仮定する。このとき、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２には、第２事業者１０１ｂによって「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」が設定される。 As another example, it is assumed that the second operator attaches great importance to the high reliability of communication so that the service can be maintained as much as possible by leaving the terminal that can continue communication even in the event of a failure of a specific MNO. To do. At this time, "high reliability (distributed setting of connected MNOs)" is set in the MNO selection policy table 102-2 by the second operator 101b.
　切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内のネットワークモニタデータベースには、例えば、全端末の接続情報が格納されている。切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２、及び、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内のネットワークモニタデータベースに格納されている全端末の接続情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ及び通信セッションの選択を行う。これにより、第２事業者の端末グループに属する、第２－１端末１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末１０５ｂｃを接続している現状のＭＮＯネットワークが均一化（極力別々のＭＮＯと接続）されていない場合、これら端末に接続されるＭＮＯネットワークを均一化するようにネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えが適宜行われる。 For example, connection information of all terminals is stored in the network monitor database in the switching control module 102-7. The switching control module 102-7 selects the MNO and the communication session based on the connection information of all terminals stored in the MNO selection policy table 102-2 and the network monitor database in the switching control module 102-7. Do. As a result, the current MNO network connecting the 2-1 terminal 105ba, the 2-2 terminal 105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second operator is made uniform (separate MNOs as much as possible). If not, the network and session are appropriately switched so as to equalize the MNO network connected to these terminals.
　この結果、図１の例では、第２－１端末１０５ｂａは、第１－２基地局１０４ａｂを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ａ及び上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１と接続される。第２－２端末１０５ｂｂは、第２－２基地局１０４ｂｂを介して、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ｂ及び上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１と接続される。第２－３端末１０５ｂｃは、第３－２基地局１０４ｃｂを介して第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１０３ｃ及び上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１と接続される。 As a result, in the example of FIG. 1, the 2-1 terminal 105ba is connected to the core network 103a of the first MNO and the upper core network 102-1 via the 1-2 base station 104ab. The 2-2 terminal 105bb is connected to the core network 103b of the second MNO and the upper core network 102-1 via the 2-2 base station 104bb. The 2-3 terminal 105bc is connected to the core network 103c of the 3rd MNO and the upper core network 102-1 via the 3-2 base station 104cc.
　全端末が低価格になる第１ＭＮＯと接続されている場合に、万一ソフトウェア異常等の何らかの原因で第１ＭＮＯに大規模な障害が発生すると、第２事業者は通信が全くできなくなり、サービス不能な状態になってしまう。しかしながら、ＭＮＯネットワークを均一化する上記ＭＮＯ切り替えにより、特定のＭＮＯに大規模な障害が発生したときにも、第２事業者の２／３の端末は正常な通信を維持できる。 If all terminals are connected to the low-priced 1st MNO and a large-scale failure occurs in the 1st MNO for some reason such as a software error, the 2nd operator will not be able to communicate at all and will not be able to service. It will be in a state like that. However, due to the above-mentioned MNO switching that makes the MNO network uniform, even when a large-scale failure occurs in a specific MNO, two-thirds of the terminals of the second operator can maintain normal communication.
　なお上記では、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２の設定によって、接続ＭＮＯをほぼ同じ割合で均一化する例を説明したが、例えば、ＭＶＮＯ１０２が、第１ＭＮＯ：第２ＭＮＯ：第３ＭＮＯ＝３：１：１のように異なる割合で接続ＭＮＯを割当てることも有効である（「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定／第１ＭＮＯ：第２ＭＮＯ：第３ＭＮＯ＝３：１：１）」）。このような構成によれば、特定のＭＮＯにおける大規模障害に対する備えも行いつつ、平常時の低価格を実現できる。 In the above, an example in which the connected MNOs are made uniform at almost the same ratio by setting the MNO selection policy table 102-2 has been described. For example, the MVNO 102 has a first MNO: a second MNO: a third MNO = 3: 1: 1. It is also effective to allocate connection MNOs at different ratios as in (“High reliability (Distributed setting of connection MNOs / 1st MNO: 2nd MNO: 3rd MNO = 3: 1: 1)”). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a low price in normal times while preparing for a large-scale failure in a specific MNO.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、ＭＶＮＯ１０２が、各ＭＮＯから提示されるＭＮＯメンテナンス予定情報に基づいて、特定の時間帯に、メンテナンスを行うＭＮＯを使用しない制御を行うことも有効である（「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定／２０１９年Ｘ月Ｘ日ＸＸ時ＸＸ分～ＸＸ時ＸＸ分に第１ＭＮＯ割当不可）」）。 Further, as an MNO selection policy, it is also effective for the MVNO 102 to perform control that does not use the MNO for maintenance at a specific time zone based on the MNO maintenance schedule information presented by each MNO (“High reliability”). (Distributed setting of connected MNO / 1st MNO cannot be assigned to XX hours XX minutes to XX hours XX minutes on XX days of 2019) ").
　また、上記では、事業者毎に１つの端末グループを形成し、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２を設定する例を示した。しかしながら、１つの事業者で複数の端末グループを形成し、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２を設定してもよい。この場合、１つの事業者で複数の所要ＱｏＳ（Quality of Service）の端末を取り扱うことができるため、より適切なＭＮＯ選択が可能となる。また、グループ毎に異なるタイミングで、多数のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの変更が可能となるので、ネットワークが輻輳することを回避できる。 Further, in the above, an example is shown in which one terminal group is formed for each business operator and the MNO selection policy table 102-2 is set for each terminal group. However, one operator may form a plurality of terminal groups, and the MNO selection policy table 102-2 may be set for each terminal group. In this case, since one operator can handle a plurality of required QoS (Quality of Service) terminals, more appropriate MNO selection becomes possible. In addition, since it is possible to change a large number of MNO selection policies at different timings for each group, it is possible to avoid network congestion.
　また、上記において、複数ＭＮＯは、複数種類の無線ネットワークを含んでもよい。例えば、第１ＭＮＯがＬＴＥのネットワークを含み、第２ＭＮＯが５Ｇのネットワークを含み、第３ＭＮＯが衛星移動体通信のネットワークを含んでもよい。すなわち、複数ＭＮＯの無線ネットワークは、ＭＶＮＯが組み込み得るどの無線方式の組み合わせから構成されてもよい。この場合、通信料や、通信エリアの大きさが異なるネットワークを実現することができるため、事業者のニーズに合わせてＭＮＯ選択ポリシーを適切に設定することができる。また、ＭＮＯの数は３つに限らない。 Further, in the above, the plurality of MNOs may include a plurality of types of wireless networks. For example, the first MNO may include an LTE network, the second MNO may include a 5G network, and the third MNO may include a satellite mobile communication network. That is, the radio network of a plurality of MNOs may be composed of any combination of radio systems that the MVNO can incorporate. In this case, since it is possible to realize networks having different communication charges and sizes of communication areas, it is possible to appropriately set the MNO selection policy according to the needs of the operator. Moreover, the number of MNOs is not limited to three.
　また、上記では、ＭＶＮＯ１０２が、グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した接続先ＭＮＯを選択する動作例を説明した。しかしながら、例えば、全ての端末グループについて同じＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが変更されずに用いられる構成などにおいては、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２は必須ではない。 Further, in the above, an operation example in which the MVNO 102 selects a connection destination MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 102-2 based on the group communication information has been described. However, for example, in a configuration in which the same MNO selection policy is used unchanged for all terminal groups, the MNO selection policy table 102-2 is not essential.
　次に、図２及び図３を用いて、ネットワークから得られる通信品質及び障害情報等のグループ通信情報に基づいて、接続先ＭＮＯを選択する動作例について説明する。図２及び図３は、３つのＭＮＯネットワーク（第１～第３ＭＮＯネットワーク）と接続したＭＶＮＯを用いて、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシー制御を行うシーケンス図を表している。なお、図２及び図３のシーケンス図は図１の状態に対応している。図２及び図３のシーケンス図では主に、通信を示す矢印の上または横に、当該通信の概要及びステップ番号が付記されており、図２及び図３以外のシーケンス図でも同様である。 Next, an operation example of selecting a connection destination MNO based on group communication information such as communication quality and failure information obtained from the network will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. 2 and 3 show a sequence diagram in which MNO selection policy control is performed for each terminal group using MVNOs connected to three MNO networks (first to third MNO networks). The sequence diagrams of FIGS. 2 and 3 correspond to the states of FIG. In the sequence diagrams of FIGS. 2 and 3, the outline and step number of the communication are mainly added above or beside the arrow indicating the communication, and the same applies to the sequence diagrams other than those of FIGS. 2 and 3.
　第１事業者のシステム１０１ａは、ステップＳ５０１にて、通信を開始する前に、ＭＶＮＯ１０２に対して、自己の端末グループの端末の登録を行う。また、第１事業者のシステム１０１ａは、ＭＶＮＯ１０２に対して、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの設定を適宜行う。この登録及び設定は、電気通信回線を経由するメッセージによって行われてもよい。その際、ＭＶＮＯに重大な障害を発生させてしまう可能性がある登録及び設定はできないようにするのが望ましい。例えば、メニューを選択するインタフェースをＭＶＮＯに設けることなどにより、誤操作によって重大な障害が発生しないようにする。 In step S501, the system 101a of the first operator registers the terminals of its own terminal group with the MVNO 102 before starting the communication. In addition, the system 101a of the first operator appropriately sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO 102. This registration and setting may be performed by a message via a telecommunication line. At that time, it is desirable to prevent registration and setting that may cause a serious failure in the MVNO. For example, by providing an interface for selecting a menu in the MVNO, it is possible to prevent a serious failure due to an erroneous operation.
　端末は、電源投入後、自らのＳＩＭ（Subscriber Identity Module）にアクセスして、ＰＬＭＮ（Public Land Mobile Network）サーチを行い、規定の手順に従って接続先となるＭＮＯを選択する。この結果として第１ＭＮＯが選択された場合、端末は、ステップＳ５０２にて第１ＭＮＯに接続要求を送信する。端末が、ステップＳ５０３にて第１ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信すると、無線の接続経路が確立する。本実施の形態１では、ＭＶＮＯがＨＳＳ等の認証機能を有しているため、ＭＶＮＯが、ステップＳ５０４にて端末に認証要求を送信し、端末が、ステップＳ５０５にてＭＶＮＯに認証応答を送信することで、端末とＭＶＮＯとの間で認証処理が行われる。必要に応じて、これらのメッセージの送受信は複数のステップで行われてもよいし、ＭＮＯのＨＳＳとＭＶＮＯのＨＳＳとの間の連携で行われてもよい。以上のようにして端末とＭＶＮＯとの間のセッションが確立される。同様の処理がグループ端末内の全端末においても実施される。 After turning on the power, the terminal accesses its own SIM (Subscriber Identity Module), performs a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) search, and selects the MNO to be connected according to the specified procedure. When the first MNO is selected as a result of this, the terminal transmits a connection request to the first MNO in step S502. When the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S503, the wireless connection path is established. In the first embodiment, since the MVNO has an authentication function such as HSS, the MVNO transmits an authentication request to the terminal in step S504, and the terminal transmits an authentication response to the MVNO in step S505. As a result, the authentication process is performed between the terminal and the MVNO. If necessary, the transmission and reception of these messages may be performed in a plurality of steps, or may be performed in cooperation between the HSS of the MNO and the HSS of the MVNO. As described above, the session between the terminal and the MVNO is established. The same process is performed on all terminals in the group terminal.
　第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯは、ステップＳ５０６にて、以上により確立した端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対して通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出する。少なくとも１つ以上の端末で通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出してもある程度適切な処理が可能であるが、端末グループ内の全端末に対して当該通信回線品質及び障害情報を収集するとより適切な処理が可能となる。全端末について情報の収集が行われていなくても、全端末の中の一定の割合について情報の収集が行われた場合に積極的に判断及び制御すれば、何台かの端末が障害発生しても、全部の収集を待たないで次善対策を行うことができる。 The first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO measure or detect the communication line quality and failure information for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group established above in step S506. Even if the communication line quality and failure information are measured or detected by at least one or more terminals, appropriate processing is possible to some extent, but it is better to collect the communication line quality and failure information for all terminals in the terminal group. Appropriate processing becomes possible. Even if information is not collected for all terminals, if information is collected for a certain percentage of all terminals and positive judgment and control are performed, some terminals will fail. However, it is possible to take the next best measure without waiting for all the collections.
　ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、各端末からの信号を第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局において受信して得られる無線回線の品質情報、すなわち、受信電力、ＳＩＮＲ（Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio）、ＢＬＥＲ（BLock Error Rate）等であってもよいし、無線回線の同期状態に関連する情報（初期同期中／同期／同期外れ等）であってもよい。または、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、無線レイヤ２レベルのＡＲＱ（Automatic Repeat-Request）／ＨＡＲＱ（Hybrid ARQ）の再送回数や、ＳＮ（Sequence Number）の番号飛び検出情報等でもよい。または、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、セッションの状態に関する情報（正常／断等）でもよいし、端末グループに属する各端末から第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局が単位時間あたりに受信した信号の通信量（平均伝送速度）であってもよい。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S506 are, for example, radio line quality information obtained by receiving signals from each terminal at the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO, that is, received power and SINR (Signal). -to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLockError Rate), etc., or information related to the synchronization status of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.) may be used. .. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, the number of retransmissions of ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) at the wireless layer 2 level, the number skip detection information of SN (Sequence Number), or the like. Good. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, information on the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), or the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO are united from each terminal belonging to the terminal group. It may be the communication amount (average transmission speed) of the signal received per hour.
　または、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、端末グループに属する各端末から第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局が受信したデータの伝送遅延時間（平均遅延時間）であってもよい。受信したデータについて、例えば、無線フレームのタイムスタンプを用いた遅延時間測定が行われてもよいし、イーサネット（登録商標）レベルのデータ（ＩＥＥＥ１５８８等）により遅延時間測定が行われてもよいし、ＮＴＰ（Network Time Protocol）を用いて遅延時間測定が行われてもよいし、ＧＮＳＳ（Global Navigation Satellite System）を用いた遅延時間測定が行われてもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, the transmission delay time (average delay time) of the data received by the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO from each terminal belonging to the terminal group. Good. For the received data, for example, the delay time may be measured using the time stamp of the wireless frame, or the delay time may be measured by the Ethernet (registered trademark) level data (IEEE1588 or the like). The delay time may be measured using NTP (Network Time Protocol), or the delay time may be measured using GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System).
　または、一定間隔で各端末がデータを送信していることが既知である場合、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、データの受信タイミングのばらつき（平均ばらつき、２乗平均ばらつき）であってもよい。 Alternatively, when it is known that each terminal transmits data at regular intervals, the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 are, for example, with variations in data reception timing (average variation, squared average variation). There may be.
　または、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、ネットワーク全体での保守管理情報及び機器障害情報（各ＭＮＯにおける一部装置における異常輻輳、機器損傷情報、保守等による信号閉塞情報、試験動作中等のステータス情報）であってもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 include, for example, maintenance management information and device failure information for the entire network (abnormal congestion in some devices in each MNO, device damage information, signal blockage information due to maintenance, etc., test operation. Moderate status information).
　または、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、端末から送信されてＭＶＮＯで受信されることが予測される信号の到着有無であってもよい。より具体的には、ＭＶＮＯからヘルスチェック信号を送信してそれに対応する端末からの応答が規定時間内に返ってこなかったときに通信回線品質が悪いと判断されてもよい。または、ＭＶＮＯが、端末から定期的に送信されたヘルスチェック信号を受信しても、その受信間隔が規定時間を超えるときには通信回線品質が悪いと判断されてもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal transmitted from the terminal and predicted to be received by the MVNO. More specifically, when the health check signal is transmitted from the MVNO and the response from the corresponding terminal is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor. Alternatively, even if the MVNO receives the health check signal periodically transmitted from the terminal, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor when the reception interval exceeds the specified time.
　上記ヘルスチェックは、ＭＶＮＯからの端末のヘルスチェックでもよいし、事業者から端末へのヘルスチェックでもよい。同様に、端末にアプリケーションを供する装置（端末接続装置）を接続するときには事業者から端末接続装置へのヘルスチェックでもよい。上記ヘルスチェックで事業者が異常を検出したときには、事業者からＭＶＮＯにその旨を通知する。 The above health check may be a health check of the terminal from the MVNO or a health check from the business operator to the terminal. Similarly, when connecting a device for providing an application (terminal connection device) to a terminal, a health check from the operator to the terminal connection device may be performed. When the operator detects an abnormality in the above health check, the operator notifies the MVNO to that effect.
　以上のネットワークからのモニタ結果は、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内のネットワークモニタデータベースに順次、格納または更新される。また、課金に係わる通信量等の情報も、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内の課金情報用データベースに順次、格納または更新される。 The monitor results from the above networks are sequentially stored or updated in the network monitor database in the switching control module 102-7. In addition, information such as the amount of communication related to billing is also sequentially stored or updated in the billing information database in the switching control module 102-7.
　以上に説明したステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、ステップＳ５０８において用いられる。次に説明するステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報も、ステップＳ５０８において用いられる。以下、ステップＳ５０７について説明する前に、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報を用いたステップＳ５０８の動作例について説明する。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S506 described above are used in step S508. The communication line quality and failure information of step S507, which will be described next, is also used in step S508. Hereinafter, before the description of step S507, an operation example of step S508 using the communication line quality and failure information of step S506 will be described.
　例えば、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報において、第１ＭＮＯを用いている端末に受信電力異常が検出された場合、図示しないが、ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、他の端末の通信回線品質及び障害情報の最新情報を確認したり、必要に応じて新たに第１ＭＮＯに通信回線品質及び障害情報を要求して取得したりする。例えば、ある端末と、ある特定のエリアの第１ＭＮＯとの間の通信回線品質及び障害情報には異常が検出され、かつ、当該端末と同じ端末グループの別の端末と、第２ＭＮＯとの間の通信回線品質及び障害情報には正常が検出されたときには、当該エリアの第１ＭＮＯに障害（例えば基地局障害）が発生している可能性がある。そこでこの場合には、ステップＳ５０８にて、ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、第１ＭＮＯと接続されている端末について、第１ＭＮＯから第２ＭＮＯへの切り替えの実施を決定する。 For example, when a reception power abnormality is detected in the terminal using the first MNO in the communication line quality and failure information in step S506, although not shown, the MVNO 102 is the latest information on the communication line quality and failure information of the other terminal. Is confirmed, and if necessary, the communication line quality and failure information are newly requested and acquired from the first MNO. For example, an abnormality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information between a certain terminal and the first MNO in a specific area, and between another terminal in the same terminal group as the terminal and the second MNO. When normality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information, there is a possibility that a failure (for example, base station failure) has occurred in the first MNO in the area. Therefore, in this case, in step S508, the MVNO 102 decides to switch the terminal connected to the first MNO from the first MNO to the second MNO.
　次にステップＳ５０７について説明する。セッションを確立した端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末は、ステップＳ５０７にて自ら通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出する。そして、少なくとも１つ以上の端末は、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに、通信回線品質及び障害情報を送信する。 Next, step S507 will be described. At least one terminal belonging to the terminal group for which the session has been established measures or detects the communication line quality and failure information by itself in step S507. Then, at least one or more terminals transmit communication line quality and failure information to the MVNO via the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO.
　ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、各端末において受信して得られる無線回線の品質情報、すなわち、受信電力、ＳＩＮＲ（Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio）、ＢＬＥＲ（BLock Error Rate）等であってもよいし、無線回線の同期状態に関連する情報（初期同期中／同期／同期外れ等）であってもよい。または、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、無線レイヤ２レベルのＡＲＱ（Automatic Repeat-Request）／ＨＡＲＱ（Hybrid ARQ）の再送回数や、ＳＮ（Sequence Number）の番号飛び検出情報等でもよい。または、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、セッションの状態に関する情報（正常／断等）でもよい。これら端末からのモニタ結果は、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内の端末モニタデータベースに順次、格納または更新される。また、課金に係わる通信量等の情報も、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７内の端末課金用データベースに順次、格納または更新される。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S507 are, for example, the quality information of the wireless line received and obtained at each terminal, that is, the received power, SINR (Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLock Error). Rate) or the like, or information related to the synchronization state of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.). Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 may be, for example, the number of retransmissions of ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) at the wireless layer 2 level, the number skip detection information of SN (Sequence Number), or the like. Good. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.). The monitor results from these terminals are sequentially stored or updated in the terminal monitor database in the switching control module 102-7. In addition, information such as the amount of communication related to billing is also sequentially stored or updated in the terminal billing database in the switching control module 102-7.
　または、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、ＭＶＮＯから送信されて端末で受信されることが予測される信号の到着有無であってもよい。より具体的には、端末からＭＶＮＯにヘルスチェック信号を送信してそれに対応する応答が規定時間内に返ってこなかったときに通信回線品質が悪いと判断されてもよい。または、端末が、ＭＶＮＯから定期的に送信されたヘルスチェック信号を受信しても、その受信間隔が規定時間を超えるときには通信回線品質が悪いと判断されてもよい。上記ヘルスチェックは、端末からのＭＶＮＯのヘルスチェックでもよいし、端末から事業者へのヘルスチェックでもよい。同様に、端末にアプリケーションを供する装置（端末接続装置）を接続するときには端末接続装置から事業者へのヘルスチェックでもよい。上記ヘルスチェックで端末接続装置が異常を検出したときには、端末接続装置から端末にその旨を通知する。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S507 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal transmitted from the MVNO and predicted to be received by the terminal. More specifically, when a health check signal is transmitted from the terminal to the MVNO and the corresponding response is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor. Alternatively, even if the terminal receives the health check signal periodically transmitted from the MVNO, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor when the reception interval exceeds the specified time. The above-mentioned health check may be a health check of the MVNO from the terminal or a health check from the terminal to the business operator. Similarly, when connecting a device for providing an application (terminal connection device) to a terminal, a health check from the terminal connection device to the business operator may be performed. When the terminal connection device detects an abnormality in the above health check, the terminal connection device notifies the terminal to that effect.
　次に、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報を用いたステップＳ５０８の動作例について説明する。 Next, an operation example of step S508 using the communication line quality and failure information of step S507 will be described.
　例えば、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報において、第１ＭＮＯを用いている端末にＳＩＮＲ異常が検出された場合、図示しないが、ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、他の端末の通信回線品質及び障害情報の最新情報を確認したり、必要に応じて新たに当該端末に通信回線品質及び障害情報を要求して取得したりする。例えば、ある端末と、ある特定のエリアの第１ＭＮＯとの間の通信回線品質及び障害情報には異常が検出され、かつ、当該端末と同じ端末グループの別の端末と、第２ＭＮＯとの間の通信回線品質及び障害情報には正常が検出されたときには、当該エリアの第１ＭＮＯに障害（例えば基地局障害）が発生している可能性がある。そこでこの場合には、ステップＳ５０８にて、ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、第１ＭＮＯと接続されている端末について、第１ＭＮＯから第２ＭＮＯへの切り替えの実施を決定する。 For example, when a SINR abnormality is detected in a terminal using the first MNO in the communication line quality and failure information in step S507, although not shown, the MVNO 102 provides the latest information on the communication line quality and failure information of other terminals. Confirm and, if necessary, newly request and acquire communication line quality and failure information from the terminal. For example, an abnormality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information between a certain terminal and the first MNO in a specific area, and between another terminal in the same terminal group as the terminal and the second MNO. When normality is detected in the communication line quality and failure information, there is a possibility that a failure (for example, base station failure) has occurred in the first MNO in the area. Therefore, in this case, in step S508, the MVNO 102 decides to switch the terminal connected to the first MNO from the first MNO to the second MNO.
　なお上記では、ステップＳ５０８にて、ＭＶＮＯ１０２が、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報と、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報との一方ずつに基づいて、ＭＮＯの切り替えを決定する例を示したが、これに限ったものではない。例えば、ステップＳ５０８にて、ＭＶＮＯ１０２が、ステップＳ５０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報と、ステップＳ５０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報との両方に基づいて、総合的に判断してＭＮＯの切り替えを決定してもよい。例えば、ステップＳ５０６での特定のＭＮＯ異常検出とステップＳ５０７の特定のＭＮＯ異常検出とが合致したときに、ＭＮＯの切り替え（上記例では第１ＭＮＯから第２ＭＮＯへの切り替え）を決定することも有効である。この場合、偶然に特定の端末と特定のＭＮＯとの通信品質が劣化してＭＮＯの切り替えを行ってしまうことを抑制できる。 In the above, in step S508, an example is shown in which the MVNO 102 determines the switching of the MNO based on one of the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 and the communication line quality and failure information in step S507. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in step S508, the MVNO 102 makes a comprehensive judgment based on both the communication line quality and failure information in step S506 and the communication line quality and failure information in step S507, and determines the switching of the MNO. May be good. For example, it is also effective to determine the MNO switching (switching from the first MNO to the second MNO in the above example) when the specific MNO abnormality detection in step S506 and the specific MNO abnormality detection in step S507 match. is there. In this case, it is possible to prevent the communication quality between the specific terminal and the specific MNO from accidentally deteriorating and switching the MNO.
　端末は、ステップＳ５０９にてＭＶＮＯからＭＮＯ変更指示を受信し、ステップＳ５１０にてＭＶＮＯにＭＮＯ変更応答を送信する。第１ＭＮＯは、第２ＭＮＯのＨＳＳとの間で連携が必要なときは、ステップＳ５１１にて、第２ＭＮＯに切り替え情報（引継ぎ情報等）を送信する。端末は、ステップＳ５１２にてｅＳＩＭの書き換え等のＭＮＯ切り替え処理を行う。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ５１３にて、第２ＭＮＯ経由で端末に、切り替え元ＭＮＯである第１ＭＮＯとの接続を解除するための解除指示を送信する。 The terminal receives the MNO change instruction from the MVNO in step S509, and transmits the MNO change response to the MVNO in step S510. When the first MNO needs to cooperate with the HSS of the second MNO, the first MNO transmits switching information (takeover information, etc.) to the second MNO in step S511. The terminal performs MNO switching processing such as rewriting the eSIM in step S512. In step S513, the MVNO transmits a release instruction for canceling the connection with the first MNO, which is the switching source MNO, to the terminal via the second MNO.
　端末は、ステップＳ５１４にて第２ＭＮＯに接続要求を送信し、ステップＳ５１５にて第２ＭＮＯからの接続応答の受信をした場合に無線の接続経路を確立し、ステップＳ５１６にて確立した経路を介してＭＶＮＯに第１ＭＮＯの解除応答を送信する。第２ＭＮＯは、第１ＭＮＯのＨＳＳとの間で連携が必要なときは、ステップＳ５１７にて第１ＭＮＯに切り替え情報（引継ぎ情報等）を送信する。 The terminal transmits a connection request to the second MNO in step S514, establishes a wireless connection route when receiving a connection response from the second MNO in step S515, and establishes a wireless connection route via the route established in step S516. The release response of the first MNO is transmitted to the MVNO. When the second MNO needs to cooperate with the HSS of the first MNO, the second MNO transmits switching information (takeover information, etc.) to the first MNO in step S517.
　以上では、ｅＳＩＭの書き換え等の例を記載したが、ローミングによりＭＮＯを切り替えてもよい。 In the above, examples such as rewriting of eSIM have been described, but MNO may be switched by roaming.
　以上により、特定のＭＮＯの基地局での障害発生時のように通信が安定しなくなったときに、端末グループ全体やネットワーク全体で、端末との安定通信が可能な他のＭＮＯを判断し、端末の通信を特定のＭＮＯから当該他のＭＮＯに切り替える。これにより、例えば図２及び図３のように、事業者は、ステップＳ５１８にてＭＶＮＯ経由で端末にデータ送信指示を送信することによって、ステップＳ５１９にて端末から送信されたデータ送信を受信することができる。 Based on the above, when communication becomes unstable, such as when a failure occurs at a specific MNO base station, the entire terminal group or network determines other MNOs capable of stable communication with the terminal, and the terminal Communication is switched from a specific MNO to the other MNO. As a result, for example, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the business operator receives the data transmission transmitted from the terminal in step S519 by transmitting the data transmission instruction to the terminal via the MVNO in step S518. Can be done.
　以上、ＭＶＮＯ１０２が、通信品質及び障害情報などのグループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した接続先ＭＮＯを選択する動作例について説明した。以上のように、ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、グループ通信情報を総合的に考慮することで、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対して、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適したＭＮＯの切り替え制御を行うことができる。 The operation example in which the MVNO 102 selects the connection destination MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 102-2 based on the group communication information such as the communication quality and the failure information has been described above. As described above, the MVNO 102 performs MNO switching control suitable for the MNO selection policy for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group by comprehensively considering the group communication information. be able to.
　なお、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送速度最大」と設定することも有効である。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送速度の和が最大になるようにＭＮＯの選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体について必要最低限の伝送速度を指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送速度の和を最大にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "maximum transmission speed" as the MNO selection policy. In this case, the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group is maximized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to maximize the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission speed for the entire terminal group.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送遅延最小」と設定するのも有効である。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送遅延の和が最小になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体について必要最低限の伝送遅延を指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送遅延の和を最小にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "minimum transmission delay" as the MNO selection policy. In this case, the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay for the entire terminal group.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送遅延のばらつき最小」と設定するのも有効である。なお、システムの制約のため、伝送遅延時間を正確に測定できないときには、送信側で一定間隔の既知信号／既知メッセージ（ヘルスチェック等）を送信することによって、伝送遅延時間を測定すればよい。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送遅延のばらつきの和、または、ばらつきの２乗平均の和等が最小になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体について必要最低限の伝送遅延ばらつきを指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送遅延のばらつき、または、ばらつきの２乗平均の和等を最小にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "minimum variation in transmission delay" as the MNO selection policy. When the transmission delay time cannot be measured accurately due to system restrictions, the transmission delay time may be measured by transmitting a known signal / known message (health check, etc.) at regular intervals on the transmitting side. In this case, using the information read from the database group, MNO selection can be performed so that the sum of the variations in the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variations is minimized. Further, it is possible to minimize the variation of the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variation while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay variation for the entire terminal group.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送誤り率最小」と設定するのも有効である。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送誤り率の和が最小になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体が必要最低限の伝送誤り率を指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送誤り率の和を最小にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "minimum transmission error rate" as the MNO selection policy. In this case, the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission error rate for the entire terminal group.
　また、例えば上述した、「通信コスト最小化」、「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」、「伝送速度最大」、「伝送遅延最小」、「伝送誤り率最小」等の複数のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに優先度を設けて統合するのも有効である。例えば、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２に、（１）事業者番号：１、（２）端末グループ番号：１、（３）端末グループ対象：第１－１端末、第１－２端末、第１－３端末、（４）ＭＮＯ選択ポリシー：優先度１「伝送誤り率最小（必要最低伝送誤り率ＢＬＥＲ＝１０－４）」、優先度２「通信コスト最小化」、と設定してもよい。 Further, for example, a plurality of MNOs such as "minimize communication cost", "high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)", "maximum transmission speed", "minimum transmission delay", and "minimum transmission error rate" described above are selected. It is also effective to prioritize and integrate policies. For example, in the MNO selection policy table 102-2, (1) operator number: 1, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal group target: 1-1 terminal, 1-2 terminal, first -3 terminals, (4) MNO selection policy: Priority 1 "Minimum transmission error rate (minimum required transmission error rate BLER = 10 -4 )" and Priority 2 "Minimize communication cost" may be set.
　＜実施の形態１のまとめ＞
　本実施の形態１に係る無線通信システムによれば、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置が、端末グループに属する複数の無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、無線通信端末毎に１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、無線通信端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行う。このような構成によれば、無線通信端末の端末グループについて通信を適切化することができる。 <Summary of Embodiment 1>
According to the wireless communication system according to the first embodiment, the MVNO network device manages group communication information which is information related to communication of a plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to a terminal group, and wirelessly based on the group communication information. One MNO network and session are selected for each communication terminal, and the establishment or switching of the session of the wireless communication terminal is controlled based on the selection result. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize communication for a terminal group of wireless communication terminals.
　＜実施の形態１の変形例１＞
　図４は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態１の変形例１に係る無線通信システム１００の例示的な構成を示す図である。本変形例１に係る無線通信システム１００では、事業者とＭＶＮＯとの間の契約形態に応じて、通信セッション確立の際に行われる認証方式を選択することが可能となっている。 <Modification 1 of Embodiment 1>
FIG. 4 shows an exemplary configuration of a wireless communication system 100 according to a first modification of the first embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a figure. In the wireless communication system 100 according to the first modification, it is possible to select an authentication method performed when establishing a communication session according to the contract form between the operator and the MVNO.
　以下で説明する例では、第１事業者は、ＭＶＮＯと通信コストの低価格化を重視する契約をしており、その認証方式の契約はノーマルの契約であると仮定する。一方、第２事業者は、ＭＶＮＯと通信耐性を重視する契約をしており、その認証方式の契約は秘匿性を重視する契約であると仮定する。 In the example explained below, it is assumed that the first business operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes the reduction of communication costs, and the contract of the authentication method is a normal contract. On the other hand, it is assumed that the second operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes communication resistance, and that the authentication method contract is a contract that emphasizes confidentiality.
　このとき、第２事業者の端末グループに属する、第２－１端末１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末１０５ｂｃからの通信セッション要求に応じて、これら端末に搭載されたＳＩＭ（Subscriber Identity Module）と、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１におけるＨＳＳ（Home Subscriber Server）モジュール１０２－３との間で通信セッション確立のための認証が行われる。この認証の際に、ＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３は、ＳＩＭとＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３との間の当該認証として、他の契約事業者とは異なる特別な認証方式を選択する。これにより、事業者毎及び契約毎に、秘匿性を重視した通信セッションを選択的に提供することが可能となる。 At this time, in response to a communication session request from the 2-1 terminal 105ba, the 2-2 terminal 105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator, the SIM mounted on these terminals ( Authentication for establishing a communication session is performed between the Subscriber Identity Module) and the HSS (Home Subscriber Server) module 102-3 in the core network 102-1 above the MVNO. At the time of this authentication, the HSS module 102-3 selects a special authentication method different from that of other contractors as the authentication between the SIM and the HSS module 102-3. This makes it possible to selectively provide communication sessions with an emphasis on confidentiality for each business operator and each contract.
　＜実施の形態１の変形例２＞
　図５は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態１の変形例２に係る無線通信システム３００の例示的な構成を示す図である。なお、本変形例２に係る無線通信システム３００では、無線通信システム３００を利用する事業者とＭＶＮＯとの間で、端末間の関連付けに基づくＭＮＯ選択ポリシー情報を授受する。このような構成により、適正なＭＮＯを選択することが可能となるので、障害時の耐性が強い通信サービスを提供することが可能となっている。 <Modification 2 of Embodiment 1>
FIG. 5 shows an exemplary configuration of a wireless communication system 300 according to a second modification of the first embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a figure. In the wireless communication system 300 according to the second modification, the MNO selection policy information based on the association between the terminals is exchanged between the operator using the wireless communication system 300 and the MVNO. With such a configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate MNO, so that it is possible to provide a communication service having a high tolerance in the event of a failure.
　図５の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム３００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者が存在している。第１事業者３０１の端末グループとして、第１－１端末３０５ａａ～第１－９端末３０５ａｉの９台が存在している。 In the example of FIG. 5, there is a first operator as a operator using the MVNO wireless communication system 300. As a terminal group of the first operator 301, there are nine terminals, 1-1 terminal 305aa to 1-9 terminal 305ai.
　これら端末は、例えば、有線ケーブルで第１事業者の第１－１端末接続装置３０７ａａ～第１事業者の第１－９端末接続装置３０７ａｉと接続され、無線でそれぞれ基地局を経由して複数のＭＮＯと接続している。各第１事業者の端末接続装置は、第１事業者のアプリケーションを供する装置であり、事業者毎に様々に用いられる。ここでは、第１事業者にとって端末接続装置の重要度が定義されており、第１－１端末接続装置３０７ａａ（重要度：最高）＞第１－２端末接続装置３０７ａｂ及び第１－３端末接続装置３０７ａｃ＞第１－４端末接続装置３０７ａｄ及び第１－５端末接続装置３０７ａｅ及び第１－６端末接続装置３０７ａｆ及び第１－７端末接続装置３０７ａｇ＞第１－８端末接続装置３０７ａｈ及び第１－９端末接続装置３０７ａｉ（重要度：最低）であるとする。 These terminals are, for example, connected to the first terminal connection device 307aa of the first operator to the first terminal connection device 307ai of the first operator by a wired cable, and a plurality of these terminals are wirelessly connected via a base station. It is connected to the MNO of. The terminal connection device of each first business operator is a device that provides an application of the first business operator, and is used in various ways for each business operator. Here, the importance of the terminal connection device is defined for the first operator, and the 1-1 terminal connection device 307aa (importance: highest)> the 1-2 terminal connection device 307ab and the 1-3 terminal connection. Device 307ac> 1-4 terminal connection device 307ad, 1-5 terminal connection device 307ae, 1-6 terminal connection device 307af and 1-7 terminal connection device 307ag> 1-8 terminal connection device 307ah and 1st -9 Terminal connection device 307ai (importance: lowest).
　第１事業者３０１は、ＭＶＮＯ３０２との間で指定したある端末グループに対して、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－２に「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」と設定する。第１事業者３０１は、伝送路を介して遠隔からＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－２を設定してもよいし、ＭＮＯ経由で所要のフォーマットに変換してＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－２を設定してもよい。 The first operator 301 sets "high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)" in the MNO selection policy table 302-2 for each terminal group for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 302. The first operator 301 may set the MNO selection policy table 302-2 remotely via the transmission line, or convert it to a required format via the MNO and set the MNO selection policy table 302-2. May be good.
　切り替え制御モジュール３０２－７内のネットワークモニタデータベースには、例えば、全端末の接続情報が格納されている。切り替え制御モジュール３０２－７は、接続情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－２の選択ポリシーが満たされているか、つまり、第１事業者３０１の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末３０５ａａ～第１－９第１－９端末３０５ａｉを接続しているＭＮＯが均一化（極力別々のＭＮＯと接続）されているかを判断する。そして、切り替え制御モジュール３０２－７は、当該ＭＮＯが均一化されていないと判断した場合に、切り替え制御モジュール３０２－７内の接続情報などに基づいて、当該ＭＮＯを均一化するようにＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えを行う。 For example, connection information of all terminals is stored in the network monitor database in the switching control module 302-7. The switching control module 302-7 satisfies the selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 302-2 based on the connection information, that is, the 1-1 terminals 305aa to belong to the terminal group of the first operator 301. 1st-9th 1-9 It is determined whether the MNO connecting the terminal 305ai is uniform (connected to different MNOs as much as possible). Then, when the switching control module 302-7 determines that the MNO is not uniform, the MNO network and the switching control module 302-7 so as to make the MNO uniform based on the connection information in the switching control module 302-7 and the like. Switch sessions.
　さらに、第１事業者３０１は、ＭＶＮＯ３０２との間で指定したある端末グループに対して、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４に「端末重要度：第１－１端末＞第１－２端末、第１－３端末＞第１－４端末、第１－５端末、第１－６端末、第１－７端末＞第１－８端末、第１－９端末」と設定する。切り替え制御モジュール３０２－７は、第１－１端末３０５ａａ～第１－９端末３０５ａｉを接続しているＭＮＯが、事業者によってＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４に設定された重要度序列の順に接続されていない場合、これら端末に接続されるＭＮＯを重要度序列の順に接続するようにＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えを行う。 Further, the first operator 301 sets the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 302 as "terminal importance: 1-1 terminal> 1-first". 2 terminals, 1-3 terminals> 1-4 terminals, 1-5 terminals, 1-6 terminals, 1-7 terminals> 1-8 terminals, 1-9 terminals ". In the switching control module 302-7, the MNOs connecting the 1-1 terminal 305aa to the 1-9th terminal 305ai are connected in the order of importance set in the MNO selection policy table 302-4 by the operator. If not, the MNO network and session are switched so that the MNOs connected to these terminals are connected in the order of importance.
　以下に重要度序列について補足説明する。無線による監視制御を行う事業者の端末接続装置は、一般に事業者のアプリケーションにより様々な関係性を持っている。端末接続装置の一例として、電力源からの出力電圧及び電流をモニタし、異常検出時、電流経路の切断または変更等の制御を行う装置を説明する。 The following is a supplementary explanation of the importance order. The terminal connection device of a business operator that performs wireless monitoring and control generally has various relationships depending on the application of the business operator. As an example of the terminal connection device, a device that monitors the output voltage and current from the power source and controls the disconnection or change of the current path when an abnormality is detected will be described.
　端末接続装置の数が各ＭＮＯに均一化されている場合でも、電力源に近い上流側の端末接続装置が特定のＭＮＯに偏って割当られる場合がある。このような場合に、当該特定のＭＮＯに障害が発生すると、出力電圧及び電流のモニタ及び制御を行うことができなくなる端末接続装置が上流に多数存在してしまうことになる。上流の制御誤りは下流に影響するため、ＭＮＯは分散していることが望ましい。 Even if the number of terminal connection devices is uniform for each MNO, the terminal connection devices on the upstream side near the power source may be allocated unevenly to a specific MNO. In such a case, if a failure occurs in the specific MNO, there will be a large number of terminal connection devices upstream that cannot monitor and control the output voltage and current. It is desirable that the MNOs are dispersed because upstream control errors affect the downstream.
　そこで本変形例２では、事業者のアプリケーションにおける上流の端末接続装置ほど重要度の序列が高いと設定し、各ＭＮＯに分散させる。例えば、端末接続装置の重要度が最も高い第１－１端末接続装置３０７ａａが、第１－１端末３０５ａａと接続されて、第１－１基地局３０４ａａを経由して第１ＭＮＯ３０３ａと通信するとき、次に重要度が高い第１－２端末接続装置３０７ａｂが、第１－２端末３０５ａｂと接続されて、第２－１基地局３０４ｂａを経由して第２ＭＮＯ３０３ｂと通信する。また、このとき、第１－２端末接続装置３０７ａｂと同等の重要度である、第１－３端末接続装置３０７ａｃが、第１－３端末３０５ａｃと接続されて、第３－２基地局３０４ｃｂを経由して第３ＭＮＯ３０３ｃと通信する。以上のように事業者のアプリケーションを供する端末接続装置を重要度の順に、極力異なるＭＮＯと接続することにより、特定のＭＮＯに障害が発生しても障害の影響が最小限に抑えられた、障害時の耐性が強い通信サービスを提供することが可能となる。 Therefore, in this modification 2, it is set that the order of importance is higher for the upstream terminal connection device in the application of the operator, and it is distributed to each MNO. For example, when the 1-1 terminal connecting device 307aa, which has the highest importance of the terminal connecting device, is connected to the 1-1 terminal 305aa and communicates with the first MNO 303a via the 1-1 base station 304aa. The next most important 1-2 terminal connecting device 307ab is connected to the 1-2 terminal 305ab and communicates with the second MNO 303b via the 2-1 base station 304ba. Further, at this time, the 1-3 terminal connecting device 307ac, which has the same importance as the 1-2 terminal connecting device 307ab, is connected to the 1-3 terminal 305ac to connect the 3-2 base station 304cc. It communicates with the third MNO303c via. As described above, by connecting the terminal connection devices that provide the applications of the operator to MNOs that differ as much as possible in order of importance, even if a failure occurs in a specific MNO, the effect of the failure is minimized. It is possible to provide communication services that are highly resistant to time.
　なお、上記では、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－２、及び、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４を個別に考慮して、２回のＭＮＯの切り替えを行う例について説明したが、これに限ったものではない。例えば、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－２、及び、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４をトータルで考慮した、１回だけのＭＮＯの切り替えを行えば、切り替え回数が低減できる。 In the above, an example in which the MNO selection policy table 302-2 for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association are individually considered and the MNO is switched twice has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the number of switchings can be reduced by switching the MNO only once, considering the MNO selection policy table 302-2 for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association in total. ..
　また、上記では、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４における、端末接続装置の重要度序列に基づいてＭＮＯを均一化する例について説明したが、これに限ったものではない。例えば、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４に、第１事業者の端末グループよりさらに細かい端末サブグループを定義して、端末サブグループ内で接続するＭＮＯを均一化する方式も有効である。端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３０２－４は、例えば、（１）事業者番号：１、（２）端末グループ番号：１、（３）端末サブグループ番号：１、（４）端末サブグループ対象：第１－１端末、第１－２端末、第１－３端末、（５）端末重要度：全端末同一、とするとともに、（１）事業者番号：１、（２）端末グループ番号：１、（３）端末サブグループ番号：２、（４）端末サブグループ対象：端末１－４、第１－５端末、第１－６端末、（５）端末重要度：全端末同一、と設定してもよい。この場合、事業者とＭＶＮＯとの間におけるテーブル管理において、各端末の重要度が変化する毎に上記設定を変更する必要がなくなるため、処理を簡素化できる。 Further, in the above, an example of equalizing the MNO based on the importance order of the terminal connection device in the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also effective to define a terminal subgroup that is finer than the terminal group of the first operator in the MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association, and to make the MNOs connected within the terminal subgroup uniform. is there. The MNO selection policy table 302-4 for inter-terminal association is, for example, (1) business operator number: 1, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal subgroup number: 1, (4) terminal subgroup. Target: 1-1 terminal, 1-2 terminal, 1-3 terminal, (5) Terminal importance: All terminals are the same, (1) Business number: 1, (2) Terminal group number 1, (3) Terminal subgroup number: 2, (4) Terminal subgroup Target: Terminals 1-4, 1-5 terminals, 1-6 terminals, (5) Terminal importance: All terminals are the same. It may be set. In this case, in the table management between the operator and the MVNO, it is not necessary to change the above setting every time the importance of each terminal changes, so that the process can be simplified.
　＜実施の形態１の変形例３＞
　ネットワークシステムが、一地域の自然災害等で電気通信サービスが提供できなくなることは望ましくない。このため、図６のように、ＭＶＮＯは、極力離れた複数の拠点に分散されてもよい。以下で説明するように、実施の形態１の変形例３では、万一、ＭＶＮＯの特定拠点のサービスが提供できない状況になったときにでも、各事業者へのサービスに及ぼす影響を最小限にすることが可能となっている。 <Modification 3 of Embodiment 1>
It is not desirable for the network system to be unable to provide telecommunications services due to a natural disaster in one area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, the MVNO may be dispersed in a plurality of bases as far apart as possible. As will be described below, in the modified example 3 of the first embodiment, even if the service of the specific base of the MVNO cannot be provided, the influence on the service to each business operator is minimized. It is possible to do.
　図６は、本変形例３に係る無線通信システム４００の例示的な構成を示す図である。無線通信システム４００では、ＭＶＮＯ４０２のネットワークが、第１ＭＮＯ４０３ａ、第２ＭＮＯ４０３ｂ、第３ＭＮＯ４０３ｃのネットワークと接続しており、第１事業者４０１の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する。ＭＶＮＯ４０２は、上述したＭＶＮＯネットワーク、テーブル及びモジュールを複数含んでいる。図６の例では、ソフトウェアを搭載するサーバ群等の電気通信設備からなるＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ａ及びＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ｂが、第１拠点及び第２拠点に分散配置されている。そして、それに合わせて、グループ端末毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４０２－２ａ、４０２－２ｂ、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４０２－４ａ、４０２－４ｂ、及び、切り替え制御モジュール４０２－７ａ、４０２－７ｂが、第１拠点及び第２拠点に分散配置されている。 FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 400 according to the third modification. In the wireless communication system 400, the network of the MVNO 402 is connected to the networks of the first MNO403a, the second MNO403b, and the third MNO403c, and provides a communication session to the terminal group of the first operator 401. The MVNO 402 includes a plurality of the above-mentioned MVNO networks, tables and modules. In the example of FIG. 6, the MVNO network 402-5a and the MVNO network 402-5b, which are composed of telecommunications equipment such as a group of servers equipped with software, are distributed and arranged in the first base and the second base. Then, in accordance with this, the MNO selection policy tables 402-2a and 402-2b for each group terminal, the MNO selection policy tables 402-4a and 402-4b for inter-terminal association, and the switching control modules 402-7a and 402- 7b is distributed in the first base and the second base.
　図６の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム４００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者が存在している。第１事業者４０１の端末グループとして、第１－１端末４０５ａａ～第１－９端末４０５ａｉの９台が存在している。 In the example of FIG. 6, there is a first operator as a operator using the MVNO wireless communication system 400. As a terminal group of the first operator 401, there are nine terminals, 1-1 terminal 405aa to 1-9 terminal 405ai.
　これら端末は、例えば、有線ケーブルで第１事業者の第１－１端末接続装置４０７ａａ～第１事業者の第１－９端末接続装置４０７ａｉと接続され、無線でそれぞれ基地局を経由して複数のＭＮＯと接続している。各第１事業者の端末接続装置は、第１事業者のアプリケーションを供する装置であり、事業者毎に様々に用いられる。ここでは、第１事業者にとって端末接続装置の重要度が定義されており、第１－１端末接続装置４０７ａａ（重要度：最高）＞第１－２端末接続装置４０７ａｂ＞第１－３端末接続装置４０７ａｃ＞第１－４端末接続装置４０７ａｄ＞第１－５端末接続装置４０７ａｅ＞第１－６端末接続装置４０７ａｆ＞第１－７端末接続装置４０７ａｇ＞第１－８端末接続装置４０７ａｈ＞第１－９端末接続装置４０７ａｉ（重要度：最低）であるとする。 These terminals are, for example, connected to the first terminal connection device 407aa of the first operator to the first terminal connection device 407ai of the first operator by a wired cable, and a plurality of these terminals are wirelessly connected via a base station. It is connected to the MNO of. The terminal connection device of each first business operator is a device that provides an application of the first business operator, and is used in various ways for each business operator. Here, the importance of the terminal connection device is defined for the first operator, and the 1-1 terminal connection device 407aa (importance: highest)> the 1-2 terminal connection device 407ab> the 1-3 terminal connection. Device 407ac> 1-4 terminal connection device 407ad> 1-5 terminal connection device 407ae> 1-6 terminal connection device 407af> 1-7 terminal connection device 407ag> 1-8 terminal connection device 407ah> 1st -9 Terminal connection device 407ai (importance: lowest).
　実施の形態１の変形例２と同様に、第１事業者４０１は、ＭＶＮＯ４０２との間で指定したある端末グループに対して、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４０２－２ａ、４０２－２ｂに「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」と設定する。テーブルは、伝送路を介して遠隔から設定されてもよいし、ＭＶＮＯ保守端末経由で所要のフォーマットに変換して設定されてもよい。 Similar to the second modification of the first embodiment, the first operator 401 sets the MNO selection policy tables 402-2a and 402-2b for each terminal group for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 402. High reliability (distributed setting of connected MNO) ”is set. The table may be set remotely via a transmission line, or may be converted to a required format via an MVNO maintenance terminal and set.
　切り替え制御モジュール４０２－７は、接続情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４０２－２の選択ポリシーが満たされているか、つまり、第１事業者４０１の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末４０５ａａ～第１－９端末４０５ａｉと接続しているＭＮＯが均一化（極力別々のＭＮＯと接続）されているかを判断する。そして、切り替え制御モジュール４０２－７は、当該ＭＮＯが均一化されていないと判断した場合に、切り替え制御モジュール４０２－７ａ、４０２－７ｂ内のネットワークモニタデータベースに格納されている端末の接続情報などに基づいて、当該ＭＮＯを均一化するようにＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えを行う。 The switching control module 402-7 satisfies the selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 402-2 based on the connection information, that is, the 1-1 terminals 405aa to belong to the terminal group of the first operator 401. It is determined whether the MNOs connected to the 1st-9th terminals 405ai are made uniform (connected to different MNOs as much as possible). Then, when it is determined that the MNO is not uniformized, the switching control module 402-7 can be used as connection information of terminals stored in the network monitor database in the switching control modules 402-7a and 402-7b. Based on this, the MNO network and session are switched so as to make the MNO uniform.
　さらに、第１事業者４０１は、ＭＶＮＯ４０２との間で指定したある端末グループに対して、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４０２－４ａ、４０２－４ｂに「端末重要度：第１－１端末＞第１－２端末＞第１－３端末＞端末１－４＞第１－５端末＞第１－６端末＞第１－７端末＞第１－８端末＞第１－９端末」と設定する。切り替え制御モジュール４０２－７は、第１－１端末４０５ａａ～第１－９端末３０５ａｉが、事業者によってＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４０２－４に設定された重要度序列の順にＭＮＯに接続されているかを判断する。そして、切り替え制御モジュール４０２－７は、そのように接続されていないと判断した場合に、ネットワークモニタデータベースに格納されている端末の接続情報などに基づいて、当該端末に接続されるＭＮＯを重要度序列の順に接続するようにＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えを行う。 Further, the first operator 401 sets "Terminal importance: 1-1 terminal" in the MNO selection policy tables 402-4a and 402-4b for inter-terminal association for a certain terminal group designated with the MVNO 402. > 1-2 terminal> 1-3 terminal> Terminal 1-4> 1-5 terminal> 1-6 terminal> 1-7 terminal> 1-8 terminal> 1-9 terminal " To do. The switching control module 402-7 determines whether the 1-1 terminal 405aa to the 1-9th terminal 305ai are connected to the MNO in the order of importance set in the MNO selection policy table 402-4 by the operator. To do. Then, when the switching control module 402-7 determines that the connection is not made in that way, the importance of the MNO connected to the terminal is determined based on the connection information of the terminal stored in the network monitor database. Switch the MNO network and session so that they are connected in the order of order.
　以上により、例えば、最も重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－１端末接続装置４０７ａａと接続している第１－１端末４０５ａａが、第１ＭＮＯ４０３ａの基地局に接続されているとき、２番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－２端末接続装置４０７ａｂと接続している第１－２端末４０５ａｂが、第１ＭＮＯ４０３ａとは異なる第２ＭＮＯ４０３ｂの基地局に接続され、３番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－３端末接続装置４０７ａｃと接続している第１－３端末４０５ａｃが、第１ＭＮＯ４０３ａや第２ＭＮＯ４０３ｂとは異なる第３ＭＮＯ４０３ｃの基地局に接続される。以下同様に４、５、６、７、８、９番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の端末接続装置と接続している端末が、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯ、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局とそれぞれ接続される。 From the above, for example, when the 1-1 terminal 405aa connected to the 1-1 terminal connecting device 407aa of the first operator, which has the highest importance, is connected to the base station of the first MNO403a, the second The 1-2 terminal 405ab, which is connected to the 1-2 terminal connection device 407ab of the first operator, which is highly important, is connected to the base station of the second MNO403b, which is different from the first MNO403a, and is the third most important. The 1-3 terminal 405ac, which is connected to the 1-3 terminal connection device 407ac of the first operator, is connected to the base station of the third MNO403c, which is different from the first MNO403a and the second MNO403b. Similarly, the terminals connected to the terminal connection device of the first operator having the highest importance of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 are the first MNO, the second MNO, the third MNO, the first MNO, and the second MNO. , Is connected to the base station of the third MNO, respectively.
　さらに、本変形例３では、最も重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－１端末接続装置４０７ａａと接続している第１－１端末４０５ａａが、第１ＭＮＯ４０３ａ経由で第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ａに接続されているとき、２番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－２端末接続装置４０７ａｂと接続している第１－２端末４０５ａｂが、第２ＭＮＯ４０３ｂ経由で第２拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ｂに接続される。以下同様に３、４、５、６、７、８、９番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の端末接続装置と接続している端末が、第１拠点、第２拠点、第１拠点、第２拠点、第１拠点、第２拠点、第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワークとそれぞれ接続される。 Further, in the present modification 3, the 1-1 terminal 405aa connected to the 1-1 terminal connecting device 407aa of the first operator, which has the highest importance, is connected to the MVNO network 402 of the first base via the first MNO403a. When connected to -5a, the 1-2 terminal 405ab connected to the 1-2 terminal connection device 407ab of the first operator, which has the second highest importance, is connected to the second base via the second MNO403b. It is connected to the MVNO network 402-5b. Similarly, the terminals connected to the terminal connection device of the first operator, which is the third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, and ninth most important, are the first base, the second base, the first base, and so on. It is connected to the MVNO network of the 2nd base, the 1st base, the 2nd base, and the 1st base, respectively.
　例えば、上記第１事業者の端末接続装置の接続の全てが、第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ａ経由である場合に、第１拠点のＭＶＮＯに特有の大規模障害が発生したとき、第１事業者へのサービス提供が全断となる。これに対して、以上のような本変形例３によれば、その影響を低減することができるので、障害時の耐性が強い通信サービスを提供することが可能となる。 For example, when all the connections of the terminal connection devices of the first business operator are via the MVNO network 402-5a of the first base, and a large-scale failure peculiar to the MVNO of the first base occurs, the first The provision of services to businesses will be completely cut off. On the other hand, according to the present modification 3 as described above, the influence thereof can be reduced, so that it is possible to provide a communication service having a high tolerance in the event of a failure.
　なお、以上の例では、第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ａ、及び、第２拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク４０２－５ｂが、０／１系（どちらか１方のみに接続可能）である構成について説明した。このような構成では、接続を最小限にできるため低価格なネットワークが構築できる。 In the above example, the configuration in which the MVNO network 402-5a of the first base and the MVNO network 402-5b of the second base are 0/1 system (connectable to only one of them) has been described. .. In such a configuration, the connection can be minimized, so that a low-priced network can be constructed.
　一方、上記ＭＶＮＯネットワークが、Ｎ／Ｅ系（両方に接続して障害時に切り替え可能）である構成であってもよい。この構成では、取り扱う端末で必要となる信頼性に応じて、ＭＶＮＯ内の各種データベース及びポリシーテーブル等は、Ｎ系からＥ系に可及的にミラーリングされることが望ましい。また、上記ＭＶＮＯネットワークがＮ／Ｅ系である構成では、セッションをＮ系Ｅ系の両方に設定し、特定の拠点のＭＶＮＯに起因する障害発生時にＮ系からＥ系に切り替えることが望ましい。 On the other hand, the MVNO network may be configured to be an N / E system (connectable to both and can be switched in the event of a failure). In this configuration, it is desirable that various databases, policy tables, etc. in the MVNO are mirrored from N system to E system as much as possible according to the reliability required for the terminal to be handled. Further, in the configuration in which the MVNO network is an N / E system, it is desirable to set the session to both the N system and the E system and switch from the N system to the E system when a failure occurs due to the MVNO of a specific base.
　また、０／１系とＮ／Ｅ系とが混在可能である場合には、重要度が高い事業者の端末接続装置のいくつかにのみＮ／Ｅ系を適用することは有効である。このように構成すれば、事業者の需要に合わせてサービス品質と価格とのバランスをとることができる。 In addition, when 0/1 system and N / E system can be mixed, it is effective to apply the N / E system only to some of the terminal connection devices of the business operators with high importance. With this configuration, it is possible to balance service quality and price according to the demand of the business operator.
　＜実施の形態１の変形例４＞
　図７及び図８を用いて、実施の形態１の変形例４に係る無線通信システムが備えるＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置及び無線通信端末の構成要素について説明する。なお、本変形例４に係る無線通信システムは、実施の形態１、及び、実施の形態１の変形例１～変形例３の全てを実現可能となっている。なお、実施の形態１、及び、実施の形態１の変形例１～変形例３のいずれかだけが実現される場合には、以下で説明する構成要素は適宜省略される。 <Modification 4 of Embodiment 1>
The components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. The wireless communication system according to the fourth modification can realize all of the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment. When only one of the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
　図７は、本変形例４に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置１０２の構成を示すブロック図である。ＭＶＮＯ１０２は、一般にサーバ上のソフトウェアモジュール群として構成される。 FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 102 according to the present modification 4. The MVNO 102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
　図７における上位のコアネットワーク１０２－１は、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールから構成される。そして、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールは、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１０２－９と、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１０２－１０と、事業者インタフェースモジュール１０２－１１とを含む。 The upper core network 102-1 in FIG. 7 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module. The MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 102-9, a PGW function module 102-10, and a business operator interface module 102-11.
　事業者インタフェースモジュール１０２－１１は、各事業者間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行う。事業者インタフェースモジュール１０２－１１は、ＭＶＮＯ内外のルート制御を行い、事業者要望管理制御モジュール１０２－６へのアクセスが可能であり、必要に応じてＭＶＮＯ外部のインターネットに接続するように構成することも有効である。 The operator interface module 102-11 balances between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them. The operator interface module 102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
　ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１０２－１０は、ＩＰアドレスの割当やＩＰパケットの伝達品質制御を行うとともに、ＭＮＯの切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７の指示に従いＭＮＯの切り替えを行う。ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１０２－９は、各ＭＮＯ間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行うとともに、ＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３とのアクセスが可能である。 The PGW function module 102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of the IP packet, and also switches the MNO according to the instruction of the MNO switching control module 102-7. The MNO interface module 102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 102-3.
　事業者要望管理制御モジュール１０２－６は、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２と、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－４とを含む。端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２は、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯをどのようなポリシーで切り替えをするかを設定するためのテーブルである。端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－４は、事業者のアプリケーションを供する端末接続装置の特性を考慮して当該端末接続装置と接続する端末のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーを設定するためのテーブルである。 The operator request management control module 102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 102-4 for inter-terminal association. The MNO selection policy table 102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting what kind of policy is used to switch the MNO for each terminal group. The MNO selection policy table 102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
　例えば、事業者インタフェースモジュール１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループについて「通信コスト最小化」という設定指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２に格納される。また、事業者インタフェースモジュール１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループの端末間関連重要度指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－４に格納される。 For example, when a setting instruction "minimize communication cost" is sent to the operator request management control module 102-6 for a certain terminal group of the first operator via the operator interface module 102-11, the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 102-2. Further, when the terminal-to-terminal related importance instruction of the terminal group having the first operator reaches the operator request management control module 102-6 via the operator interface module 102-11, the information is sent to the MNO selection policy. It is stored in table 102-4.
　ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１０２－８は、例えば、各ＭＮＯの課金情報（従量課金であったり、特定期間定額であったり、特定の通信量までは定額でそれ以上の通信量には従量課金である等の定量的情報）、各ＭＮＯから通知される運用停止アナウンス情報や、各ＭＮＯの保守機能部からの一部装置における異常輻輳や機器損傷情報等の情報を、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７に通知する。また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１０２－２、１０２－４において、事業者からの遠隔書き込み機能が無い場合に、これらテーブルにセキュアに書き込みを行うときには、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１０２－８による書き込みが行われる。このとき、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１０２－８によって、ＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３へのセキュアな書き込みも行われてもよい。 The MVNO maintenance function module 102-8 is, for example, charged information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, fixed-rate for a specific period, fixed-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the switching control module 102-7. .. Further, in the MNO selection policy tables 102-2 and 102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator and the writing is securely performed on these tables, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 102-3.
　端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３には、基本的に各事業者から直接書き込みができない。ＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３で管理している端末情報が書き換えられるときには、対象の端末のＳＩＭの書き換えも合わせて行われる。例えば、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーと連動して認証アルゴリズムを異なるものに変更する書き換えは有効である。このように構成した場合には、高い信頼性を求めるポリシーのときに、高い認証アルゴリズムを提供することができるので、事業者からの設定ミスが発生しても重大なシステム障害を発生させずにサービスの提供が可能となる。 Basically, it is not possible to write directly to the HSS module 102-3, which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator. When the terminal information managed by the HSS module 102-3 is rewritten, the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective. With this configuration, a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
　情報管理部である切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１０２－９、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１０２－１０を経由して、端末グループに属する複数の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を収集し、データベース群１０２－１２に格納する。データベース群１０２－１２は、ネットワークモニタデータベース１０２－１３と、端末モニタデータベース１０２－１４と、課金情報用データベース１０２－１５とを含む。以下、グループ通信情報及びデータベース群１０２－１２について説明する。 The switching control module 102-7, which is an information management unit, transmits group communication information, which is information related to communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group, via the MNO interface module 102-9 and the PGW function module 102-10. Collect and store in database group 102-12. The database group 102-12 includes a network monitor database 102-13, a terminal monitor database 102-14, and a billing information database 102-15. Hereinafter, the group communication information and the database group 102-12 will be described.
　ネットワークモニタデータベース１０２－１３には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対してネットワークで測定または検出した情報（通信回線品質及び障害情報、並びに、端末がどの経路で接続されているかを示す接続情報）が収集及び格納される。なお、ここでいうネットワークは、各ＭＮＯネットワークであるものとするが、これに限ったものではなく、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークであればよい。 The network monitor database 102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored. The network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
　端末モニタデータベース１０２－１４には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末が自ら測定または検出し、各ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに定期的または随時に送信する、通信回線品質及び障害情報が収集及び格納される。 The terminal monitor database 102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
　課金情報用データベース１０２－１５には、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１０２－８から指定される各ＭＮＯの課金情報、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１０２－１０から入手される各端末の課金対象データの通信量（データ伝送量）等が収集及び格納される。 In the billing information database 102-15, the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
　切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、以上のグループ通信情報を総合的に考慮することで、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するようなＭＮＯ切り替え制御を行う。例えば、切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７は、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１０２－８から受け取ったＭＶＮＯ拠点情報に基づいて、ＭＶＮＯの拠点を分散するための指示を行い、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１０２－１０において当該指示に対応したアドレッシング制御を行う。この場合、実施の形態１の変形例３で説明したように、ＭＶＮＯ拠点に特有の大規模障害時においても事業者へのサービス提供に対する影響を低減することができる。 The switching control module 102-7 comprehensively considers the above group communication information to perform MNO switching control suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group. For example, the switching control module 102-7 gives an instruction to distribute the MVNO bases based on the MVNO base information received from the MVNO maintenance function module 102-8, and the PGW function module 102-10 responds to the instruction. Control the addressing. In this case, as described in the third modification of the first embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence on the service provision to the business operator even at the time of a large-scale failure peculiar to the MVNO base.
　図８は、実施の形態１の端末１０５ａａ～１０５ｂｃ（図１）などのうちの１つに相当する、本変形例４に係る端末１０５の構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 105 according to the present modification 4, which corresponds to one of the terminals 105aa to 105bc (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment.
　送受信機１０５－２は、アンテナ１０５－１で受信した信号に、無線周波数から信号帯域へのダウンコンバートと、復調及び誤り訂正等のように受信の無線レイヤ１の処理とを行う。データ加工部１０５－３は、送受信機１０５－２からの信号に、ＨＡＲＱやユーザフレームの復元等のように受信の無線レイヤ２の処理を行う。 The transmitter / receiver 105-2 performs down-conversion of the signal received by the antenna 105-1 from the radio frequency to the signal band, and processing of the received radio layer 1 such as demodulation and error correction. The data processing unit 105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 105-2 in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame.
　端末接続装置インタフェース１０５－４は、外部装置である端末接続装置に合わせたインタフェース整合を行う。端末接続装置は、例えば、センサー、カメラ、ＰＬＣ（Programmable Logic Controller）、パソコン等、または、これらと一体化されたＡＧＶ（Automated Guided Vehicle）、車、ロボット、ドローン等である。 The terminal connection device interface 105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device. The terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), a personal computer, or an AGV (Automated Guided Vehicle) integrated with these, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like.
　送受信機１０５－２の通信方式は、ＬＴＥ方式であってもよいし、５Ｇ方式であってもよいし、衛星移動体通信のネットワークであってもよいし、ＭＶＮＯが組み込み得るどの無線方式でもよい。 The communication system of the transmitter / receiver 105-2 may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any wireless system that the MVNO can incorporate. ..
　プロセッサ１０５－５は、端末全体を制御し、メモリ１０５－７と連携して、プログラムの動作及び格納、並びに、データ及びログの格納を行う。また、図８の例のように、端末１０５が、画面表示や、ＬＥＤなどのヒューマンインタフェース１０５－８を備える構成では、トラブル時の原因究明等を容易に行うことができる。この際、端末１０５で測定または検出された通信回線品質及び障害情報は、プロセッサ１０５－５でメッセージとして形成され、データ加工部１０５－３、送受信機１０５－２、アンテナ１０５－１を経由してＭＶＮＯに送信される。 The processor 105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 8, in the configuration in which the terminal 105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble. At this time, the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 105 are formed as a message by the processor 105-5, and pass through the data processing unit 105-3, the transmitter / receiver 105-2, and the antenna 105-1. It is sent to the MVNO.
　ＭＶＮＯの端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール１０２－３と協働するＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１０５－６は、暗号化の鍵を払い出す認証機能を有する。事業者のアプリケーションで遠隔からデフォルトで選択する認証方式は、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭにより指定されるか、または、端末上のハードウェアもしくはソフトウェアによるＤＩＰＳＷにより指定される。このような指定により、無線規格上認証方式の設定ビットが通常使用＝デフォルトとなっているとき、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を事業者が選択することができる。 The SIM / eSIM105-6 that cooperates with the HSS module 102-3, which is the terminal information management control module of the MVNO, has an authentication function that issues an encryption key. The authentication method that is remotely selected by default in the application of the operator is specified by SIM / eSIM or by DIPSW by hardware or software on the terminal. With such a designation, when the setting bit of the authentication method in the wireless standard is normally used = default, the operator can select the authentication method to be used by default.
　なお、複数通りの認証アルゴリズムを物理的にＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ上に実装しておき、外部から選択可能としてもよい。具体的には、３ＧＰＰ対応の無線システムでは通常、デフォルト設定としてＭｉｌｅｎａｇｅが使用されている。このような場合に、例えば、事業者が認証方式指定メッセージを送信し、特殊認証方式を指定したときに、当該メッセージの内容をＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１０５－６に伝えることで、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を変更できるようにしてもよい。通常の規格では認証方式そのものは多数設定することができないが、上記により、事業者毎に異なる認証方式を実現することができるので、信頼性が高いネットワークシステムを構築できる。 Note that a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside. Specifically, in a 3GPP compatible wireless system, Milenage is usually used as the default setting. In such a case, for example, when the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method, the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM105-6 to set the authentication method to be used by default. It may be possible to change it. Although it is not possible to set a large number of authentication methods themselves in a normal standard, it is possible to realize a different authentication method for each business operator, so that a highly reliable network system can be constructed.
　＜実施の形態２＞
　図９は、本実施の形態２に係る無線通信システム１１００の例示的な構成を示す図である。無線通信システム１１００は、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供するシステムであり、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置１１０２と、複数の無線通信端末１１０５ａａ、１１０５ａｂ、１１０５ａｃ、１１０５ｂａ、１１０５ｂｂ、１１０５ｂｃとを備える。 <Embodiment 2>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 1100 according to the second embodiment. The wireless communication system 1100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and includes an MVNO network device 1102 and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 1105aa, 1105ab, 1105ac, 1105ba, 1105bb, 1105bc.
　図９の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム１１００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者と第２事業者とが存在している。第１事業者の端末グループとして、第１－１端末１１０５ａａ、第１－２端末１１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末１１０５ａｃが存在している。第２事業者の端末グループとして、第２－１端末１１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末１１０５ｂｂ、及び、第２－３端末１１０５ｂｃが存在している。 In the example of FIG. 9, there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 1100. As the terminal group of the first operator, there are 1-1 terminal 1105aa, 1-2 terminal 1105ab, and 1-3 terminal 1105ac. As the terminal group of the second operator, there are 2-1 terminal 1105ba, 2-2 terminal 1105bb, and 2-3 terminal 1105bc.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム１１００は、ＭＮＯネットワークとして、第１ＭＮＯネットワーク、第２ＭＮＯネットワーク、及び、第３ＭＮＯネットワークを含む。第１ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク１１０３ａと、コアネットワーク１１０３ａに接続された第１－１基地局１１０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂとを含む。第２ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク１１０３ｂと、コアネットワーク１１０３ｂに接続された第２－１基地局１１０４ｂａ及び第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂとを含む。第３ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク１１０３ｃと、コアネットワーク１１０３ｃに接続された第３－１基地局１１０４ｃａ及び第３－２基地局１１０４ｃｂとを含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、コアネットワーク１１０３ａ、１１０３ｂ、１１０３ｃには、Ｓ－ＧＷ等が含まれる。 The MVNO wireless communication system 1100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks. The first MNO network includes a core network 1103a and a 1-1 base station 1104a and a 1-2 base station 1104ab connected to the core network 1103a. The second MNO network includes a core network 1103b and a 2-1 base station 1104ba and a 2-2 base station 1104bb connected to the core network 1103b. The third MNO network includes a core network 1103c and a third base station 1104ca and a third-2 base station 1104cc connected to the core network 1103c. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the core networks 1103a, 1103b, 1103c include S-GW and the like.
　ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置１１０２は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末１１０５ａａ、１１０５ａｂ、１１０５ａｃ、１１０５ｂａ、１１０５ｂｂ、１１０５ｂｃと無線通信を行う。 The MVNO network device 1102 performs wireless communication with wireless communication terminals 1105aa, 1105ab, 1105ac, 1105ba, 1105bb, 1105bc that can be connected to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks.
　ＭＶＮＯ１１０２は、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ａ、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ｂ、及び、第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ｃと接続された上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１を、ＭＶＮＯネットワークとして含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１を構成するＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールには、Ｐ－ＧＷ、ＨＳＳ等が含まれる。 The MVNO 1102 includes the core network 1103a of the first MNO, the core network 1103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 1102-1 connected to the core network 1103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 1102-1 includes P-GW, HSS, and the like.
　上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１は、第１事業者のシステム１１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム１１０１ｂと接続される。第１事業者のシステム１１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム１１０１ｂは、例えば、事業者が事業者グループに属する複数の端末から情報を収集するデータサーバであってもよいし、これら収集した情報に基づいて事業者グループに属する複数の端末にサービスを提供するアプリケーションサーバであってもよい。 The upper core network 1102-1 is connected to the system 1101a of the first operator and the system 1101b of the second operator. The system 1101a of the first business operator and the system 1101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
　ＭＶＮＯ１１０２は、上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１のほか、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが設定されるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２と、端末グループに属する複数の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報に基づいてＭＮＯの選択制御を行う情報管理モジュールの一種である選択制御モジュール１１０２－７とを含む。選択制御モジュール１１０２－７は、データベースであるデータベース群と、情報管理部とを含む。 The MVNO 1102 includes the upper core network 1102-1, the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and the group communication information which is information related to the communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group. It includes a selection control module 1102-7, which is a kind of information management module that performs selection control of an MNO based on the above. The selection control module 1102-7 includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit.
　選択制御モジュール１１０２－７のデータベース群は、実施の形態１で説明した切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７のデータベース群と実質的に同じであり、端末グループに属する複数の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を保持する。選択制御モジュール１１０２－７のデータベース群は、例えば、ネットワークモニタデータベース、端末モニタデータベース、及び、課金情報用データベースを含む。 The database group of the selection control module 1102-7 is substantially the same as the database group of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment, and is group communication which is information on communication of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group. Hold information. The database group of the selection control module 1102-7 includes, for example, a network monitor database, a terminal monitor database, and a billing information database.
　選択制御モジュール１１０２－７の情報管理部は、実施の形態１で説明した切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７の情報管理部と実質的に同じである。ただし、本実施の形態２に係る情報管理部は、グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するように、端末毎に選択されるＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの数（１つ以上の数）を決定する。そして、本実施の形態２に係る情報管理部は、グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するように、端末毎に決定した数のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択する。そして、本実施の形態２に係る情報管理部は、当該選択結果に基づいて、端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行う。なお、以下の説明では、情報管理部は、データベース群と一体的に設けられた選択制御モジュール１１０２－７である場合について説明するが、データベース群と個別に設けられてもよいし、他のモジュールであってもよい。 The information management unit of the selection control module 1102-7 is substantially the same as the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment. However, the information management unit according to the second embodiment selects the number of MNO networks and sessions for each terminal so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 based on the group communication information ( Determine one or more numbers). Then, the information management unit according to the second embodiment selects a number of MNO networks and sessions determined for each terminal so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 based on the group communication information. To do. Then, the information management unit according to the second embodiment controls the establishment or switching of the session of the terminal based on the selection result. In the following description, the information management unit describes the case where the selection control module 1102-7 is provided integrally with the database group, but it may be provided separately from the database group or another module. It may be.
　各端末は、上記決定された数のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを確立可能である。図９の例では、上記決定された数は２つであり、各端末は２つのセッションを確立している。データ通信において、複数セッションを確立することで、１つのセッションが障害や通信状況の変化により切断した場合においても、同時に確立された他のセッションで通信の継続が可能となるため、通信継続の耐性が強くなる。また１つのセッションを新たなセッションへ切り替える時でも、同時に確立された他のセッションで通信の継続が可能となるため、データが途切れずに通信可能となる。これらにより、各端末が１つだけのセッションを確立する実施の形態１の無線通信システムよりも、信頼性を向上させることができる。 Each terminal can establish the above-determined number of MNO networks and sessions. In the example of FIG. 9, the above-determined number is two, and each terminal establishes two sessions. In data communication, by establishing multiple sessions, even if one session is disconnected due to a failure or change in communication status, communication can be continued in other sessions established at the same time, so communication continuation tolerance Becomes stronger. Further, even when one session is switched to a new session, communication can be continued in another session established at the same time, so that data can be communicated without interruption. As a result, the reliability can be improved as compared with the wireless communication system of the first embodiment in which each terminal establishes only one session.
　図９を用いて、ＭＮＯネットワーク及び通信セッションの選択、並びに、通信セッションの確立及び切り替えを説明する。 The selection of the MNO network and the communication session, and the establishment and switching of the communication session will be described with reference to FIG.
　例えば、第１事業者が、各端末の複数セッション確立による信頼性向上を重視するとともに、通信コストの低価格化を重視する契約を、ＭＶＮＯと結んでいると仮定する。具体的には、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２には、第１事業者１１０１ａによって、（１）事業者番号：１、（２）端末グループ番号：１、（３）端末グループ対象：第１－１端末、第１－２端末、第１－３端末、（４）ＭＮＯ選択ポリシー：「通信コスト最小化」、と設定されているものとする。 For example, it is assumed that the first operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes the improvement of reliability by establishing multiple sessions for each terminal and the reduction of communication costs. Specifically, in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2, according to the first operator 1101a, (1) operator number: 1, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal group target: 1st 1 terminal, 1-2 terminal, 1-3 terminal, (4) MNO selection policy: It is assumed that "communication cost minimization" is set.
　この場合、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７は、課金情報用データベースに格納されている料金プラン情報と、必要に応じてネットワークモニタデータベース及び端末モニタデータベースに格納されている「端末グループ全体の端末毎及びＭＮＯ毎の利用通信量」とに基づいて、ＭＮＯ及び通信セッションの選択を行う。これにより、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末１１０５ａａ、第１－２端末１１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末１１０５ａｃからの通信セッション要求に対して、最も通信コストが安いＭＮＯとして第１ＭＮＯが選択され、２番目に通信コストの安いＭＮＯとして第２ＭＮＯが選択されたとする。 In this case, the selection control module 1102-7 includes the charge plan information stored in the billing information database and, if necessary, the "terminals and MNOs of the entire terminal group" stored in the network monitor database and the terminal monitor database. The MNO and communication session are selected based on "the amount of communication used for each". As a result, the MNO with the lowest communication cost is the lowest in response to the communication session request from the 1-1 terminal 1105aa, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator. It is assumed that the 1MNO is selected and the 2nd MNO is selected as the MNO having the second lowest communication cost.
　この結果、図９の例では、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第１セッションとして、通信コストが最も安い第１ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第１－１基地局１１０４ａａを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ａ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１と接続される。また、第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第２セッションとして、通信コストが２番目に安い第２ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第２－１基地局１１０４ｂａを介して、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ｂ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１と接続される。これにより、第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第１事業者のシステム１１０１ａと低価格な通信を行うことが可能となる。 As a result, in the example of FIG. 9, the 1-1 terminal 1105aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is the closest first of the first MNO base stations having the lowest communication cost as the first session. -1 It is connected to the core network 1103a of the first MNO and the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO via the base station 1104aa. Further, as the second session, the 1-1 terminal 1105aa uses the second MNO core network 1103b via the nearest 2-1 base station 1104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost. , And is connected to the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO. As a result, the 1-1 terminal 1105aa can perform low-priced communication with the system 1101a of the first operator.
　同様に、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－２端末１１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末１１０５ａｃは、第１セッションとして、通信コストが最も安い第１ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ａ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１と接続される。また、第１－２端末１１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末１１０５ａｃは、第２セッションとして、通信コストが２番目に安い第２ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第２－１基地局１１０４ｂａを介して、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク１１０３ｂ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１と接続される。これにより、第１－２端末１１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末１１０５ａｃは、第１事業者のシステム１１０１ａと低価格な通信を行うことが可能となる。 Similarly, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac, which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the closest to the base station of the first MNO having the lowest communication cost as the first session. It is connected to the core network 1103a of the first MNO and the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO via the 1-2 base station 1104ab. In addition, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac use the nearest 2-1 base station 1104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost as the second session. Through, it is connected to the core network 1103b of the second MNO and the core network 1102-1 above the MVNO. As a result, the 1-2 terminal 1105ab and the 1-3 terminal 1105ac can perform low-priced communication with the system 1101a of the first operator.
　別例として、第２事業者は、特定のＭＮＯの障害発生時においても、通信を継続できる端末を残して、サービスを最大限維持できるように、通信の高信頼性を重視していると仮定する。このとき、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２には、第２事業者１１０１ｂによって「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」が設定される。具体的には、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２には、（１）事業者番号：２、（２）端末グループ番号：１、（３）端末グループ対象：第２－１端末、第２－２端末、第２－３端末、（４）ＭＮＯ選択ポリシー：「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」、と設定されているものとする。 As another example, it is assumed that the second operator attaches great importance to the high reliability of communication so that the service can be maintained as much as possible by leaving the terminal that can continue communication even in the event of a failure of a specific MNO. To do. At this time, in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2, "high reliability (distributed setting of connected MNO)" is set by the second operator 1101b. Specifically, in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2, (1) business operator number: 2, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal group target: 2-1 terminal, 2-2. Terminal, 2-3 terminals, (4) MNO selection policy: It is assumed that "high reliability (distributed setting of connected MNO)" is set.
　この場合、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２、及び、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７内のネットワークモニタデータベースに格納されている全端末の接続情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ及び通信セッションの選択を行う。これにより、第２事業者の端末グループに属する、第２－１端末１１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末１１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末１１０５ｂｃを接続している現状のＭＮＯネットワークが均一化（極力別々のＭＮＯと接続）されていない場合、これら端末に接続されるＭＮＯネットワークを均一化するようにネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えが適宜行われる。 In this case, the selection control module 1102-7 has an MNO and a communication session based on the connection information of all terminals stored in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2 and the network monitor database in the selection control module 1102-7. Make a selection. As a result, the current MNO network connecting the 2-1 terminal 1105ba, the 2-2 terminal 1105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 1105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second operator is made uniform (separate MNOs as much as possible). If not, the network and session are appropriately switched so as to equalize the MNO network connected to these terminals.
　この結果、図９の例では、第２事業者の端末グループに属する、第２－１端末１１０５ｂａは、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを、第１セッションのＭＮＯ及び第２セッションのＭＮＯとして選択し、第１セッション及び第２セッションの通信を確立する。第２事業者の端末グループに属する、第２－２端末１１０５ｂｂは、第２ＭＮＯ及び第３ＭＮＯを、第１セッションのＭＮＯ及び第２セッションのＭＮＯとして選択し、第１セッション及び第２セッションの通信を確立する。第２事業者の端末グループに属する、第２－３端末１１０５ｂｃは、第３ＭＮＯ及び第１ＭＮＯを、第１セッションのＭＮＯ及び第２セッションのＭＮＯとして選択し、第１セッション及び第２セッションの通信を確立する。 As a result, in the example of FIG. 9, the 2-1 terminal 1105ba belonging to the terminal group of the second operator selects the first MNO and the second MNO as the MNO of the first session and the MNO of the second session, and the first Establish communication for the first and second sessions. The 2-2 terminal 1105bb, which belongs to the terminal group of the second operator, selects the second MNO and the third MNO as the MNO of the first session and the MNO of the second session, and performs the communication of the first session and the second session. Establish. The 2-3 terminal 1105bc, which belongs to the terminal group of the second operator, selects the third MNO and the first MNO as the MNO of the first session and the MNO of the second session, and performs the communication of the first session and the second session. Establish.
　また、ＭＮＯ内の基地局に最も近接の基地局が選択される場合、第２－１端末１１０５ｂａは、第１ＭＮＯの基地局として第１－１基地局１１０４ａａを選択し、第２ＭＮＯの基地局として第２－１基地局１１０４ｂａを選択する。同様に、第２－２端末１１０５ｂｂは、第２ＭＮＯの基地局として第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂを選択し、第３ＭＮＯの基地局として第３－１基地局１１０４ｃａを選択する。第２－３端末１１０５ｂｃは、第３ＭＮＯの基地局として第３－２基地局１１０４ｃｂを選択し、第１ＭＮＯの基地局として第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂを選択する。これにより、第２－１端末１１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末１１０５ｂｂ、及び、第２－３端末１１０５ｂｃは、第２事業者のシステム１１０１ｂと通信障害に対して耐性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。 When the base station closest to the base station in the MNO is selected, the 2-1 terminal 1105ba selects the 1-1 base station 1104aa as the base station of the first MNO and serves as the base station of the second MNO. 2-1 Base station 1104ba is selected. Similarly, the 2-2 terminal 1105bb selects the 2-2 base station 1104bb as the base station of the 2nd MNO and the 3-1 base station 1104ca as the base station of the 3rd MNO. The 2-3 terminal 1105bc selects the 3-2 base station 1104cc as the base station of the 3rd MNO, and selects the 1-2 base station 1104ab as the base station of the 1st MNO. As a result, the 2-1 terminal 1105ba, the 2-2 terminal 1105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 1105bc can communicate with the system 1101b of the second operator with high resistance to communication failure. Become.
　以上のように、ＭＶＮＯ１１０２は、グループ通信情報を総合的に考慮することで、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対して、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適したＭＮＯの切り替え制御を行うことができる。 As described above, the MVNO 1102 performs MNO switching control suitable for the MNO selection policy for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group by comprehensively considering the group communication information. be able to.
　なお、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとしては、上記の通信コストの低価格化を重視するポリシーである「通信コスト最小化」、通信の継続を維持させる通信耐性を重視するポリシーである「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」に加えて、局所的な災害や装置障害時などへの耐性を上げるために、接続する基地局を地理的に分散させるポリシーである「高信頼化（基地局の地理的分散設定）」も有効である。 The MNO selection policy for each terminal group includes the above-mentioned policy that emphasizes the reduction of communication costs, "minimization of communication costs", and the policy that emphasizes communication endurance that maintains the continuation of communication, "high reliability". In addition to "improvement (distributed setting of connected MNO)", "high reliability (base station)" is a policy to geographically disperse connected base stations in order to increase resistance to local disasters and equipment failures. Geographically distributed setting) ”is also effective.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送速度最大」と設定することも有効である。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送速度の和が最大になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。具体的な制御として、例えば、無線通信の干渉などへの耐性を上げるために、周波数帯域が異なるＭＮＯを選択する。また、さらに、端末グループ全体について必要最低限の伝送速度を指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送速度の和を最大にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "maximum transmission speed" as the MNO selection policy. In this case, the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group is maximized by using the information read from the database group. As a specific control, for example, in order to increase the resistance to interference of wireless communication, MNOs having different frequency bands are selected. Further, it is possible to maximize the sum of the transmission speeds of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission speed for the entire terminal group.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送遅延最小」と設定するのも有効である。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送遅延の和が最小になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体について必要最低限の伝送遅延を指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送遅延の和を最小にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "minimum transmission delay" as the MNO selection policy. In this case, the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission delays of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay for the entire terminal group.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送遅延のばらつき最小」と設定するのも有効である。なお、システムの制約のため、伝送遅延時間を正確に測定できないときには、送信側で一定間隔の既知信号／既知メッセージ（ヘルスチェック等）を送信することによって、伝送遅延時間を測定すればよい。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送遅延のばらつきの和、または、ばらつきの２乗平均の和等が最小になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体について必要最低限の伝送遅延ばらつきを指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送遅延のばらつき、または、ばらつきの２乗平均の和等を最小にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "minimum variation in transmission delay" as the MNO selection policy. When the transmission delay time cannot be measured accurately due to system restrictions, the transmission delay time may be measured by transmitting a known signal / known message (health check, etc.) at regular intervals on the transmitting side. In this case, using the information read from the database group, MNO selection can be performed so that the sum of the variations in the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variations is minimized. Further, it is possible to minimize the variation of the transmission delay of the entire terminal group or the sum of the squared averages of the variation while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission delay variation for the entire terminal group.
　また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとして、例えば「伝送誤り率最小」と設定するのも有効である。この場合、データベース群から読みだした情報を用いて端末グループ全体の伝送誤り率の和が最小になるようにＭＮＯ選択を行うことができる。また、さらに、端末グループ全体が必要最低限の伝送誤り率を指定して確保しつつ、端末グループ全体の伝送誤り率の和を最小にすることができる。 It is also effective to set, for example, "minimum transmission error rate" as the MNO selection policy. In this case, the MNO can be selected so that the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group is minimized by using the information read from the database group. Further, it is possible to minimize the sum of the transmission error rates of the entire terminal group while designating and securing the minimum necessary transmission error rate for the entire terminal group.
　また、例えば上述した、「通信コスト最小化」、「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」、「伝送速度最大」、「伝送遅延最小」、「伝送誤り率最小」等の複数のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに優先度を設けて統合するのも有効である。例えば、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２に、（１）事業者番号：１、（２）端末グループ番号：１、（３）端末グループ対象：第１－１端末、第１－２端末、第１－３端末、（４）ＭＮＯ選択ポリシー：優先度１「伝送誤り率最小（必要最低伝送誤り率ＢＬＥＲ＝１０－４）」、優先度２「通信コスト最小化」、と設定してもよい。 Further, for example, a plurality of MNOs such as "minimize communication cost", "high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)", "maximum transmission speed", "minimum transmission delay", and "minimum transmission error rate" described above are selected. It is also effective to prioritize and integrate policies. For example, in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2, (1) operator number: 1, (2) terminal group number: 1, (3) terminal group target: 1-1 terminal, 1-2 terminal, first -3 terminals, (4) MNO selection policy: Priority 1 "Minimum transmission error rate (minimum required transmission error rate BLER = 10 -4 )" and Priority 2 "Minimize communication cost" may be set.
　次に、通信品質を良くするために、通信品質の良いセッションを選択するポリシーが設定された場合の例と、局所的な災害や装置障害時などへの耐性を上げるために、接続する基地局を地理的に分散させるポリシーが設定された場合の例とについて説明する。 Next, an example when a policy is set to select a session with good communication quality in order to improve communication quality, and a base station to be connected in order to increase resistance to local disasters and equipment failures. An example will be described when a policy for geographically distributing the data is set.
　図１０は、通信品質の良いセッションを選択するポリシーが設定された場合の例を説明するための図である。第１－１基地局１１０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂは、第１ＭＮＯ１１０３ａの基地局であり、第２－１基地局１１０４ｂａ及び第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂは、第２ＭＮＯ１１０３ｂの基地局であり、第３－１基地局１１０４ｃａは、第３ＭＮＯ１１０３ｃの基地局である。各基地局を中心とした円は、各基地局のセル半径を表している。 FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example when a policy for selecting a session with good communication quality is set. The 1-1 base station 1104aa and the 1-2 base station 1104ab are the base stations of the 1st MNO1103a, and the 2-1 base station 1104ba and the 2-2 base station 1104bb are the base stations of the 2nd MNO1103b. The 3-1st base station 1104ca is a base station of the 3rd MNO1103c. The circle centered on each base station represents the cell radius of each base station.
　第１－１端末１１０５ａａが、基地局及びＭＮＯを２つ選択する際に、品質の良いデータ通信ができるセッションを選択する。図１０の例では、第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂ及び第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂを選択している。 When the 1-1 terminal 1105aa selects two base stations and MNOs, it selects a session capable of high-quality data communication. In the example of FIG. 10, the 1-1 terminal 1105aa selects the 1-2 base station 1104ab and the 2-2 base station 1104bab.
　図１１は、接続する基地局を地理的に分散できるセッションを選択するポリシーが設定された場合の例を説明するための図である。第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂ及び第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂは地理的に隣接している。このため、第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂを選択するが、第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂを選択せずに、距離の離れた第３－１基地局１１０４ｃａを選択する。第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第３－１基地局１１０４ｃａのセルエッジ上に位置するため、このような選択が行われるとデータレートが低くなる可能性がある。しかしながら、第１－２基地局１１０４ａｂ及び第２－２基地局１１０４ｂｂで障害や災害が発生して、第１－１端末１１０５ａａとこれら基地局の両方との通信が切断されても、第１－１端末１１０５ａａは、第３－１基地局１１０４ｃａとの通信によって通信を継続することができる。 FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example when a policy for selecting a session in which the connected base stations can be geographically dispersed is set. The 1-2 base station 1104ab and the 2-2 base station 1104bb are geographically adjacent to each other. Therefore, the 1-1 terminal 1105aa selects the 1-2 base station 1104ab, but does not select the 2-2 base station 1104bb, but selects the 3-1 base station 1104ca which is far away. .. Since the 1-1 terminal 1105aa is located on the cell edge of the 3-1 base station 1104ca, the data rate may be low if such a selection is made. However, even if a failure or disaster occurs in the 1-2 base station 1104ab and the 2-2 base station 1104bb and the communication between the 1-1 terminal 1105aa and both of these base stations is cut off, the 1st 1-. The 1 terminal 1105aa can continue the communication by communicating with the 3-1 base station 1104ca.
　なお、複数セッションの選択は、初めてのセッション確立時に実施されてもよいし、常時監視されたグループ通信情報がセッション選択ポリシーに基づいて設定されたグループ通信情報のしきい値を超えた場合に実施されてもよいし、周期的に実施されてもよい。 The selection of multiple sessions may be performed when the first session is established, or when the constantly monitored group communication information exceeds the threshold value of the group communication information set based on the session selection policy. It may be done or it may be carried out periodically.
　なお、第１優先及び第２優先のセッションで通信を行っている場合に、第１優先のセッションのみで通信を継続しつつ、第２優先のセッションの通信を一時的に切断して、測定対象の他のセッションを確立して当該他のセッションの測定を実施してもよい。そして、測定後に、第２優先のセッションを再確立して、第１優先及び第２優先のセッションで再度通信を行ってもよい。このような場合には、第１優先のセッションで通信を継続しながら、グループ通信情報の取得のための、データ通信用に使用していないセッション（第１優先及び第２優先のセッション以外のセッション）の測定を行うことができる。 When communication is performed in the first priority session and the second priority session, the communication in the second priority session is temporarily disconnected while the communication is continued only in the first priority session, and the measurement target is measured. Other sessions may be established to carry out measurements in those other sessions. Then, after the measurement, the second priority session may be reestablished, and communication may be performed again in the first priority and second priority sessions. In such a case, while continuing communication in the first priority session, a session not used for data communication for acquiring group communication information (sessions other than the first priority and second priority sessions). ) Can be measured.
　また、第１優先及び第２優先のセッションを継続したまま、一時的に測定用に第３のセッションを確立してもよい。このような場合には、第１優先及び第２優先のセッションの両方で通信を継続しながら、データ通信用に使用していないセッションの測定を行うことができる。 Alternatively, a third session may be temporarily established for measurement while continuing the first priority and second priority sessions. In such a case, it is possible to measure a session that is not used for data communication while continuing communication in both the first priority and second priority sessions.
　＜実施の形態２の変形例１＞
　図１２及び図１３は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態２の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。具体的には、図１２及び図１３には、実施の形態２の変形例１に係る無線通信システムによる、複数のＭＮＯを選択する動作例が示されている。 <Modification 1 of Embodiment 2>
12 and 13 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the first modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 12 and 13 show an operation example of selecting a plurality of MNOs by the wireless communication system according to the first modification of the second embodiment.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１３０１にて、ＭＶＮＯに対して、自己の端末グループの端末の登録と、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの設定とを行う。このステップＳ１３０１の端末の登録において、ＭＮＯ毎の接続費用に関する情報が設定されてもよい。以下、ＭＶＮＯに登録済みの端末が、ＭＶＮＯネットワークにアクセスし、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯとセッションを確立するまでの例を説明する。 In step S1301, the business operator registers the terminals of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO. In the registration of the terminal in step S1301, information regarding the connection cost for each MNO may be set. Hereinafter, an example in which a terminal registered in the MVNO accesses the MVNO network and establishes a session with the first MNO and the second MNO will be described.
　端末は、ステップＳ１３０２にて、第１ＭＮＯに対して、ＭＶＮＯへの接続要求を送信する。このときの送信対象となるＭＮＯは、優先度リストに予め設定された接続順で選択されてもよいし、電波強度の高い順に選択されてもよいし、前回に最後に接続したＭＮＯであってもよいし、地理的に端末に近いＭＮＯであってもよい。第１ＭＮＯは、ステップＳ１３０３にて、端末からの接続要求を受け入れることを示す接続応答を、端末に対して送信する。 In step S1302, the terminal transmits a connection request to the MVNO to the first MNO. The MNO to be transmitted at this time may be selected in the connection order preset in the priority list, may be selected in descending order of radio field strength, or may be the last MNO connected last time. It may be an MNO that is geographically close to the terminal. In step S1303, the first MNO transmits a connection response indicating that the connection request from the terminal is accepted to the terminal.
　端末が、ステップＳ１３０３にて第１ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信すると、無線の接続経路が確立する。端末は、ステップＳ１３０４にて第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに認証要求を送信し、ＭＶＮＯが、ステップＳ１３０５にて第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に認証応答を送信することで、端末とＭＶＮＯとの間で認証処理が行われる。 When the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S1303, the wireless connection path is established. The terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S1304, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1305 to authenticate between the terminal and the MVNO. Processing is done.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１３０６にて、データ送信指示をＭＶＮＯに送信し、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１３０７にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末にデータを送信する。端末は、送信されたデータを端末接続装置に送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１３０８にてデータを受信したことを示すデータ受信応答を、第１ＭＮＯ及びＭＶＮＯを介して事業者に送信する。 The business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1306, and the MVNO transmits data to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1307. The terminal transmits the transmitted data to the terminal connection device. The terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data has been received in step S1308 to the operator via the first MNO and the MVNO.
　端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適したＭＮＯの選択を行うためのグループ通信情報をＭＶＮＯに集めるため、ステップＳ１３０９～ステップＳ１３１１の処理が行われる。 The processes of steps S1309 to S1311 are performed in order to collect the group communication information for selecting the MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group in the MVNO.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１３０９にて、ネットワーク管理情報として、ＭＮＯのメンテナンス予定情報、端末接続装置の要所情報などを、ＭＶＮＯに対して通知する。ここで、要所情報は、例えば、インフラ装置の基幹制御情報などの重要なデータ通信するための端末などの装置において、複数セッションが必須であったり、信頼性を最優先にすべきであったりすることを示す情報である。 In step S1309, the business operator notifies the MVNO of the maintenance schedule information of the MNO, the important point information of the terminal connection device, etc. as the network management information. Here, as for the key information, for example, in a device such as a terminal for important data communication such as core control information of an infrastructure device, a plurality of sessions are indispensable, or reliability should be given top priority. It is information indicating to do.
　第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯのそれぞれは、ステップＳ１３１０にて、ネットワーク管理情報として、例えば、通信負荷情報、通信回線品質、障害情報、各ＭＮＯへの端末接続情報などをＭＶＮＯに通知する。端末は、ステップＳ１３１１にて、ネットワーク管理情報として、例えば、通信回線品質や通信回線の障害情報をＭＶＮＯに通知する。 In step S1310, each of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO notifies the MVNO of, for example, communication load information, communication line quality, failure information, terminal connection information to each MNO, and the like as network management information. In step S1311, the terminal notifies the MVNO of, for example, communication line quality and communication line failure information as network management information.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１３２０にて、指定の端末のセッションを２重化する指示を、ＭＶＮＯに送信する。つまり、ＭＮＯの追加指示が行われる。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１３２１にて、グループ通信情報と端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとに基づいて、当該端末との通信に適切なＭＮＯを選択する。以下、適切なＭＮＯは、第２ＭＮＯであるものとして説明する。 In step S1320, the business operator sends an instruction to duplicate the session of the designated terminal to the MVNO. That is, the additional instruction of the MNO is given. In step S1321, the MVNO selects an appropriate MNO for communication with the terminal based on the group communication information and the MNO selection policy for each terminal group. Hereinafter, the appropriate MNO will be described as being the second MNO.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１３２２にて、通信セッションの確立できている第１ＭＮＯを介して、端末にＭＮＯを追加する指示を、当該端末に送信する。この例では、指示によって端末に追加されるＭＮＯは、ステップＳ１３２１で選択された第２ＭＮＯである。端末は、ステップＳ１３２３にて、指定されたＭＮＯ（第２ＭＮＯ）に対して接続要求を行い、ステップＳ１３２４にて、第２ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信する。その後、端末は、ステップＳ１３２５にて、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、認証要求を送信し、ステップＳ１３２６にて、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯからの認証応答を受信することで、第２ＭＮＯを介した端末とＭＶＮＯとのセッションが確立される。 In step S1322, the MVNO transmits an instruction to add the MNO to the terminal via the first MNO for which the communication session has been established. In this example, the MNO added to the terminal by instruction is the second MNO selected in step S1321. The terminal makes a connection request to the designated MNO (second MNO) in step S1323, and receives a connection response from the second MNO in step S1324. After that, in step S1325, the terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the second MNO, and in step S1326, the terminal receives an authentication response from the MVNO via the second MNO, thereby passing through the second MNO. A session between the terminal and the MVNO is established.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１３２７にて、データ送信指示をＭＶＮＯに送信し、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１３２８にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを介して端末に、データを送信する。端末は、送信されたデータを端末接続装置に送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１３２９にてデータを受信したことを示すデータ受信応答を、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに対して送信する。 The business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1327, and the MVNO transmits data to the terminal via the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1328. The terminal transmits the transmitted data to the terminal connection device. The terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data has been received in step S1329 to the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO.
　ステップＳ１３３０にて、第１ＭＮＯを介した事業者と端末接続装置との間のデータ送受信が実施され、ステップＳ１３３１にて、第２ＭＮＯを介した事業者と端末接続装置との間のデータ送受信が実施される。 In step S1330, data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the first MNO, and in step S1331, data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the second MNO. Will be done.
　以上により、事業者装置と端末接続装置との間で複数の通信セッションが確立でき、１つの通信セッションに障害が発生した場合においても、別の通信セッションを介して、通信を継続することが可能となる。 As described above, a plurality of communication sessions can be established between the operator device and the terminal connection device, and even if one communication session fails, communication can be continued via another communication session. It becomes.
　＜実施の形態２の変形例２＞
　図１４及び図１５は、複数ＭＮＯのネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態２の変形例２に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。具体的には、図１４及び図１５には、実施の形態２の変形例２に係る無線通信システムによる、複数のＭＮＯ選択後に、ＭＮＯの変更を行う動作例が示されている。 <Modification 2 of Embodiment 2>
14 and 15 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a network of a plurality of MNOs. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 14 and 15 show an operation example in which the MNO is changed after a plurality of MNOs are selected by the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the second embodiment.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１６０１及びステップＳ１６０２にて、２つの通信セッション、具体的には第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯの通信セッションを確立している。以下、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに基づいて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯの通信セッション確立状態から、第２ＭＮＯ及び第３ＭＮＯの通信セッション確立状態に変更するまでの例を説明する。 The business operator has established two communication sessions, specifically, communication sessions of the first MNO and the second MNO in steps S1601 and S1602. Hereinafter, an example of changing from the communication session establishment state of the first MNO and the second MNO to the communication session establishment state of the second MNO and the third MNO based on the MNO selection policy will be described.
　ステップＳ１６１０、ステップＳ１６１１及びステップＳ１６１２にて、図１２のステップＳ１３０９、ステップＳ１３１０及びステップＳ１３１１と同じ処理が行われる。これにより、事業者装置、各ＭＮＯ、各端末接続装置から、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適したＭＮＯの選択を行うためのグループ通信情報などがＭＶＮＯに集められる。 In step S1610, step S1611 and step S1612, the same processing as in step S1309, step S1310 and step S1311 in FIG. 12 is performed. As a result, group communication information for selecting an MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is collected in the MVNO from the operator device, each MNO, and each terminal connection device.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１６２０にて、グループ通信情報と端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとに基づいて、端末に適切なＭＮＯのセットを選択する。以下、適切なＭＮＯのセットとして、第２ＭＮＯ及び第３ＭＮＯが選択されたものとして説明する。この場合、以下で説明するステップＳ１６２１以降の処理において、端末と第１ＭＮＯとの通信セッションから、端末と第３ＭＮＯとの通信セッションに変更されることになる。なお、ステップＳ１６２０のＭＮＯ選択処理は周期的に行われてもよいし、ネットワーク管理情報の更新毎に行われてもよいし、事業者装置からのメッセージや端末接続装置からの指示をトリガーとして行われてもよい。 In step S1620, the MVNO selects an appropriate set of MNOs for the terminal based on the group communication information and the MNO selection policy for each terminal group. Hereinafter, it is assumed that the second MNO and the third MNO are selected as an appropriate set of MNOs. In this case, in the processing after step S1621 described below, the communication session between the terminal and the first MNO is changed to the communication session between the terminal and the third MNO. The MNO selection process in step S1620 may be performed periodically or every time the network management information is updated, and may be triggered by a message from the operator's device or an instruction from the terminal connection device. You may be broken.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１６２１にて、端末の通信セッションを第１ＭＮＯから第３ＭＮＯに変更するためのＭＮＯ変更指示を、当該端末に送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、この指示に用いられるメッセージを、第１ＭＮＯだけを介して送信してもよいし、第２ＭＮＯだけを介して送信してもよいし、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯの両方を介して送信してもよい。第１ＭＮＯだけを介して送信する場合には、メッセージから変更元のＭＮＯの情報を減らすことによりメッセージ量を減らせるメリットがある。第２ＭＮＯだけを介して送信する場合には、第１ＭＮＯより通信品質を良くすることができたり、通信コストを安くすることができたりするなどのメリットがある。第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯの両方を介して送信する場合には、障害などに強いメッセージの送信により信頼性を上げることができるメリットがある。 In step S1621, the MVNO transmits an MNO change instruction for changing the communication session of the terminal from the first MNO to the third MNO to the terminal. The MVNO may transmit the message used for this instruction only via the first MNO, may be transmitted only through the second MNO, or may be transmitted via both the first MNO and the second MNO. May be good. When transmitting via only the first MNO, there is an advantage that the amount of messages can be reduced by reducing the information of the MNO of the change source from the message. When transmitting via only the second MNO, there are merits such as better communication quality than the first MNO and lower communication cost. When transmitting via both the first MNO and the second MNO, there is an advantage that reliability can be improved by transmitting a message that is resistant to failures and the like.
　端末は、ステップＳ１６２２にて、ＭＮＯの変更の可否を示すためのＭＮＯ変更応答を、ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに応答する。ＭＮＯ変更が可能である場合、必要に応じて、切り替え元のＭＮＯ（ここでは第１ＭＮＯ）は、ステップＳ１６２３にて、端末のＭＮＯの切り替え情報を切り替え先のＭＮＯ（ここでは第３ＭＮＯ）に通知する。端末のＭＮＯの切り替え情報には、例えば、切り替えタイミング、端末の位置情報、負荷状況など、通信セッション確立に役立つ情報が含まれる。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１６２４にて、端末との通信セッションの解除を示す第１ＭＮＯ解除指示を第１ＭＮＯに送信し、第１ＭＮＯは、第１ＭＮＯ解除指示を端末に送信する。 In step S1622, the terminal responds to the MVNO via the MNO with an MNO change response for indicating whether or not the MNO can be changed. When the MNO can be changed, the switching source MNO (here, the first MNO) notifies the switching destination MNO (here, the third MNO) of the switching information of the terminal MNO in step S1623, if necessary. .. The MNO switching information of the terminal includes information useful for establishing a communication session, such as switching timing, terminal position information, and load status. In step S1624, the MVNO transmits a first MNO release instruction indicating cancellation of the communication session with the terminal to the first MNO, and the first MNO transmits the first MNO release instruction to the terminal.
　端末は、ステップＳ１６２５にて、ｅＳＩＭ変更等のＭＮＯの切り替え準備を行う。その後、端末は、ステップＳ１６２６にて、切り替え先のＭＮＯ（第３ＭＮＯ）に接続要求を送信し、切り替え先のＭＮＯ（第３ＭＮＯ）は、ステップＳ１６２７にて、端末に接続応答を送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１６２８にて第３ＭＮＯに、第１ＭＮＯとの通信セッションが解除完了したことを示す第１ＭＮＯ解除応答を送信し、第３ＭＮＯは、ＭＶＮＯへ第１ＭＮＯ解除応答を送信する。必要に応じて、第３ＭＮＯは、ステップＳ１６２９にて、第１ＭＮＯに切り替え情報を送信してもよい。このメッセージにより、第１ＭＮＯは端末との通信セッションが完全に解除されたことを知ることができ、端末の情報を削除することなどが可能となる。なお、ステップＳ１６２９の切り替え情報の送信は、ステップＳ１６２４の解除指示の送信によって代替することも可能であり、必須ではない。 The terminal prepares for switching the MNO such as changing the eSIM in step S1625. After that, the terminal transmits a connection request to the switching destination MNO (third MNO) in step S1626, and the switching destination MNO (third MNO) transmits a connection response to the terminal in step S1627. In step S1628, the terminal transmits the first MNO release response indicating that the communication session with the first MNO has been canceled to the third MNO, and the third MNO transmits the first MNO release response to the MVNO. If necessary, the third MNO may transmit switching information to the first MNO in step S1629. From this message, the first MNO can know that the communication session with the terminal has been completely canceled, and can delete the information of the terminal and the like. The transmission of the switching information in step S1629 can be replaced by the transmission of the release instruction in step S1624, and is not essential.
　端末は、ステップＳ１６３０にて、第３ＭＮＯを介して、ＭＶＮＯに対して認証要求を送信し、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１６３１にて、第３ＭＮＯを介して端末に、認証応答を送信する。 The terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the third MNO in step S1630, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the third MNO in step S1631.
　事業者は、認証確立後、ステップＳ１６３２にて、データ送信指示をＭＶＮＯに送信し、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１６３３にて、第３ＭＮＯを介して端末に、データを送信する。端末は、送信されたデータを端末接続装置に送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１６３４にてデータを受信したことを示すデータ受信応答を、第３ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに送信する。 After the authentication is established, the business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1632, and the MVNO transmits data to the terminal via the third MNO in step S1633. The terminal transmits the transmitted data to the terminal connection device. The terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data has been received in step S1634 to the MVNO via the third MNO.
　ステップＳ１６４０にて、第２ＭＮＯを介した事業者と端末接続装置との間のデータ送受信が実施され、ステップＳ１６４１にて、第３ＭＮＯを介した事業者と端末接続装置との間のデータ送受信が実施される。以上により、事業者装置と端末接続装置との間で複数の通信セッションが確立する。 In step S1640, data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the second MNO, and in step S1641, data transmission / reception between the business operator and the terminal connection device is performed via the third MNO. Will be done. As described above, a plurality of communication sessions are established between the operator device and the terminal connection device.
　なお、上記シーケンスでは、切り替え元の第１ＭＮＯを解除後、切り替え先の第３ＭＮＯを追加する動作であったが、切り替え先の第３ＭＮＯを追加後、切り替え元の第１ＭＮＯを解除する動作もある。前者は、同時に確立される通信セッション数を２つに抑えることができ、端末装置の簡易化にもつながる。一方、後者は、切り替え時も常時２つ以上の通信セッションを維持することができるため、より信頼性の高い通信を維持することが可能となる。 In the above sequence, the operation of adding the third MNO of the switching destination after releasing the first MNO of the switching source is performed, but there is also an operation of releasing the first MNO of the switching source after adding the third MNO of the switching destination. In the former case, the number of communication sessions established at the same time can be suppressed to two, which leads to simplification of the terminal device. On the other hand, the latter can maintain two or more communication sessions at all times even during switching, so that more reliable communication can be maintained.
　＜実施の形態２の変形例３＞
　図１６～図１９は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態２の変形例３に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。具体的には、図１６～図１９には、複数のＭＮＯとのセッション確立後に、データを複製し、複数セッションにて同一データを送受信する動作例が示されている。このような動作を行う構成によれば、ネットワーク障害に対する耐性を高めることが可能となる。 <Modification 3 of Embodiment 2>
16 to 19 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the third modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 16 to 19 show an operation example in which data is duplicated after a session is established with a plurality of MNOs, and the same data is transmitted / received in the plurality of sessions. According to the configuration that performs such an operation, it is possible to increase the resistance to network failure.
　事業者は、ステップＳ１４０１にて、ＭＶＮＯに対して、自己の端末グループの端末の登録と、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの設定とを行う。 In step S1401, the business operator registers the terminal of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO.
　端末は、ステップＳ１４０２にて、第１ＭＮＯに対して、ＭＶＮＯへの接続要求を送信し、ステップＳ１４０３にて、第１ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信する。端末は、ステップＳ１４０４にて、第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、認証要求を送信し、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４０５にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に、認証応答を送信することで、端末は、第１ＭＮＯと通信セッションを確立する。 The terminal transmits a connection request to the MVNO to the first MNO in step S1402, and receives a connection response from the first MNO in step S1403. The terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S1404, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1405. Establish a communication session with the 1MNO.
　同様に、ステップＳ１４０６、ステップＳ１４０７、ステップＳ１４０８、及び、ステップＳ１４０９にて、第２ＭＮＯに関して、ステップＳ１４０２、ステップＳ１４０３、ステップＳ１４０４、及び、ステップＳ１４０５の処理を行うことにより、端末は、第２ＭＮＯと通信セッションを確立する。以上により、端末は、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを介して、ＭＶＮＯとの間で２つの通信セッションを確立したことになる。以下、複数セッションにて同一データを送受信する例を説明する。 Similarly, in step S1406, step S1407, step S1408, and step S1409, the terminal communicates with the second MNO by performing the processes of step S1402, step S1403, step S1404, and step S1405 with respect to the second MNO. Establish a session. As described above, the terminal has established two communication sessions with the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO. Hereinafter, an example of transmitting and receiving the same data in a plurality of sessions will be described.
　まず、通常時の処理の例を説明する。事業者は、ステップＳ１４２０にて、データ送信指示をＭＶＮＯに送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４２１にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのそれぞれの通信セッションにて同一データを送信するためにデータを複製するデータ複製処理を行う。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４２２にて、第１ＭＮＯに複製データを送信し、第１ＭＮＯは、端末に当該複製データを送信する。同様に、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４２３にて、第２ＭＮＯに複製データを送信し、第２ＭＮＯは、端末に当該複製データを送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１４２４にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯから受信した同一データ（複製データ）を選択して、ステップＳ１４２５にて選択されたデータを端末接続装置に送信する。 First, an example of normal processing will be explained. The business operator transmits the data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1420. In step S1421, the MVNO performs a data duplication process for duplicating data in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO. The MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the first MNO in step S1422, and the first MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal. Similarly, the MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the second MNO in step S1423, and the second MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal. The terminal selects the same data (replica data) received from the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1424, and transmits the data selected in step S1425 to the terminal connection device.
　ここで、上述したステップＳ１４２１のデータ複製処理について詳細に説明する。データ複製処理としては、送信データを単純に複製してもよいし、複製したデータに、データを複製していることを示すフラグ（以下「データ複製フラグ」と記すこともある）、データの複製数を示す情報（以下「データ複製数情報」と記すこともある）、データの送信順番を示すシーケンス番号（以下「データ送信シーケンス番号」と記すこともある）、データの送信タイミングを示すタイムスタンプ（以下「データ送信タイミング」と記すこともある）の少なくともいずれか１つを付加してもよい。 Here, the data duplication process in step S1421 described above will be described in detail. As the data duplication process, the transmitted data may be simply duplicated, a flag indicating that the data is duplicated (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "data duplication flag"), and data duplication to the duplicated data. Information indicating the number (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "data replication number information"), sequence number indicating the order of data transmission (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "data transmission sequence number"), time stamp indicating data transmission timing (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "data transmission timing"), at least one of them may be added.
　データ複製フラグを付与した場合、ＭＶＮＯの処理タイミングで複製処理を開始しても、ステップＳ１４２４のデータ選択処理の際に、端末は、どのデータが複製されているのかを判断できる。このため、事前の複製処理タイミングの通知などが不要となるメリットがある。 When the data duplication flag is given, even if the duplication process is started at the MVNO processing timing, the terminal can determine which data is being duplicated during the data selection process in step S1424. Therefore, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to notify the duplication processing timing in advance.
　データ複製数情報を付与した場合、ステップＳ１４２４のデータ選択処理の際に、端末は、同一データの受信数を予め判断できる。このため、データ選択及び廃棄処理などによるメモリ管理の簡易化ができたり、データの到達順序やタイミング管理の簡易化ができたりするなどのメリットがある。 When the data duplication number information is given, the terminal can determine in advance the number of receptions of the same data at the time of the data selection process in step S1424. Therefore, there are merits such as simplification of memory management by data selection and disposal processing, and simplification of data arrival order and timing management.
　データ送信シーケンス番号を付与した場合、ステップＳ１４２４のデータ選択処理の際に、端末は、同一データの判断の簡易化ができたり、シーケンス番号に基づいて受信済みのシーケンス番号よりも前のデータを廃棄するなどのデータの廃棄処理の簡易化ができたりするメリットがある。 When a data transmission sequence number is assigned, the terminal can simplify the determination of the same data or discard the data before the received sequence number based on the sequence number during the data selection process in step S1424. There is a merit that the data disposal process can be simplified.
　データ送信タイミングを付与した場合、ステップＳ１４２４のデータ選択処理の際に、端末は、各ＭＮＯの通信セッションでのデータ到達の遅延時間等が測定できるため、各ＭＮＯの通信トラフィック状況や、障害発生の予兆判断などができるメリットがある。なお、図１６～図１９の例では、ステップＳ１４２１のデータ複製処理は、ＭＶＮＯで行われるが、この代わりに、事業者から指定したＭＮＯの通信セッションに、２つの同一データが送信されればよい。 When the data transmission timing is given, the terminal can measure the delay time of data arrival in the communication session of each MNO at the time of the data selection process in step S1424, so that the communication traffic status of each MNO and the occurrence of a failure occur. There is a merit that you can make a predictive judgment. In the example of FIGS. 16 to 19, the data duplication process in step S1421 is performed by the MVNO, but instead, two identical data may be transmitted to the communication session of the MNO designated by the operator. ..
　次に、ステップＳ１４２４にて、端末が複数データからデータを選択するデータ選択処理の例を説明する。データ選択処理としては、例えば、（１）一番早く受信したデータを選択し、その後に受信したデータを廃棄する処理、（２）品質測定等に基づいて、優先順位の高いＭＮＯから受信したデータを原則として選択し、ある一定以上の時間が経っても、当該ＭＮＯからデータが受信できなかった場合に、優先順位の低い他のＭＮＯから受信したデータを選択する処理、（３）ある一定時間内に受信した全てのＭＮＯからのデータを比較し、少なくとも２つ以上で同じデータを受信した場合に当該データとして選択する処理、などが採用されてもよい。 Next, in step S1424, an example of data selection processing in which the terminal selects data from a plurality of data will be described. The data selection process includes, for example, (1) the process of selecting the earliest received data and then discarding the received data, (2) the data received from the high-priority MNO based on quality measurement and the like. In principle, if data cannot be received from the MNO even after a certain period of time, the process of selecting the data received from another MNO with a lower priority, (3) for a certain period of time A process of comparing the data from all the received MNOs and selecting the same data when at least two or more of the same data are received may be adopted.
　一番早く受信したデータを選択する（１）の場合、端末接続装置にベストエフォートの速度でデータを送信することができるメリットがある。優先順位の高いＭＮＯのデータを原則として選択する（２）の場合、データ毎に端末内のデータ送受信経路を必要以上に変更することなく、処理を簡易化できるメリットなどがある。少なくとも２つ以上で同じデータを受信した場合に当該データとして選択する（３）の場合、データの改ざん等の判断が可能となり、信頼性の高いデータ送受信を実現できるメリットがある。なお、図１６～図１９の例では、ステップＳ１４２４のデータ選択処理は、端末で行われるが、この代わりに、端末接続装置へ２つの同一データが送信されることによって端末接続装置で行われてもよい。 In the case of (1), which selects the data received earliest, there is an advantage that the data can be transmitted to the terminal connection device at the best effort speed. In the case of (2) in which the data of the MNO having a high priority is selected in principle, there is an advantage that the processing can be simplified without changing the data transmission / reception route in the terminal for each data more than necessary. In the case of (3), which is selected as the data when the same data is received by at least two or more, it is possible to determine whether the data has been tampered with, and there is an advantage that highly reliable data transmission / reception can be realized. In the example of FIGS. 16 to 19, the data selection process in step S1424 is performed by the terminal, but instead, the same data is transmitted to the terminal connection device so that the terminal connection device performs the data selection process. May be good.
　端末は、ステップＳ１４２６にて、第１ＭＮＯからのデータを受信したことを示すデータ受信応答を、第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに送信する。同様に、端末は、ステップＳ１４２７にて、第２ＭＮＯからのデータを受信したことを示すデータ受信応答を、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに送信する。 In step S1426, the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data from the first MNO has been received to the MVNO via the first MNO. Similarly, in step S1427, the terminal transmits a data reception response indicating that the data from the second MNO has been received to the MVNO via the second MNO.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４２８にて、各ＭＮＯからのデータ受信応答の受信結果に基づいて、データの再送や、各ＭＮＯの通信セッションの品質解析などを含むデータ受信応答処理を行う。データの再送処理では、ステップＳ１４２１からステップＳ１４２７の処理を繰り返すことになる。なお、ステップＳ１４２６からステップＳ１４２８までの処理は、必ずしも全てが必要なものではない。例えば、ステップＳ１４２８のデータ応答処理の品質解析を、ステップＳ１４２４の端末のデータ選択処理で行い、その結果を、ステップＳ１４２６やステップＳ１４２７で、ＭＶＮＯへ通知してもよい。 In step S1428, the MVNO performs data reception response processing including data retransmission and quality analysis of the communication session of each MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO. In the data retransmission process, the processes from step S1421 to step S1427 are repeated. It should be noted that the processes from step S1426 to step S1428 are not necessarily all necessary. For example, the quality analysis of the data response process in step S1428 may be performed in the data selection process of the terminal in step S1424, and the result may be notified to the MVNO in step S1426 or step S1427.
　また、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのデータ受信応答を、第１ＭＮＯまたは第２ＭＮＯの通信セッションのいずれかだけでまとめてＭＶＮＯに通知することで、データ量を減らしてもよい。また、データ受信応答としては、例えば、データ受信のＡＣＫ（ACKnowlegement）／ＮＡＣＫ（Negative ACKnowlegement）を用いてもよい。また、データ受信応答に、データのシーケンス番号や、ＭＮＯ及びセッションを識別する情報、受信タイミング情報、などを付与してもよい。 Further, the amount of data may be reduced by collectively notifying the MVNO of the data reception response of the first MNO and the second MNO only in the communication session of the first MNO or the second MNO. Further, as the data reception response, for example, ACK (ACKnowlegement) / NACK (Negative ACKnowlegement) of data reception may be used. Further, the data reception response may be provided with a data sequence number, MNO and session identification information, reception timing information, and the like.
　以下、ステップＳ１４３０からステップＳ１４３８において、端末接続装置からデータを送信する例を説明する。端末接続装置は、ステップＳ１４３０にて、端末にデータ送信指示を送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１４３１にて、多重化するＭＮＯと同じ数だけデータを複製する。ステップＳ１４３１におけるデータの複製処理は、ステップＳ１４２１と同様に、複製したデータに、データ複製フラグ、データ複製数情報、データ送信シーケンス番号、データ送信タイミングなどを付与してもよい。 Hereinafter, in steps S1430 to S1438, an example of transmitting data from the terminal connection device will be described. The terminal connection device transmits a data transmission instruction to the terminal in step S1430. In step S1431, the terminal replicates the same number of data as the MNO to be multiplexed. In the data duplication process in step S1431, the duplicated data may be given a data duplication flag, data duplication number information, data transmission sequence number, data transmission timing, and the like, as in step S1421.
　端末は、ステップＳ１４３２にて、第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、データを送信する。同様に、端末は、ステップＳ１４３３にて、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、データを送信する。 The terminal transmits data to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S1432. Similarly, in step S1433, the terminal transmits data to the MVNO via the second MNO.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４３４にてデータ選択処理を行う。その後、ステップＳ１４３５にて、ＭＶＮＯは選択したデータを事業者へ送信する。ステップＳ１４３５におけるデータ選択処理として、ステップＳ１４２４と同様に、例えば、一番早く受信したデータの選択、優先順位の高いＭＮＯのデータの選択、少なくとも２つ以上で同じデータを受信した場合の当該データの選択、などが行われる。 The MVNO performs the data selection process in step S1434. Then, in step S1435, the MVNO transmits the selected data to the operator. As the data selection process in step S1435, as in step S1424, for example, the selection of the earliest received data, the selection of the data of the MNO having the highest priority, and the case where the same data is received by at least two or more of the data. Selection, etc. are made.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４３６にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末にデータ受信応答を送信する。同様に、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４３７にて、第２ＭＮＯを介して端末にデータ受信応答を送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１４３８にて、各ＭＮＯからのデータ受信応答の受信結果に基づいて、データの再送や、各ＭＮＯの通信セッションの品質解析などを含むデータ受信応答処理を行う。 The MVNO transmits a data reception response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S1436. Similarly, in step S1437, the MVNO transmits a data reception response to the terminal via the second MNO. In step S1438, the terminal performs data reception response processing including data retransmission and quality analysis of the communication session of each MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
　次に、ＭＮＯに障害が発生した場合の処理の例を説明する。事業者は、ステップＳ１４４０にて、ＭＶＮＯにデータ送信指示を送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４４１にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのそれぞれの通信セッションにて同一データを送信するためにデータ複製処理を行う。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４４２にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に、複製データを送信しようとする。しかしながら、図１６～図１９の例では、ステップＳ１４４３に示すように第１ＭＮＯで障害発生、または、第１ＭＮＯと端末間の通信品質の悪化などにより、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは第１ＭＮＯから端末に届かない状況である。一方、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは、ステップＳ１４４４にて、第２ＭＮＯから端末に届くことになる。 Next, an example of processing when a failure occurs in the MNO will be described. The business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1440. In step S1441, the MVNO performs a data duplication process in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO. In step S1442, the MVNO attempts to transmit duplicate data to the terminal via the first MNO. However, in the examples of FIGS. 16 to 19, the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal from the first MNO due to a failure in the first MNO or deterioration of the communication quality between the first MNO and the terminal as shown in step S1443. The situation. On the other hand, the data from the MVNO arrives at the terminal from the second MNO in step S1444.
　ステップＳ１４４２及びステップＳ１４４３の処理、または、ステップＳ１４４４の処理と並行して、ステップＳ１４５１にて第１ＭＮＯのデータ受信応答の受信を判断するための受信タイマーを開始する。 In parallel with the processing of step S1442 and step S1443 or the processing of step S1444, the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is started in step S1451.
　また、ステップＳ１４４２及びステップＳ１４４３の処理、または、ステップＳ１４４４の処理と並行して、ステップＳ１４４５にて第１ＭＮＯのデータの受信を判断するための受信タイマーを開始する。端末は、ステップＳ１４４６にてデータ選択処理を行い、ステップＳ１４４７にて端末接続装置に、選択されたデータを送信する。ステップＳ１４４６におけるデータ選択処理として、ステップＳ１４２４と同様に、例えば、一番早く受信したデータの選択、優先順位の高いＭＮＯのデータの選択、少なくとも２つ以上で同じデータを受信した場合の当該データの選択、などが行われる。以下、これらの選択について具体的に説明する。 Further, in parallel with the processing of step S1442 and step S1443 or the processing of step S1444, the reception timer for determining the reception of the data of the first MNO is started in step S1445. The terminal performs the data selection process in step S1446, and transmits the selected data to the terminal connection device in step S1447. As the data selection process in step S1446, as in step S1424, for example, the selection of the earliest received data, the selection of the data of the MNO having the highest priority, and the case where the same data is received by at least two or more of the data. Selection, etc. are made. Hereinafter, these selections will be specifically described.
　一番早く受信したデータの選択が行われる場合には、端末は、第２ＭＮＯからのデータを受信できるため、第２ＭＮＯのデータを端末接続装置に送信する。 When the earliest received data is selected, the terminal can receive the data from the second MNO, so that the data of the second MNO is transmitted to the terminal connection device.
　優先順位の高いＭＮＯのデータの選択が行われ、かつ、第１ＭＮＯが第１優先ＭＮＯである場合には、端末は、第２ＭＮＯからのデータを受信しても、ステップＳ１４４５の受信タイマーが満了するまで、第１ＭＮＯからのデータの受信を待つ。当該受信タイマーが満了しても、端末は、第１ＭＮＯからのデータを受信できなかった場合に、第２優先ＭＮＯである第２ＭＮＯからのデータを選択して、端末接続装置に送信する。 When the data of the MNO having the higher priority is selected and the first MNO is the first priority MNO, the reception timer in step S1445 expires even if the terminal receives the data from the second MNO. Wait until the data is received from the first MNO. Even if the reception timer expires, if the terminal cannot receive the data from the first MNO, it selects the data from the second MNO, which is the second priority MNO, and transmits it to the terminal connection device.
　少なくとも２つ以上で同じデータを受信した場合の当該データの選択が行われる場合には、図１６～図１９の例では、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのデータが端末で受信されることが必須となる。このため、端末が、第１ＭＮＯからのデータを受信できなかった時点で、信頼するデータが受信できなかったと判断し、当該データを廃棄する。しかしながら、通常、端末は、第３ＭＮＯなどの他のＭＮＯとも通信セッションを確立している。このため、端末は、第１ＭＮＯのデータを受信しなくても、第２ＭＮＯ及び第３ＭＮＯのデータを受信した場合には、信頼するデータの受信があったと判断し、端末接続装置に当該データを送信すればよい。 When the data is selected when at least two or more of the same data are received, it is essential that the data of the first MNO and the second MNO are received by the terminal in the examples of FIGS. 16 to 19. .. Therefore, when the terminal cannot receive the data from the first MNO, it determines that the reliable data could not be received and discards the data. However, the terminal usually establishes a communication session with another MNO such as the third MNO. Therefore, even if the terminal does not receive the data of the first MNO, when it receives the data of the second MNO and the third MNO, it determines that the reliable data has been received and transmits the data to the terminal connection device. do it.
　端末は、ステップＳ１４４８にて、第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯにデータ受信応答を送信しようとするが、図１６～図１９の例では、ステップＳ１４４９に示すように第１ＭＮＯの障害などにより、端末からのデータは第１ＭＮＯからＭＶＮＯに届かない状況である。一方、端末からのデータ受信応答は、ステップＳ１４５０にて、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに届くことになる。なお、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのデータ受信応答を、第１ＭＮＯまたは第２ＭＮＯの通信セッションのいずれかだけでまとめてＭＶＮＯに通知することで、データ量を減らしてもよい。 In step S1448, the terminal attempts to transmit a data reception response to the MVNO via the first MNO, but in the examples of FIGS. 16 to 19, as shown in step S1449, due to a failure of the first MNO or the like, the terminal is sent from the terminal. The data does not reach the MVNO from the first MNO. On the other hand, the data reception response from the terminal reaches the MVNO via the second MNO in step S1450. The amount of data may be reduced by collectively notifying the MVNO of the data reception response of the first MNO and the second MNO only in the communication session of the first MNO or the second MNO.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４５２にて、各ＭＮＯからのデータ受信応答の受信結果に基づいて、各ＭＮＯに障害が発生しているか否かを判断する。 In step S1452, the MVNO determines whether or not each MNO has a failure based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO.
　例えば、ステップＳ１４４３及びステップＳ１４４９の障害があり、かつ、端末が、ステップＳ１４４８にて、第１ＭＮＯのＮＡＣＫ情報のみを送信する場合には、ステップＳ１４５１にて、第１ＭＮＯのデータ受信応答の受信を判断するための受信タイマーが満了する。このため、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４５２にて、第１ＭＮＯになんらかの障害が発生していることが判断できる。 For example, if there is a failure in step S1443 and step S1449 and the terminal transmits only the NACK information of the first MNO in step S1448, the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is determined in step S1451. The receive timer to do so expires. Therefore, the MVNO can determine in step S1452 that some kind of failure has occurred in the first MNO.
　また例えば、ステップＳ１４４３及びステップＳ１４４９のような障害があり、かつ、端末が、ステップＳ１４５０にて、第２ＭＮＯの通信セッションを用いて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯの両方のデータを送信する場合には、第１ＭＮＯの通信セッションの障害が、下りリンク（ＭＶＮＯ→端末の方向）のみの障害であるか、上りリンク（端末→ＭＶＮＯの方向）のみの障害であるか、下りリンク及び上りリンク両方の障害であるかを、ＭＶＮＯにて判断することができる。 Further, for example, when there is an obstacle such as step S1443 and step S1449, and the terminal transmits data of both the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1450 using the communication session of the second MNO. The failure of the communication session of the 1st MNO is a failure of only the downlink (MVNO → direction of the terminal), a failure of only the uplink (direction of the terminal → MVNO), or a failure of both the downlink and the uplink. Whether or not it exists can be determined by the MVNO.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４５２にて障害が発生していると判断した場合には、ステップＳ１４６０にてＭＮＯの変更処理を行う。上述の例のように、ステップＳ１４５２にて第１ＭＮＯの通信セッションに障害が発生していると判断された場合には、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１４６０にて第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯの通信セッション確立状態から、第２ＭＮＯ及び第３ＭＮＯの通信セッション確立状態に変更する。なお、ステップＳ１４６０の変更処理は、図１４～図１５のＳ１６２０～Ｓ１６３１の処理に相当する。 When the MVNO determines that a failure has occurred in step S1452, the MVNO performs the MNO change process in step S1460. As in the above example, when it is determined in step S1452 that the communication session of the first MNO has failed, the MVNO changes from the communication session establishment state of the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1460. Change to the communication session establishment state of the 2nd MNO and the 3rd MNO. The change process of step S1460 corresponds to the process of S1620 to S1631 of FIGS. 14 to 15.
　なお、以上に説明した本変形例３では、通信セッションを２つ確立し、データの送受信の複製及び選択も２経路設定したが、確立した通信セッション全てでデータの送受信を行う必要はない。例えば、複数の通信セッションが確立している場合に、一部の通信セッションではデータ送受信は行わずに、障害発生時等に迅速にデータ送受信の経路を変更するために当該一部の通信セッションを用いてもよい。この場合には、通常時のデータ通信量を減らすことができ、かつ障害発生時等に認証等の手順が不要となるため、ＭＮＯを変更する時間を短縮することができるというメリットがある。 In the present modification 3 described above, two communication sessions are established, and two routes are set for duplication and selection of data transmission / reception, but it is not necessary to transmit / receive data in all the established communication sessions. For example, when multiple communication sessions are established, some communication sessions do not send and receive data, and some communication sessions are used to quickly change the data transmission / reception route in the event of a failure. You may use it. In this case, there is an advantage that the amount of data communication in the normal state can be reduced and the time for changing the MNO can be shortened because a procedure such as authentication is not required when a failure occurs.
　そのような第１例の構成について説明する。第１例の構成では、通常時に、例えば、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯで通信セッションが確立され、第１ＭＮＯのみでデータ送受信が実施される。そして、第１ＭＮＯで障害発生時には、データ送受信が実施される経路が、第１ＭＮＯの経路から第２ＭＮＯの経路に変更される。 The configuration of such a first example will be described. In the configuration of the first example, in a normal time, for example, a communication session is established in the first MNO and the second MNO, and data transmission / reception is performed only in the first MNO. Then, when a failure occurs in the first MNO, the route in which data transmission / reception is performed is changed from the route of the first MNO to the route of the second MNO.
　第２例の構成について説明する。第２例の構成では、通常時に、例えば、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯで、下り方向（ＭＶＮＯ→端末）のデータ送信が実施され、第１ＭＮＯのみで、上り方向（端末→ＭＶＮＯ）のデータ送信が実施される。そして、第１ＭＮＯで障害発生時には、データ送受信が実施される経路が、下り方向及び上り方向ともに、第２ＭＮＯの経路のみに変更される。 The configuration of the second example will be described. In the configuration of the second example, during normal times, for example, data transmission in the downlink direction (MVNO → terminal) is performed in the first MNO and the second MNO, and data transmission in the uplink direction (terminal → MVNO) is performed only in the first MNO. Will be done. Then, when a failure occurs in the first MNO, the route in which data transmission / reception is performed is changed to only the route of the second MNO in both the down direction and the up direction.
　第３例の構成について説明する。第３例の構成では、通常時に、例えば、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯで、下り方向のデータ送信が実施され、第２ＭＮＯと第３ＭＮＯで、上り方向のデータ送信が実施される。そして、第１ＭＮＯで障害発生時には、下り方向のデータ送受信が第２ＭＮＯのみで継続される。 The configuration of the third example will be described. In the configuration of the third example, in the normal time, for example, the first MNO and the second MNO carry out the data transmission in the down direction, and the second MNO and the third MNO carry out the data transmission in the up direction. Then, when a failure occurs in the first MNO, data transmission / reception in the downward direction is continued only in the second MNO.
　＜実施の形態２の変形例４＞
　図２０～図２２は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態２の変形例４に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。具体的には、図２０～図２２には、複数のＭＮＯとのセッション確立後の通常時に、下り方向（ＭＶＮＯ→端末方向）でのみデータを複製し、複数セッションにて同一データの通信を実施し、上り方向（端末→ＭＶＮＯ方向）では、データ複製をせずに１つの通信セッションのみでデータ通信を実施する動作例が示されている。このような動作を行う構成によれば、通信データの帯域を比較的多く取れる下り方向のみについて、ネットワーク障害に対する耐性を高めることが可能となる。このことは、事業者システムから各端末接続装置へ制御情報を送信し、各端末接続装置から事業者システムへ測定情報等を送信するシステムなどに有効である。以降は、下り方向のデータのみを複製する例を説明するが、取り扱うデータによっては、上り方向の方が、通信データ帯域を比較的多く取れる場合（例えば、端末からのリクエスト情報で定期的にＭＶＮＯから情報を送信するようなシステムの場合）がある。このような場合には、上り方向のデータのみを複製するのも有効である。また、端末グループ毎に複製方式を選択する構成も有効である。 <Modification 4 of Embodiment 2>
20 to 22 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, in FIGS. 20 to 22, data is duplicated only in the downlink direction (MVNO → terminal direction) during normal times after a session is established with a plurality of MNOs, and the same data is communicated in a plurality of sessions. However, in the uplink direction (terminal → MVNO direction), an operation example in which data communication is performed by only one communication session without data duplication is shown. According to the configuration that performs such an operation, it is possible to increase the resistance to network failure only in the downlink direction in which a relatively large bandwidth of communication data can be taken. This is effective for a system or the like in which control information is transmitted from the business operator system to each terminal connection device, and measurement information or the like is transmitted from each terminal connection device to the business operator system. Hereinafter, an example of duplicating only the data in the downlink direction will be described, but depending on the data to be handled, when a relatively large communication data band can be obtained in the uplink direction (for example, MVNO is periodically received from the request information from the terminal). In the case of a system that sends information from). In such a case, it is also effective to duplicate only the data in the upward direction. It is also effective to select a replication method for each terminal group.
　ステップＳ１５０１の端末登録から、ステップＳ１５０９の認証応答までの処理は、図１６のステップＳ１４０１からステップＳ１４０９までの処理と同じである。これらの処理により、端末は、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを介して、ＭＶＮＯと２つの通信セッションを確立したことになる。第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを介して、ＭＶＮＯとの間で２つの通信セッションを確立したことになる。 The process from the terminal registration in step S1501 to the authentication response in step S1509 is the same as the process from step S1401 to step S1409 in FIG. By these processes, the terminal establishes two communication sessions with the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO. Two communication sessions have been established with the MVNO via the first MNO and the second MNO.
　まず、通常時の処理の例を説明する。事業者は、ステップＳ１５２０にて、データ送信指示をＭＶＮＯに送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５２１にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのそれぞれの通信セッションにて同一データを送信するためにデータを複製するデータ複製処理を行う。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５２２にて、第１ＭＮＯに複製データを送信し、第１ＭＮＯは、端末に当該複製データを送信する。同様に、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５２３にて、第２ＭＮＯに複製データを送信し、第２ＭＮＯは、端末に当該複製データを送信する。端末は、ステップＳ１５２４にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯから受信した同一データ（複製データ）を選択して、ステップＳ１５２５にて選択されたデータを端末接続装置に送信する。 First, an example of normal processing will be explained. The business operator transmits the data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1520. In step S1521, the MVNO performs a data duplication process for duplicating data in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO. The MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the first MNO in step S1522, and the first MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal. Similarly, the MVNO transmits the duplicated data to the second MNO in step S1523, and the second MNO transmits the duplicated data to the terminal. The terminal selects the same data (replica data) received from the first MNO and the second MNO in step S1524, and transmits the data selected in step S1525 to the terminal connection device.
　端末は、ステップＳ１５２６にて、第１優先ＭＮＯである第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、データ受信応答を送信する。データ受信応答のデータとしては、例えば、第１ＭＮＯの通信セッション及び第２ＭＮＯの通信セッションの両方のデータ受信のＡＣＫ／ＮＡＣＫを用いてもよい。データ受信応答に、データのシーケンス番号や、ＭＮＯ及びセッションを識別する情報、受信タイミング情報、などを付与してもよい。 In step S1526, the terminal transmits a data reception response to the MVNO via the first MNO, which is the first priority MNO. As the data of the data reception response, for example, ACK / NACK of data reception of both the communication session of the first MNO and the communication session of the second MNO may be used. A data sequence number, information for identifying the MNO and the session, reception timing information, and the like may be added to the data reception response.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５２７にて、図１７のステップＳ１４２８と同様にデータ受信応答処理を行う。ここでの例では通常時であり、ステップＳ１５２６のデータ受信応答を正しく受信できているため、ステップＳ１５２７にてデータの再送処理や品質解析等が行われる。以下で説明するように、品質解析により、現在使用中の通信セッションに問題がある場合や、他の通信セッションがより良いと判断した場合には、後述するステップＳ１５６０にてＭＮＯ変更処理等が行われる。 In step S1527, the MVNO performs data reception response processing in the same manner as in step S1428 of FIG. In the example here, it is a normal time, and since the data reception response in step S1526 can be correctly received, data retransmission processing, quality analysis, and the like are performed in step S1527. As described below, if there is a problem with the communication session currently in use by the quality analysis, or if it is determined that another communication session is better, the MNO change process or the like is performed in step S1560 described later. It is said.
　次に、ＭＮＯに障害が発生した場合の処理の例を説明する。事業者は、ステップＳ１５３０にて、ＭＶＮＯにデータ送信指示を送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５３１にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのそれぞれの通信セッションにて同一データを送信するためにデータ複製処理を行う。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５３２にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に、複製データを送信しようとする。しかしながら、図２０～図２２の例では、ステップＳ１５３３に示すように第１ＭＮＯで障害が発生しているため、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは第１ＭＮＯから端末に届かない状況である。一方、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは、ステップＳ１５３４にて、第２ＭＮＯから端末に届くことになる。 Next, an example of processing when a failure occurs in the MNO will be described. The business operator transmits a data transmission instruction to the MVNO in step S1530. In step S1531, the MVNO performs a data duplication process in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO. In step S1532, the MVNO attempts to transmit duplicate data to the terminal via the first MNO. However, in the examples of FIGS. 20 to 22, since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S1533, the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal from the first MNO. On the other hand, the data from the MVNO arrives at the terminal from the second MNO in step S1534.
　ステップＳ１５３２及びステップＳ１５３４の処理と並行して、ステップＳ１５４０にて第１ＭＮＯのデータ受信応答の受信を判断するための受信タイマーが開始する。 In parallel with the processing of step S1532 and step S1534, the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is started in step S1540.
　端末は、ステップＳ１５３５にてデータ選択処理を行い、ステップＳ１５３６にて端末接続装置に、選択されたデータを送信する。図２０～図２２の例では、端末は、第１ＭＮＯからのデータを受信できないので、第２ＭＮＯから受信したデータを端末接続装置に送信する。 The terminal performs the data selection process in step S1535, and transmits the selected data to the terminal connection device in step S1536. In the examples of FIGS. 20 to 22, since the terminal cannot receive the data from the first MNO, the data received from the second MNO is transmitted to the terminal connection device.
　端末は、ステップＳ１５３７にて、第１優先ＭＮＯである第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯにデータ受信応答を送信しようとするが、図２０～図２２の例では、ステップＳ１５３８に示すように第１ＭＮＯの障害により、上り方向においても、端末からのデータは第１ＭＮＯからＭＶＮＯに届かない状況である。このため、ステップＳ１５３３及びステップＳ１５３８のような第１ＭＮＯの障害発生がある場合には、ステップＳ１５４０に示される、第１ＭＮＯ用のデータ受信応答の受信を判断するための受信タイマーが満了することとなる。 In step S1537, the terminal attempts to transmit a data reception response to the MVNO via the first MNO, which is the first priority MNO, but in the examples of FIGS. 20 to 22, the failure of the first MNO as shown in step S1538. Therefore, even in the upstream direction, the data from the terminal does not reach the MVNO from the first MNO. Therefore, when a failure occurs in the first MNO as in steps S1533 and S1538, the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response for the first MNO shown in step S1540 expires. ..
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５３９にて、各ＭＮＯからのデータ受信応答の受信結果に基づいて、上りＭＮＯ変更が必要か否かを判断する。ＭＶＮＯは、上りＭＮＯ変更が必要であると判断した場合には、ステップＳ１５５０及びステップＳ１５５２にて、上りＭＮＯ変更要求として第１ＭＮＯから第２ＭＮＯへ変更を示す上りＭＮＯ変更要求と、再送データとを、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯを介して端末に送信しようとする。しかしながら、図２０～図２２の例では、ステップＳ１５５１に示すように第１ＭＮＯで障害が発生しているため、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは第１ＭＮＯから端末に届かない状況である。一方、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは、ステップＳ１５５２にて、第２ＭＮＯから端末に届くことになる。 In step S1539, the MVNO determines whether or not it is necessary to change the upstream MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO. When the MVNO determines that the uplink MNO change is necessary, in step S1550 and step S1552, the uplink MNO change request indicating the change from the first MNO to the second MNO and the retransmission data are sent as the uplink MNO change request. Attempts to transmit to the terminal via the first MNO and the second MNO. However, in the examples of FIGS. 20 to 22, since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S1551, the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal from the first MNO. On the other hand, the data from the MVNO arrives at the terminal from the second MNO in step S1552.
　端末は、ステップＳ１５５３にてデータ選択処理を行い、ステップＳ１５５４にて必要に応じて端末接続装置へのデータの送信を行う。なお、端末がこのタイミングで受信したデータは、再送された予備的なデータであるため、端末接続装置へのデータの送信は必要に応じて行われる。端末は、ステップＳ１５５５にて、上りＭＮＯ変更要求を受けて、上りのデータ送信を行うためのＭＮＯを、第１ＭＮＯから第２ＭＮＯに変更する。端末は、ステップＳ１５５６にて、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、データ受信応答を送信する。このときのデータ受信応答のうち、少なくとも第１ＭＮＯの下りデータに対する応答には例えばＮＡＣＫが用いられる。 The terminal performs data selection processing in step S1553, and transmits data to the terminal connection device as needed in step S1554. Since the data received by the terminal at this timing is preliminary data that has been retransmitted, the data is transmitted to the terminal connection device as necessary. In step S1555, the terminal receives the upstream MNO change request and changes the MNO for transmitting the upstream data from the first MNO to the second MNO. In step S1556, the terminal transmits a data reception response to the MVNO via the second MNO. Of the data reception responses at this time, for example, NACK is used for the response to at least the downlink data of the first MNO.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ１５６０にて、データ受信応答情報や再送回数などの統計情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯを変更する必要があるか否かを判断し、必要であると判断した場合にＭＮＯ変更処理を行う。図２０～図２２では、第１ＭＮＯで障害が発生しているため、ＭＶＮＯは、データ送信を行うためのＭＮＯを、第１ＭＮＯから第３ＭＮＯに変更する例が示されている。なお、ステップＳ１５６０の変更処理は、図１４～図１５のステップＳ１６２０～Ｓ１６３１の処理に相当する。 In step S1560, the MVNO determines whether or not it is necessary to change the MNO based on statistical information such as data reception response information and the number of retransmissions, and if it determines that it is necessary, performs the MNO change process. .. 20 to 22 show an example in which the MVNO changes the MNO for performing data transmission from the first MNO to the third MNO because the failure has occurred in the first MNO. The change process of step S1560 corresponds to the process of steps S1620 to S1631 of FIGS. 14 to 15.
　＜実施の形態２の変形例５＞
　図２３及び図２４を用いて、実施の形態２の変形例５に係る無線通信システムが備えるＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置及び無線通信端末の構成要素について説明する。なお、本変形例５に係る無線通信システムは、実施の形態２、及び、実施の形態２の変形例１～変形例４の全てを実現可能となっている。なお、実施の形態２、及び、実施の形態２の変形例１～変形例４のいずれかだけが実現される場合には、以下で説明する構成要素は適宜省略される。 <Modification 5 of Embodiment 2>
The components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the fifth modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. The wireless communication system according to the fifth modification can realize all of the second embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the second embodiment. When only one of the second embodiment and the first to fourth modifications of the second embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
　図２３は、本変形例５に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置１１０２の構成を示すブロック図である。ＭＶＮＯ１１０２は、一般にサーバ上のソフトウェアモジュール群として構成される。 FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 1102 according to the present modification 5. The MVNO 1102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
　図２３における上位のコアネットワーク１１０２－１は、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールから構成される。そして、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールは、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１１０２－９と、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０と、事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１と、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６とを含む。 The upper core network 1102-1 in FIG. 23 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module. The MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 1102-9, a PGW function module 1102-10, a business operator interface module 1102-11, and a data duplication / selection module 1102-16.
　事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１は、各事業者間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行う。事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１は、ＭＶＮＯ内外のルート制御を行い、事業者要望管理制御モジュール１１０２－６へのアクセスが可能であり、必要に応じてＭＶＮＯ外部のインターネットに接続するように構成することも有効である。 The operator interface module 1102-11 synchronizes between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them. The operator interface module 1102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 1102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
　ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０は、ＩＰアドレスの割当やＩＰパケットの伝達品質制御を行うとともに、ＭＮＯの選択制御モジュール１１０２－７の指示に従いＭＮＯの選択及び切り替えを行う。ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１１０２－９は、各ＭＮＯ間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行うとともに、ＨＳＳモジュール１１０２－３とのアクセスが可能である。 The PGW function module 1102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of the IP packet, and also selects and switches the MNO according to the instruction of the MNO selection control module 1102-7. The MNO interface module 1102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 1102-3.
　データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６は、複数ＭＮＯでの通信セッション確立時に、データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－１８に基づいて、各ＭＮＯへ送信するデータの複製や、各ＭＮＯから受信するデータの選択を行う。 The data duplication / selection module 1102-16 duplicates the data to be transmitted to each MNO and selects the data to be received from each MNO based on the data selection policy table 1102-18 when establishing a communication session with a plurality of MNOs. ..
　事業者要望管理制御モジュール１１０２－６は、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２と、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－４とを含む。端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２は、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯをどのようなポリシーで選択及び切り替えをするかを設定するためのテーブルである。端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－４は、事業者のアプリケーションを供する端末接続装置の特性を考慮して当該端末接続装置と接続する端末のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーを設定するためのテーブルである。 The operator request management control module 1102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 1102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 1102-4 for inter-terminal association. The MNO selection policy table 1102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting the policy for selecting and switching the MNO for each terminal group. The MNO selection policy table 1102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
　例えば、事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループについて「安いＭＮＯと接続」という設定指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール１１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２に格納される。また、事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループの端末間関連の端末接続装置毎重要度リスト、及び、端末間接続装置の重要度序列考慮指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール１１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－４に格納される。 For example, when a setting instruction "Connect with a cheap MNO" is sent to the operator request management control module 1102-6 for a terminal group of the first operator via the operator interface module 1102-11, the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2. In addition, via the operator interface module 1102-11, the operator issues a list of importance for each terminal connection device related to each terminal of the terminal group in which the first operator is located, and an instruction to consider the importance order of the terminal-to-terminal connection devices. When the request management control module 1102-6 is reached, the information is stored in the MNO selection policy table 1102-4.
　ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１１０２－８は、例えば、各ＭＮＯの課金情報（従量課金であったり、特定期間定額であったり、特定の通信量までは定額でそれ以上の通信量には従量課金である等の定量的情報）、各ＭＮＯから通知される運用停止アナウンス情報や、各ＭＮＯの保守機能部からの一部装置における異常輻輳や機器損傷情報等の情報を、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７に通知する。また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－２、１１０２－４において、事業者からの遠隔書き込み機能が無い場合に、これらテーブルにセキュアに書き込みを行うときには、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１１０２－８による書き込みが行われる。このとき、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１１０２－８によって、ＨＳＳモジュール１１０２－３へのセキュアな書き込みも行われてもよい。 The MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8 is, for example, billing information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, flat-rate for a specific period, flat-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the selection control module 1102-7. .. Further, in the MNO selection policy table 1102-2, 1102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator, when writing to these tables securely, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 1102-3.
　端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール１１０２－３には、基本的に各事業者から直接書き込みができない。ＨＳＳモジュール１１０２－３で管理している端末情報が書き換えられるときには、対象の端末のＳＩＭの書き換えも合わせて行われる。例えば、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーと連動して認証アルゴリズムを異なるものに変更する書き換えは有効である。このように構成した場合には、高い信頼性を求めるポリシーのときに、高い認証アルゴリズムを提供することができるので、事業者からの設定ミスが発生しても重大なシステム障害を発生させずにサービスの提供が可能となる。 Basically, it is not possible to write directly to the HSS module 1102-3, which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator. When the terminal information managed by the HSS module 1102-3 is rewritten, the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective. With this configuration, a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
　情報管理部である選択制御モジュール１１０２－７は、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１１０２－９、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０を経由して、端末グループに属する複数の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を収集し、データベース群１１０２－１２に格納する。データベース群１１０２－１２は、ネットワークモニタデータベース１１０２－１３と、端末モニタデータベース１１０２－１４と、課金情報用データベース１１０２－１５とを含む。以下、グループ通信情報及びデータベース群１１０２－１２について説明する。 The selection control module 1102-7, which is an information management unit, of a plurality of terminals belonging to the terminal group via the MNO interface module 1102-9, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16, and the PGW function module 1102-10. Group communication information, which is information related to communication, is collected and stored in the database group 1102-12. The database group 1102-12 includes a network monitor database 1102-13, a terminal monitor database 1102-14, and a billing information database 1102-15. The group communication information and the database group 1102-12 will be described below.
　ネットワークモニタデータベース１１０２－１３には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対してネットワークで測定または検出した情報（通信回線品質及び障害情報、並びに、端末がどの経路で接続されているかを示す接続情報）が収集及び格納される。なお、ここでいうネットワークは、各ＭＮＯネットワークであるものとするが、これに限ったものではなく、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークであればよい。 The network monitor database 1102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored. The network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
　端末モニタデータベース１１０２－１４には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末が自ら測定または検出し、各ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに定期的または随時に送信する、通信回線品質及び障害情報が収集及び格納される。 The terminal monitor database 1102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
　課金情報用データベース１１０２－１５には、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１１０２－８から指定される各ＭＮＯの課金情報、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０から入手される各端末の課金対象データの通信量（データ伝送量）等が収集及び格納される。 In the billing information database 1102-15, the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 1102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
　選択制御モジュール１１０２－７は、以上のグループ通信情報を総合的に考慮することで、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するような複数のＭＮＯの選択及びＭＮＯ切り替え制御を端末毎に行う。例えば、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７は、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール１１０２－８から受け取ったＭＶＮＯ拠点情報に基づいて、ＭＶＮＯの拠点を分散するための指示を行い、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０において当該指示に対応したアドレッシング制御を行う。この場合、ＭＶＮＯ拠点に特有の大規模障害時においても事業者へのサービス提供に対する影響を低減することができる。 The selection control module 1102-7 comprehensively considers the above group communication information, and performs selection of a plurality of MNOs suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group and MNO switching control for each terminal. For example, the selection control module 1102-7 gives an instruction to distribute the MVNO bases based on the MVNO base information received from the MVNO maintenance function module 1102-8, and the PGW function module 1102-10 responds to the instruction. The addressing control is performed. In this case, it is possible to reduce the influence on the service provision to the business operator even in the event of a large-scale failure peculiar to the MVNO base.
　データ選択制御モジュール１１０２－１７は、データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－１８のデータ選択ポリシーを管理する。データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６は、データ選択制御モジュール１１０２－１７で管理されるデータ選択ポリシーなどに基づいて、複数のデータの複製や選択を行う。データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６により、例えば、実施の形態２の変形例３の図１６のステップＳ１４２１のデータ複製処理や、図１７のステップＳ１４３４のデータ選択処理などが行われる。 The data selection control module 1102-17 manages the data selection policy of the data selection policy table 1102-18. The data duplication / selection module 1102-16 duplicates and selects a plurality of data based on the data selection policy managed by the data selection control module 1102-17. The data duplication / selection module 1102-16 performs, for example, the data duplication process of step S1421 of FIG. 16 of the modification 3 of the second embodiment, the data selection process of step S1434 of FIG. 17, and the like.
　データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０２－１８の情報は、事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１から直接、または、事業者要望管理制御モジュール１１０２－６を介して、各事業者よって設定される。ＭＶＮＯから端末への送信時には、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６は、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７で選択されたＭＮＯ、及び、データ選択制御モジュール１１０２－１７のデータ選択ポリシーに基づいて、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０から受信したデータを、必要なＭＮＯ及び通信セッション数分だけ複製する。そして、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６は、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール１１０２－９を介して各ＭＮＯへ、複製データを送信する。端末からのＭＶＮＯへの受信時には、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６は、選択制御モジュール１１０２－７で選択されたＭＮＯ、及び、データ選択制御モジュール１１０２－１７のデータ選択ポリシーに基づいて、複数ＭＮＯの通信セッションから受信したデータからデータを選択する。そして、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０２－１６は、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール１１０２－１０、及び、事業者インタフェースモジュール１１０２－１１を介して各事業者へ、選択したデータを送信する。 The information in the data selection policy table 1102-18 is set by each business operator directly from the business operator interface module 1102-11 or via the business operator request management control module 1102-6. When transmitting from the MVNO to the terminal, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 is a PGW function module based on the MNO selected by the selection control module 1102-7 and the data selection policy of the data selection control module 1102-17. The data received from 1102-10 is duplicated for the required number of MNOs and communication sessions. Then, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 transmits the duplication data to each MNO via the MNO interface module 1102-9. When receiving from the terminal to the MVNO, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 has a plurality of MNOs based on the MNO selected by the selection control module 1102-7 and the data selection policy of the data selection control module 1102-17. Select data from the data received from the communication session of. Then, the data duplication / selection module 1102-16 transmits the selected data to each business operator via the PGW function module 1102-10 and the business operator interface module 1102-11.
　図２４は、実施の形態２の端末１１０５ａａ～１１０５ｂｃ（図９）などのうちの１つに相当する、本変形例５に係る端末１１０５の構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 1105 according to the present modification 5, which corresponds to one of the terminals 1105aa to 1105bc (FIG. 9) of the second embodiment.
　図２４の端末１１０５は、複数ＭＮＯと同時に通信セッションを確立するために、複数のアンテナと、複数の送受信機と、複数のＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭとを持っている。アンテナ及び送受信機のそれぞれには、必ずしも複数のハードウェアが用いられる必要はなく、例えば、複数ＭＮＯの動作周波数に対応したアンテナや、時分割多重処理などが可能な送受信機などのように、複数ＭＮＯの通信を共用可能な１つのハードウェアが用いられてもよい。 The terminal 1105 of FIG. 24 has a plurality of antennas, a plurality of transmitters / receivers, and a plurality of SIMs / eSIMs in order to establish a communication session at the same time as a plurality of MNOs. It is not always necessary to use multiple pieces of hardware for each of the antenna and the transmitter / receiver. For example, an antenna corresponding to the operating frequencies of multiple MNOs, a transmitter / receiver capable of time division multiplexing, and the like. One piece of hardware capable of sharing MNO communication may be used.
　図２４の例では、２つのＭＮＯと同時に接続できる端末１１０５が示されている。この例では、第１ＭＮＯとの接続には、第１アンテナ１１０５－１ａ、第１送受信機１１０５－２ａ、及び、第１ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ａが用いられる。また、第２ＭＮＯとの接続には、第２アンテナ１１０５－１ｂ、第２送受信機１１０５－２ｂ、及び、第２ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ｂが用いられる。 In the example of FIG. 24, a terminal 1105 that can be connected to two MNOs at the same time is shown. In this example, the first antenna 1105-1a, the first transmitter / receiver 1105-2a, and the first SIM / eSIM1105-6a are used for the connection with the first MNO. Further, a second antenna 1105-1b, a second transmitter / receiver 1105-2b, and a second SIM / eSIM1105-6b are used for connection with the second MNO.
　なお、以下の説明では、第１アンテナ１１０５－１ａ及び第２アンテナ１１０５－１ｂを、アンテナ１１０５－１ａ、１１０５－１ｂと略記することもある。同様に、第１送受信機１１０５－２ａ及び第２送受信機１１０５－２ｂを、送受信機１１０５－２ａ、１１０５－２ｂと略記することもあり、第１ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ａ及び第２ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ｂを、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ａ、１１０５－６ｂと略記することもある。 In the following description, the first antenna 1105-1a and the second antenna 1105-1b may be abbreviated as antennas 1105-1a and 1105-1b. Similarly, the first transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and the second transmitter / receiver 1105-2b may be abbreviated as the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b, and the first SIM / eSIM1105-6a and the second SIM / eSIM1105-6b may be referred to as the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b. , SIM / eSIM1105-6a, 1105-6b may be abbreviated.
　送受信機１１０５－２ａ、１１０５－２ｂは、アンテナ１１０５－１ａ、１１０５－１ｂで受信した信号に、無線周波数から信号帯域へのダウンコンバートと、復調及び誤り訂正等のように受信の無線レイヤ１の処理とを行う。データ複製・選択モジュール１１０５－３は、送受信機１１０５－２ａ、１１０５－２ｂからの信号に、ＨＡＲＱやユーザフレームの復元等のように受信の無線レイヤ２の処理を行うとともに、データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０５－１３に基づいて、第１ＭＮＯから受信したデータと、第２ＭＮＯから受信したデータとからデータの選択を行う。データ複製・選択モジュール１１０５－３により、例えば、実施の形態２の変形例３の図１７のステップＳ１４２４のデータ選択処理や、図１７のステップＳ１４３１のデータ複製処理などが行われる。 The transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b are the signals received by the antennas 1105-1a and 1105-1b, which are down-converted from the radio frequency to the signal band, demodulated, error corrected, and the like. Perform processing. The data duplication / selection module 1105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a and 1105-2b in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame, and also performs the data selection policy table 1105. Based on -13, data is selected from the data received from the first MNO and the data received from the second MNO. The data duplication / selection module 1105-3 performs, for example, the data selection process of step S1424 of FIG. 17 of the modification 3 of the second embodiment, the data duplication process of step S1431 of FIG.
　データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０５－１３の情報は、ＭＶＮＯ、ＭＮＯ及びプロセッサ１１０５－５経由で事業者から受信した制御情報によって設定されてもよいし、端末保守機能モジュール１１０５－１１を介して、端末保守端末等によって設定されてもよい。なお、データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０５－１３は、データ選択制御モジュール１１０５－１２によって管理される。 The information in the data selection policy table 1105-13 may be set by the control information received from the operator via the MVNO, MNO and the processor 1105-5, or the terminal maintenance terminal via the terminal maintenance function module 1105-11. Etc. may be set. The data selection policy table 1105-13 is managed by the data selection control module 1105-12.
　端末接続装置インタフェース１１０５－４は、外部装置である端末接続装置に合わせたインタフェース整合を行う。端末接続装置は、例えば、センサー、カメラ、ＰＬＣ、パソコン等、または、これらと一体化されたＡＧＶ、車、ロボット、ドローン等である。 The terminal connection device interface 1105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device. The terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC, a personal computer, or the like, or an AGV, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like integrated with these.
　送受信機１１０５－２ａ、１１０５－２ｂの通信方式は、ＬＴＥ方式であってもよいし、５Ｇ方式であってもよいし、衛星移動体通信のネットワークであってもよいし、ＭＶＮＯが組み込み得るどの無線方式でもよい。 The communication system of the transmitters / receivers 1105-2a and 1105-2b may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any of the MVNOs that can be incorporated. It may be a wireless system.
　プロセッサ１１０５－５は、端末全体を制御し、メモリ１１０５－７と連携して、プログラムの動作及び格納、並びに、データ及びログの格納を行う。また、図２４の例のように、端末１１０５が、画面表示や、ＬＥＤなどヒューマンインタフェース１１０５－８を備える構成では、トラブル時の原因究明等を容易に行うことができる。この際、端末１１０５で測定または検出された通信回線品質及び障害情報は、プロセッサ１１０５－５でメッセージとして形成され、データ複製・選択モジュール１１０５－３、送受信機１１０５－２ａ、１１０５－２ｂ、アンテナ１１０５－１ａ、１１０５－１ｂ、各ＭＮＯを介して、ＭＶＮＯに送信される。データ複製・選択モジュール１１０５－３は、データ受信時と同様に、データ選択ポリシーテーブル１１０５－１３に基づいて、上記メッセージから必要なＭＮＯ及び通信セッション数分のデータを複製し、各ＭＮＯへ複製データを送信する。 The processor 1105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 1105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 24, in the configuration in which the terminal 1105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 1105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble. At this time, the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 1105 are formed as a message by the processor 1105-5, and the data duplication / selection module 1105-3, the transmitter / receiver 1105-2a, 1105-2b, and the antenna 1105. -1a, 1105-1b, transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO. The data duplication / selection module 1105-3 replicates the required MNOs and the number of communication sessions from the above message based on the data selection policy table 1105-13 as in the case of data reception, and replicates the data to each MNO. To send.
　ＭＶＮＯの端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール１１０２－３と協働するＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ａ、１１０５－６ｂは、暗号化の鍵を払い出す認証機能を有する。事業者のアプリケーションで遠隔からデフォルトで選択する認証方式は、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭに指定されるか、または、端末上のハードウェアもしくはソフトウェアによるＤＩＰＳＷにより指定される。このような指定により、無線規格上認証方式の設定ビットが通常使用＝デフォルトとなっているとき、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を事業者が選択することができる。 The SIM / eSIM1105-6a and 1105-6b that cooperate with the HSS module 1102-3, which is the terminal information management control module of the MVNO, have an authentication function that issues an encryption key. The authentication method that is remotely selected by default in the application of the operator is specified by SIM / eSIM, or is specified by DIPSW by hardware or software on the terminal. With such a designation, when the setting bit of the authentication method in the wireless standard is normally used = default, the operator can select the authentication method to be used by default.
　なお、複数通りの認証アルゴリズムを物理的にＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ上に実装しておき、外部から選択可能としてもよい。具体的には、３ＧＰＰ対応の無線システムでは通常、デフォルト設定としてＭｉｌｅｎａｇｅが使用されている。このような場合に、例えば、事業者が認証方式指定メッセージを送信し、特殊認証方式を指定したときに、当該メッセージの内容をＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ１１０５－６ａ、１１０５－６ｂに伝えることで、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を変更できるようにしてもよい。通常の規格では認証方式そのものは多数設定することができないが、上記により、事業者毎に異なる認証方式を実現することができるので、信頼性が高いネットワークシステムを構築できる。 Note that a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside. Specifically, in a 3GPP compatible wireless system, Milenage is usually used as the default setting. In such a case, for example, when the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method, the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM1105-6a and 1105-6b, so that it is used by default. The authentication method to be used may be changed. Although it is not possible to set a large number of authentication methods themselves in a normal standard, it is possible to realize a different authentication method for each business operator, so that a highly reliable network system can be constructed.
　＜実施の形態３＞
　図２５は、本実施の形態３に係る無線通信システム３１００の例示的な構成を示す図である。無線通信システム３１００は、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供するシステムであり、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置３１０２と、複数の無線通信端末３１０５ａａ、３１０５ａｂ、３１０５ａｃ、３１０５ｂａ、３１０５ｂｂ、３１０５ｂｃとを備える。なお、１つの無線通信端末と、他の無線通信端末とは端末グループを構成している。 <Embodiment 3>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 3100 according to the third embodiment. The wireless communication system 3100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and includes an MVNO network device 3102 and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 3105aa, 3105ab, 3105ac, 3105ba, 3105bb, 3105bc. It should be noted that one wireless communication terminal and the other wireless communication terminal form a terminal group.
　上述した実施の形態１では、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２が、グループ通信情報に基づいて、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの選択、並びに、セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行った。これに対して本実施の形態３では、無線通信端末３１０５ａａなどの端末が、グループ通信情報を自身で測定または検出するか、ネットワークからグループ通信情報を取得する。そして、端末グループ毎の通信が適切となるように、端末が、グループ通信情報に基づいて、１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの選択、並びに、セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を自立的に行う。以下、そのような本実施の形態３について説明する。 In the first embodiment described above, the MVNO 3102 selects one MNO network and session suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group based on the group communication information, and controls the establishment or switching of the session. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the terminal such as the wireless communication terminal 3105aa measures or detects the group communication information by itself or acquires the group communication information from the network. Then, the terminal autonomously controls the selection of one MNO network and session, and the establishment or switching of the session based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group becomes appropriate. Hereinafter, such a third embodiment will be described.
　図２５の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム３１００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者と第２事業者とが存在している。第１事業者の端末グループとして、第１－１端末３１０５ａａ、第１－２端末３１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃが存在している。第２事業者の端末グループとして、第２－１端末３１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂ、及び、第２－３端末３１０５ｂｃが存在している。 In the example of FIG. 25, there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 3100. As the terminal group of the first operator, there are 1-1 terminal 3105aa, 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and 1-3 terminal 3105ac. As the terminal group of the second operator, there are 2-1 terminal 3105ba, 2-2 terminal 3105bb, and 2-3 terminal 3105bc.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム３１００は、ＭＮＯネットワークとして、第１ＭＮＯネットワーク、第２ＭＮＯネットワーク、及び、第３ＭＮＯネットワークを含む。第１ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク３１０３ａと、コアネットワーク３１０３ａに接続された第１－１基地局３１０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局３１０４ａｂとを含む。第２ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク３１０３ｂと、コアネットワーク３１０３ｂに接続された第２－１基地局３１０４ｂａ及び第２－２基地局３１０４ｂｂとを含む。第３ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク３１０３ｃと、コアネットワーク３１０３ｃに接続された第３－１基地局３１０４ｃａ及び第３－２基地局３１０４ｃｂとを含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、コアネットワーク３１０３ａ、３１０３ｂ、３１０３ｃには、Ｓ－ＧＷ（Serving Gateway）、ＭＭＥ（Mobility Management Entity）等が含まれる。 The MVNO wireless communication system 3100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks. The first MNO network includes a core network 3103a and a 1-1 base station 3104a and a 1-2 base station 3104ab connected to the core network 3103a. The second MNO network includes a core network 3103b and a 2-1 base station 3104ba and a 2-2 base station 3104bb connected to the core network 3103b. The third MNO network includes a core network 3103c and a third base station 3104ca and a third-2 base station 3104cc connected to the core network 3103c. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the core networks 3103a, 3103b, and 3103c include S-GW (Serving Gateway), MME (Mobility Management Entity), and the like.
　ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置３１０２は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末３１０５ａａ、３１０５ａｂ、３１０５ａｃ、３１０５ｂａ、３１０５ｂｂ、３１０５ｂｃと無線通信を行う。 The MVNO network device 3102 performs wireless communication with wireless communication terminals 3105aa, 3105ab, 3105ac, 3105ba, 3105bb, and 3105bc that can be connected to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks.
　ＭＶＮＯ３１０２は、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３１０３ａ、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３１０３ｂ、及び、第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３１０３ｃと接続された上位のコアネットワーク３１０２－１を、ＭＶＮＯネットワークとして含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、上位のコアネットワーク３１０２－１を構成するＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールには、Ｐ－ＧＷ（Packet Data Network Gateway）、ＨＳＳ（Home Subscriber Server）等が含まれる。 The MVNO 3102 includes the core network 3103a of the first MNO, the core network 3103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 3102-1 connected to the core network 3103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 3102-1 includes P-GW (PacketDataNetworkGateway), HSS (HomeSubscriberServer), and the like. included.
　上位のコアネットワーク３１０２－１は、第１事業者のシステム３１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム３１０１ｂと接続される。第１事業者のシステム３１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム３１０１ｂは、例えば、事業者が事業者グループに属する複数の端末から情報を収集するデータサーバであってもよいし、これら収集した情報に基づいて事業者グループに属する複数の端末にサービスを提供するアプリケーションサーバであってもよい。 The upper core network 3102-1 is connected to the system 3101a of the first operator and the system 3101b of the second operator. The system 3101a of the first business operator and the system 3101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
　ＭＶＮＯ３１０２は、上位のコアネットワーク３１０２－１のほか、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが設定されるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２と、端末グループに属する端末及び他の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報をデータベース群に保持して管理する情報管理モジュール３１０２－７とを含む。 The MVNO 3102 includes the upper core network 3102-1, the MNO selection policy table 3102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and group communication which is information on communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals. It includes an information management module 3102-7 that stores and manages information in a database group.
　端末は、後述する変形例などで説明するように、データベースであるデータベース群と、情報管理部とを含む。 The terminal includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit as described in a modified example described later.
　端末のデータベース群は、実施の形態１で説明した切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７のデータベース群と実質的に同じであり、グループ通信情報を保持する。 The database group of the terminal is substantially the same as the database group of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment, and holds the group communication information.
　端末の情報管理部は、実施の形態１で説明した切り替え制御モジュール１０２－７の情報管理部と実質的に同じである。具体的には、端末の情報管理部は、上記データベース群に保持されたグループ通信情報を管理する。また、端末の情報管理部は、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するように、当該端末について１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択する。 The information management unit of the terminal is substantially the same as the information management unit of the switching control module 102-7 described in the first embodiment. Specifically, the information management unit of the terminal manages the group communication information held in the database group. Further, the information management unit of the terminal selects one MNO network and session for the terminal based on the group communication information so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy.
　端末の情報管理部は、選択結果に基づいて、当該端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの自律的な制御を行う。このような情報管理部の制御により、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーなどについて端末グループ毎の通信を適切化することができる。なお、以下の説明では、情報管理部は、データベース群と一体的に設けられた選択制御モジュールである場合について説明するが、データベース群と個別に設けられてもよいし、他のモジュールであってもよい。 The information management unit of the terminal autonomously controls the establishment or switching of the session of the terminal based on the selection result. By controlling the information management unit in this way, it is possible to optimize communication for each terminal group regarding the MNO selection policy and the like. In the following description, the case where the information management unit is a selection control module provided integrally with the database group will be described, but the information management unit may be provided separately from the database group, or may be another module. May be good.
　図２５を用いて、端末が自立的に行う、ＭＮＯネットワーク及び通信セッションの選択、並びに、通信セッションの確立及び切り替えを説明する。 With reference to FIG. 25, the selection of the MNO network and the communication session, and the establishment and switching of the communication session, which the terminal independently performs, will be described.
　無線通信ネットワークでは、時間毎の環境の変化や物の移動の影響を受けて、通信回線品質が時間によって変動する。また、ネットワークの障害などにより通信回線品質が著しく劣化する場合がある。そこで、端末は、端末グループ毎の通信回線品質をグループ通信情報として管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯまたはセッションの選択ポリシーに適したＭＮＯの選択、及び、通信セッションの切り替えを行う。 In wireless communication networks, the quality of communication lines fluctuates with time due to the effects of changes in the environment and movement of objects over time. In addition, the quality of the communication line may be significantly deteriorated due to a network failure or the like. Therefore, the terminal manages the communication line quality for each terminal group as group communication information, selects the MNO suitable for the MNO or the session selection policy, and switches the communication session based on the group communication information.
　例えば、第１事業者のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが「通信コスト最小化」に設定されたとする。そして、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末３１０５ａａ、第１－２端末３１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃは、様々な料金プランの中で、最も低価格になるＭＮＯとして第１ＭＮＯを選択したとする。この場合、第１－１端末３１０５ａａ、第１－２端末３１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃのそれぞれは、その選択結果に従い、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３１０３ａの第１－１基地局３１０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局３１０４ａｂのいずれかと無線区間の通信セッションを確立し通信する。ただし、これは例であって、事業者毎の端末グループのＭＮＯ選択は、これに制限されるものではない。 For example, suppose that the MNO selection policy of the first operator is set to "minimize communication cost". The 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator are the first MNOs as the lowest priced MNOs among various rate plans. Is selected. In this case, the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac each have the 1-1 base station 3104aa and the 1-first of the core network 3103a of the 1st MNO according to the selection result. 2 Establish and communicate with any of the base stations 3104ab in a wireless section. However, this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
　ここで、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末３１０５ａａ、第１－２端末３１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃは、定期的または必要に応じて随時、伝送速度、伝送遅延量、誤り率、受信レベル、Ｓ／Ｎ等のネットワークにおける通信品質の測定やＫｅｅｐ　Ａｌｉｖｅ等による回線故障の監視を実施しているものとする。 Here, the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator have the transmission speed, the transmission delay amount, and the transmission speed and the transmission delay amount at regular intervals or as needed. It is assumed that the communication quality in the network such as error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and the line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
　また、第１－１端末３１０５ａａ、第１－２端末３１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃは、定期的にネットワークからグループ通信情報として、例えば「端末グループ全体のＭＮＯ毎の利用通信量」、「ＭＮＯ毎の通知時点での契約している通信料の単価」、「現在アクセスしているＭＮＯ毎の端末数」、「ＭＮＯ毎の一定期間内の契約最大通信量」等を受信し、データベース群に保存しているものとする。 Further, the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "the amount of communication used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO". Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", "Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed", "Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and puts it in the database group. It is assumed that it has been saved.
　以上の場合において、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃが、自身の測定結果に基づいて、第１－２基地局３１０４ａｂとの無線通信回線３１０６－１ａの回線品質の劣化を検出したとする。 In the above case, it is assumed that the 1-3 terminal 3105ac detects the deterioration of the line quality of the wireless communication line 3106-1a with the 1-2 base station 3104ab based on its own measurement result.
　このとき、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃは、他の利用できる無線通信回線の測定または検出を行い、第１－１基地局３１０４ａａの通信回線品質と第２－１基地局３１０４ｂａの通信回線品質とを測定または検出したとする。 At this time, the 1-3 terminal 3105ac measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-1 base station 3104aa and the communication line quality of the 2-1 base station 3104ba. Suppose it is measured or detected.
　この場合、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃは、「自身で直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質」、「定期的または随時に取得していたグループ通信情報の最新情報」、またはそれらの集計結果から、コストが低減できる第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３１０３ａの第１－１基地局３１０４ａａを選択し、通信セッション確立を自立的に行う。この結果、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－３端末３１０５ａｃは、無線通信回線３１０６－１ｂを確立することで、継続して通信を行うことが可能となる。 In this case, the 1-3 terminal 3105ac is based on the "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", the "latest information of group communication information acquired regularly or at any time", or the aggregated results thereof. The 1-1 base station 3104aa of the core network 3103a of the first MNO whose cost can be reduced is selected, and the communication session is established independently. As a result, the 1-3 terminals 3105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3106-1b.
　なお、グループ通信情報のうち、ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される情報は、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２の情報管理モジュール３１０２－７で管理される情報であり、各事業者の端末グループに属する各端末から収集される情報である。 Of the group communication information, the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3102-7 of MVNO3102, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information.
　別例として、図２５を用いて、ＭＮＯと基地局との間の通信回線に障害が発生した場合に端末が自立的に行う、ＭＮＯネットワーク及び通信セッションの選択、並びに、通信セッションの確立及び切り替えを説明する。 As another example, using FIG. 25, the terminal autonomously selects the MNO network and communication session, and establishes and switches the communication session when the communication line between the MNO and the base station fails. To explain.
　別例として、第２事業者のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが「優先度１：障害時通信継続、優先度２：通信コスト最小化」に設定されたとする。この場合、特定のＭＮＯの障害発生時においても、通信を継続できる端末を残して、サービスを最大限維持できるように、接続ＭＮＯを均一化させるＭＮＯ選択を実施する。 As another example, it is assumed that the MNO selection policy of the second operator is set to "Priority 1: Continue communication in case of failure, Priority 2: Minimize communication cost". In this case, even when a failure of a specific MNO occurs, the MNO selection is performed so that the connected MNOs are made uniform so that the service can be maintained as much as possible, leaving the terminal capable of continuing the communication.
　その動作の一例として障害発生前には、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－１端末３１０５ｂａは、第１ＭＮＯ３１０３ａの第１－２基地局３１０４ａｂと通信セッションを確立し、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂは、第２ＭＮＯ３１０３ｂの第２－２基地局３１０４ｂｂと通信セッションを確立し、第２－３端末３１０５ｂｃは、第３ＭＮＯ３１０３ｃの第３－２基地局３１０４ｃｂと通信セッションを確立し、それぞれ通信しているものとする。ただし、これは例であって、事業者毎の端末グループのＭＮＯ選択は、これに制限されるものではない。 As an example of the operation, before the failure occurs, the 2-1 terminal 3105ba belonging to the terminal group of the second operator establishes a communication session with the 1-2 base station 3104ab of the 1st MNO3103a, and the 2-2 terminal The 3105bb establishes a communication session with the 2nd-2nd base station 3104bb of the 2nd MNO3103b, and the 2nd-3rd terminal 3105bc establishes a communication session with the 3rd-2nd base station 3104bb of the 3rd MNO3103c, and communicates with each other. It shall be. However, this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
　ここで、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－１端末３１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末３１０５ｂｃは、第１事業者の端末グループと同様、定期的または必要に応じて随時、伝送速度、伝送遅延量、誤り率、受信レベル、Ｓ／Ｎ等のネットワークにおける通信品質の測定やＫｅｅｐ　Ａｌｉｖｅ等による回線故障の監視を実施しているものとする。 Here, the 2-1 terminal 3105ba, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator are regularly or as needed like the terminal group of the first business operator. At any time, it is assumed that communication quality in the network such as transmission speed, transmission delay amount, error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
　また、第２－１端末３１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末３１０５ｂｃは、定期的にネットワークからグループ通信情報として、例えば「端末グループ全体のＭＮＯ毎の利用通信量」、「ＭＮＯ毎の通知時点での契約している通信料の単価」、「現在アクセスしているＭＮＯ毎の端末数」、「ＭＮＯ毎の一定期間内の契約最大通信量」等を受信し、データベース群に保存しているものとする。 Further, the 2-1 terminal 3105ba, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3105bc are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "the amount of communication used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO". Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", "Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed", "Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and puts it in the database group. It is assumed that it has been saved.
　以上の場合において、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂが、自身の測定結果に基づいて、第２ＭＮＯ３１０３ｂの通信回線障害を検出するか、または、３１０６－２ａの無線回線障害を検出したとする。 In the above cases, it is assumed that the 2-2 terminal 3105bb detects the communication line failure of the 2nd MNO3103b or the wireless line failure of 3106-2a based on its own measurement result.
　このとき、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂは、他の利用できる無線通信回線の測定または検出を行い、第１－２基地局３１０４ａｂの通信回線品質と第３－１基地局３１０４ａｃの通信回線品質とを測定または検出したとする。 At this time, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-2 base station 3104ab and the communication line quality of the 3-1 base station 3104ac. Suppose it is measured or detected.
　この場合、第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂは、「自身で直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質」、「定期的または随時に取得していたグループ通信情報の最新情報」、またはそれらの集計結果から、コストが低減できる第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３１０３ｃの第３－１基地局３１０４ｃａを選択し、通信セッション確立を自立的に行う。この結果、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－２端末３１０５ｂｂは、無線通信回線３１０６－２ｂを確立することで、継続して通信を行うことが可能となる。 In this case, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb is based on the "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", the "latest information of group communication information acquired regularly or at any time", or the aggregated results thereof. The 3-1 base station 3104ca of the core network 3103c of the third MNO whose cost can be reduced is selected, and the communication session is established independently. As a result, the 2-2 terminal 3105bb belonging to the terminal group of the second operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3106-2b.
　なお、グループ通信情報のうち、ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される情報は、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２の情報管理モジュール３１０２－７で管理される情報であり、各事業者の端末グループに属する各端末から収集される情報である。 Of the group communication information, the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3102-7 of MVNO3102, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information.
　次に、図２６～図２８を用いて、ネットワークから得られる通信品質及び障害情報等のグループ通信情報に基づいて、接続先ＭＮＯを選択する動作例について説明する。図２６～図２８の例では、端末が、グループ通信情報を自身で測定または検出するか、３つのＭＮＯネットワーク（第１～第３ＭＮＯネットワーク）と接続したＭＶＮＯを用いて、ネットワークからグループ通信情報を取得する。図２６～図２８には、端末が、グループ通信情報に基づいて、端末グループ毎の通信が適切となるように、自立的に１つのＭＮＯ及び通信セッションを選択し、通信セッションを確立または切り替えるシーケンスの一例が示されている。 Next, an operation example of selecting a connection destination MNO based on group communication information such as communication quality and failure information obtained from the network will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. In the example of FIGS. 26 to 28, the terminal measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or uses the MVNO connected to the three MNO networks (first to third MNO networks) to obtain the group communication information from the network. get. 26 to 28 show a sequence in which the terminal autonomously selects one MNO and a communication session based on the group communication information so that communication for each terminal group is appropriate, and establishes or switches the communication session. An example is shown.
　事業者は、ステップＳ３２０１にて、通信を開始する前に、ＭＶＮＯに対して、自己の端末グループの端末の登録と、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの設定とを行う。この登録及び設定は、電気通信回線を経由するメッセージによって行われてもよい。その際、ＭＶＮＯに重大な障害を発生させてしまう可能性がある登録及び設定はできないようにするのが望ましい。例えば、メニューを選択するインタフェースをＭＶＮＯに設けることなどにより、誤操作によって重大な障害が発生しないようにする。 In step S3201, the business operator registers the terminal of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO before starting the communication. This registration and setting may be performed by a message via a telecommunication line. At that time, it is desirable to prevent registration and setting that may cause a serious failure in the MVNO. For example, by providing an interface for selecting a menu in the MVNO, it is possible to prevent a serious failure due to an erroneous operation.
　端末は、電源投入後、自らのＳＩＭ（Subscriber Identity Module）にアクセスして、ＰＬＭＮ（Public Land Mobile Network）サーチを行い、規定の手順に従って接続先となるＭＮＯを選択する。この結果として第１ＭＮＯが選択された場合、端末は、ステップＳ３２０２にて第１ＭＮＯに接続要求を送信する。端末が、ステップＳ３２０３にて第１ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信すると、無線の接続経路が確立する。本実施の形態３では、ＭＶＮＯがＨＳＳ等の認証機能を有しているため、ＭＶＮＯが、ステップＳ３２０４にて端末に認証要求を送信し、端末が、ステップＳ３２０５にてＭＶＮＯに認証応答を送信することで、端末とＭＶＮＯとの間で認証処理が行われる。必要に応じて、これらのメッセージの送受信は複数のステップで行われてもよいし、ＭＮＯのＨＳＳとＭＶＮＯのＨＳＳとの間の連携で行われてもよい。以上のようにして端末とＭＶＮＯとの間のセッションが確立される。同様の処理がグループ端末内の全端末においても実施される。 After turning on the power, the terminal accesses its own SIM (Subscriber Identity Module), performs a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) search, and selects the MNO to be connected according to the specified procedure. When the first MNO is selected as a result of this, the terminal transmits a connection request to the first MNO in step S3202. When the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S3203, the wireless connection path is established. In the third embodiment, since the MVNO has an authentication function such as HSS, the MVNO transmits an authentication request to the terminal in step S3204, and the terminal transmits an authentication response to the MVNO in step S3205. As a result, the authentication process is performed between the terminal and the MVNO. If necessary, the transmission and reception of these messages may be performed in a plurality of steps, or may be performed in cooperation between the HSS of the MNO and the HSS of the MVNO. As described above, the session between the terminal and the MVNO is established. The same process is performed on all terminals in the group terminal.
　第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯは、ステップＳ３２０６にて、以上により確立した端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対して通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出する。 The first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO measure or detect the communication line quality and failure information for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group established above in step S3206.
　ステップＳ３２０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、各端末からの信号を第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局において受信して得られる無線回線の品質情報、すなわち、受信電力、ＳＩＮＲ（Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio）、ＢＬＥＲ（BLock Error Rate）等であってもよいし、無線回線の同期状態に関連する情報（初期同期中／同期／同期外れ等）であってもよい。または、ステップＳ３２０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、無線レイヤ２レベルのＡＲＱ（Automatic Repeat-Request）／ＨＡＲＱ（Hybrid ARQ）の再送回数や、ＳＮ（Sequence Number）の番号飛び検出情報等でもよい。または、ステップＳ３２０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、セッションの状態に関する情報（正常／断等）でもよいし、伝送速度、伝送遅延量であってもよい。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 are, for example, radio line quality information obtained by receiving signals from each terminal at the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO, that is, received power and SINR (Signal). -to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLockError Rate), etc., or information related to the synchronization status of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.) may be used. .. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, or the like. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
　または、ステップＳ３２０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、ネットワーク全体での保守管理情報及び機器障害情報（各ＭＮＯにおける一部装置における異常輻輳、機器損傷情報、保守等による信号閉塞情報、試験動作中等のステータス情報）であってもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be, for example, maintenance management information and device failure information for the entire network (abnormal congestion in some devices in each MNO, device damage information, signal blockage information due to maintenance, etc., test operation. Moderate status information).
　または、ステップＳ３２０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、端末から送信されてＭＶＮＯで受信されることが予測される信号の到着有無であってもよい。より具体的には、ＭＶＮＯからヘルスチェック信号を送信してそれに対応する応答が規定時間内に返ってこなかったときに通信回線品質が悪いと判断されてもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3206 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal transmitted from the terminal and predicted to be received by the MVNO. More specifically, when the health check signal is transmitted from the MVNO and the corresponding response is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor.
　セッションを確立した端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末は、ステップＳ３２０７にて自ら通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出する。そして、少なくとも１つ以上の端末は、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに、通信回線品質及び障害情報を送信する。 At least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group for which the session has been established measures or detects the communication line quality and failure information by themselves in step S3207. Then, at least one or more terminals transmit communication line quality and failure information to the MVNO via the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO.
　ステップＳ３２０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、各端末において受信して得られる無線回線の品質情報、すなわち、受信電力、ＳＩＮＲ（Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio）、ＢＬＥＲ（BLock Error Rate）等であってもよいし、無線回線の同期状態に関連する情報（初期同期中／同期／同期外れ等）であってもよい。または、ステップＳ３２０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、無線レイヤ２レベルのＡＲＱ（Automatic Repeat-Request）／ＨＡＲＱ（Hybrid ARQ）の再送回数や、ＳＮ（Sequence Number）の番号飛び検出情報等でもよい。または、ステップＳ３２０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、セッションの状態に関する情報（正常／断等）でもよいし、伝送速度、伝送遅延量であってもよい。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S3207 are, for example, the quality information of the wireless line received and obtained at each terminal, that is, the received power, SINR (Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLock Error). Rate) or the like, or information related to the synchronization state of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.). Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3207 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, or the like. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3207 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
　なお、図２６～図２８のシーケンス図において図示を省略しているが、ＭＶＮＯは、端末グループ毎に接続費用に関する情報を定期的または随時に更新しているものとする。 Although not shown in the sequence diagrams of FIGS. 26 to 28, it is assumed that the MVNO updates the information on the connection cost for each terminal group regularly or at any time.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システムに属する端末は、ステップＳ３２０８にて、ＭＶＮＯから定期的または随時に通知されるグループ通信情報を受信する。また、端末が、通信回線品質の劣化や障害の発生を検出した場合などには、端末が、ステップＳ３２０９－１にてグループ通信情報要求をＭＶＮＯに送信し、その要求を受けたＭＶＮＯが、ステップＳ３２０９－２にてグループ通信情報を端末に送信し、端末がこのグループ通信情報を受信してもよい。以降、ステップＳ３２０８と、ステップＳ３２０９（ステップＳ３４０９－１及びステップＳ３４０９－２）と、の少なくともいずれか１つが定期的または随時に行われる。 The terminal belonging to the MVNO wireless communication system receives the group communication information notified from the MVNO periodically or at any time in step S3208. Further, when the terminal detects the deterioration of the communication line quality or the occurrence of a failure, the terminal transmits a group communication information request to the MVNO in step S3209-1, and the MVNO receiving the request steps. The group communication information may be transmitted to the terminal in S3209-2, and the terminal may receive the group communication information. After that, at least one of step S3208 and step S3209 (step S3409-1 and step S3409-2) is performed regularly or at any time.
　ここで図２６～図２８に例として示すように、ステップＳ３２１０にて、第１ＭＮＯの通信回線品質劣化、または、第１ＭＮＯのネットワーク障害が、第１ＭＮＯと端末との間の通信において発生したと仮定する。 Here, as shown as an example in FIGS. 26 to 28, it is assumed that the communication line quality deterioration of the first MNO or the network failure of the first MNO occurred in the communication between the first MNO and the terminal in step S3210. To do.
　この場合、端末は、ステップＳ３２１１にて、それまでに端末自身で測定、または、ネットワークから定期的もしくは随時に通知されていた「グループ通信情報」に基づいて、第１ＭＮＯとの通信回線の障害または品質劣化を検出する。この検出は、第１ＭＮＯの基地局、または、第１ＭＮＯの切り替えトリガーとして用いられる。 In this case, in step S3211, the terminal fails in the communication line with the first MNO based on the "group communication information" measured by the terminal itself or notified periodically or at any time from the network. Detect quality degradation. This detection is used as a base station of the first MNO or as a switching trigger of the first MNO.
　次に端末は、ステップＳ３２１２以降の処理を行うことによって、通信を再開または継続する。具体的には、端末は、ステップＳ３２１２にて、定期的または随時に取得していたグループ通信情報から、これまで通信していた第１ＭＮＯの別基地局、第２ＭＮＯの基地局、及び、第３ＭＮＯの基地局について、同期チャネル、及び、ブロードキャストチャネルを測定することを決定する。そして、端末は、ステップＳ３２１３にて、それらの同期チャネル、及び、ブロードキャストチャネルを測定する。 Next, the terminal resumes or continues communication by performing the processing after step S3212. Specifically, the terminal uses the group communication information acquired periodically or at any time in step S3212 to obtain another base station of the first MNO, a base station of the second MNO, and a third MNO that have been communicating so far. It is decided to measure the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel for the base station of. Then, in step S3213, the terminal measures their synchronization channel and broadcast channel.
　端末は、ステップＳ３２１４にて、測定結果に基づいて、第１ＭＮＯの別基地局、第２ＭＮＯの基地局、及び、第３ＭＮＯの基地局のいずれかへの切り替え選択を行う。この際、端末は、必要に応じてｅＳＩＭ変更等も行う。 In step S3214, the terminal selects to switch to one of the first MNO base station, the second MNO base station, and the third MNO base station based on the measurement result. At this time, the terminal also changes the eSIM as necessary.
　端末は、切り替え選択の結果に基づいて、ステップＳ３２１５－１ａ～ステップＳ３２１６－２ａの第１処理、ステップＳ３２１５－１ｂ～ステップＳ３２１６－２ｂの第２処理、及び、ステップＳ３２１５－１ｃ～ステップＳ３２１６－２ｃの第３処理のいずれかを行う。 Based on the result of the switching selection, the terminal has the first process of steps S3215-1a to S3216-2a, the second process of steps S3215-1b to S3216-2b, and steps S3215-1c to S3216-2c. Perform any of the third processing of.
　第１処理を行う場合、端末は、ステップＳ３２１５－１ａにて接続要求を第１ＭＮＯに送信し、ステップＳ３２１５－２ａにて接続応答を第１ＭＮＯから受信する。そして、端末は、ステップＳ３２１６－１ａにて認証要求を第１ＭＮＯに送信し、ステップＳ３２１６－２ａにて認証応答を第１ＭＮＯから受信することにより、端末と第１ＭＮＯとの間で通信が確立される。 When performing the first process, the terminal transmits the connection request to the first MNO in step S3215-1a, and receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S3215-2a. Then, the terminal transmits the authentication request to the first MNO in step S3216-1a, and receives the authentication response from the first MNO in step S3216-2a, so that communication is established between the terminal and the first MNO. ..
　第２処理を行う場合、端末は、ステップＳ３２１５－１ｂにて接続要求を第２ＭＮＯに送信し、ステップＳ３２１５－２ｂにて接続応答を第２ＭＮＯから受信する。そして、端末は、ステップＳ３２１６－１ｂにて認証要求を第２ＭＮＯに送信し、ステップＳ３２１６－２ｂにて認証応答を第２ＭＮＯから受信することにより、端末と第２ＭＮＯとの間で通信が確立される。 When performing the second process, the terminal transmits the connection request to the second MNO in step S3215-1b, and receives the connection response from the second MNO in step S3215-2b. Then, the terminal transmits the authentication request to the second MNO in step S3216-1b, and receives the authentication response from the second MNO in step S3216-b, so that communication is established between the terminal and the second MNO. ..
　第３処理を行う場合、端末は、ステップＳ３２１５－１ｃにて接続要求を第３ＭＮＯに送信し、ステップＳ３２１５－２ｃにて接続応答を第３ＭＮＯから受信する。そして、端末は、ステップＳ３２１６－１ｃにて認証要求を第３ＭＮＯに送信し、ステップＳ３２１６－２ｃにて認証応答を第３ＭＮＯから受信することにより、端末と第３ＭＮＯとの間で通信が確立される。 When performing the third process, the terminal transmits the connection request to the third MNO in step S3215-1c, and receives the connection response from the third MNO in step S3215-2c. Then, the terminal transmits the authentication request to the third MNO in step S3216-1c, and receives the authentication response from the third MNO in step S3216-2c, so that communication is established between the terminal and the third MNO. ..
　＜実施の形態３のまとめ＞
　本実施の形態３に係る無線通信システムによれば、端末が、端末グループに属する無線通信端末及び他の無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、当該端末について１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、当該端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの自律的な制御を行う。このような構成によれば、例えば、任意のＭＮＯにおいて、通信回線品質の劣化やネットワークの障害などが発生した場合であっても、同一ＭＮＯの他基地局、または、他ＭＮＯの基地局とコアネットワークの切り替えを行うことができる。この結果、端末グループ内の端末が無線及び有線を含む通信回線品質を適切に保つこと、及び、通信を継続することが可能となる。 <Summary of Embodiment 3>
According to the wireless communication system according to the third embodiment, the terminal manages the group communication information which is the information related to the communication of the wireless communication terminal belonging to the terminal group and other wireless communication terminals, and is based on the group communication information. , One MNO network and session is selected for the terminal, and based on the selection result, autonomous control of establishment or switching of the session of the terminal is performed. According to such a configuration, for example, even if a deterioration of communication line quality or a network failure occurs in any MNO, another base station of the same MNO or a base station and core of another MNO. You can switch networks. As a result, the terminals in the terminal group can maintain appropriate communication line quality including wireless and wired, and can continue communication.
　＜実施の形態３の変形例１＞
　図２９は、実施の形態３の変形例１に係る無線通信システム３３００の例示的な構成を示す図である。本変形例１では、端末が、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な他の端末との通信により得られるグループ通信情報に基づいて、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの選択、並びに、セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を自立的に行う。 <Modification 1 of Embodiment 3>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 3300 according to the first modification of the third embodiment. In this modification 1, one terminal is suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group based on the group communication information obtained by communicating with other terminals capable of connecting to the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It autonomously controls the selection of MNO networks and sessions, and the establishment or switching of sessions.
　図２９の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム３３００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者と第２事業者とが存在している。第１事業者の端末グループとして、第１－１端末３３０５ａａ、第１－２端末３３０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末３３０５ａｃが存在している。第２事業者の端末グループとして、第２－１端末３３０５ｂａ、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂ、及び、第２－３端末３３０５ｂｃが存在している。 In the example of FIG. 29, there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 3300. As the terminal group of the first operator, there are 1-1 terminal 3305aa, 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and 1-3 terminal 3305ac. As the terminal group of the second operator, there are 2-1 terminal 3305ba, 2-2 terminal 3305bb, and 2-3 terminal 3305bc.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム３３００は、ＭＮＯネットワークとして、第１ＭＮＯネットワーク、第２ＭＮＯネットワーク、及び、第３ＭＮＯネットワークを含む。第１ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク３３０３ａと、コアネットワーク３３０３ａに接続された第１－１基地局３３０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂとを含む。第２ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク３３０３ｂと、コアネットワーク３３０３ｂに接続された第２－１基地局３３０４ｂａ及び第２－２基地局３３０４ｂｂとを含む。第３ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク３３０３ｃと、コアネットワーク３３０３ｃに接続された第３－１基地局３３０４ｃａ及び第３－２基地局３３０４ｃｂとを含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、コアネットワーク３３０３ａ、３３０３ｂ、３３０３ｃには、Ｓ－ＧＷ（Serving Gateway）、ＭＭＥ（Mobility Management Entity）等が含まれる。 The MVNO wireless communication system 3300 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks. The first MNO network includes a core network 3303a and a 1-1 base station 3304aa and a 1-2 base station 3304ab connected to the core network 3303a. The second MNO network includes a core network 3303b and a 2-1 base station 3304ba and a 2-2 base station 3304bb connected to the core network 3303b. The third MNO network includes a core network 3303c and a third base station 3304ca and a third-2 base station 3304cc connected to the core network 3303c. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the core networks 3303a, 3303b, and 3303c include S-GW (Serving Gateway), MME (Mobility Management Entity), and the like.
　ＭＶＮＯ３３０２は、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３３０３ａ、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３３０３ｂ、及び、第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３３０３ｃと接続された上位のコアネットワーク３３０２－１を、ＭＶＮＯネットワークとして含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、上位のコアネットワーク３３０２－１を構成するＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールには、Ｐ－ＧＷ（Packet Data Network Gateway）、ＨＳＳ（Home Subscriber Server）等が含まれる。 The MVNO 3302 includes the core network 3303a of the first MNO, the core network 3303b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 3302-1 connected to the core network 3303c of the third MNO as the MVNO network. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 3302-1 includes P-GW (PacketDataNetworkGateway), HSS (HomeSubscriberServer), and the like. included.
　ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置３３０２は、実施の形態３の上位のコアネットワーク３１０２－１、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２及び情報管理モジュール３１０２－７と同様の、上位のコアネットワーク３３０２－１、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３３０２－２及び情報管理モジュール３３０２－７を含む。 The MVNO network device 3302 is similar to the upper core network 3102-1, MNO selection policy table 3102-2 and information management module 3102-7 of the third embodiment, and has the same upper core network 3302-1 and MNO selection policy table 3302. -2 and the information management module 3302-7 are included.
　上位のコアネットワーク３３０２－１は、第１事業者のシステム３３０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム３３０１ｂと接続される。第１事業者のシステム３３０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム３３０１ｂは、例えば、事業者が事業者グループに属する複数の端末から情報を収集するデータサーバであってもよいし、これら収集した情報に基づいて事業者グループに属する複数の端末にサービスを提供するアプリケーションサーバであってもよい。 The upper core network 3302-1 is connected to the system 3301a of the first operator and the system 3301b of the second operator. The system 3301a of the first business operator and the system 3301b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
　端末は、実施の形態３のデータベース群及び情報管理部と同様のデータベース群及び情報管理部を備える。 The terminal includes a database group and an information management unit similar to the database group and the information management unit of the third embodiment.
　図２９を用いて、端末が自立的に行う、ＭＮＯネットワーク及び通信セッションの選択、並びに、通信セッションの確立及び切り替えを説明する。 With reference to FIG. 29, the selection of the MNO network and the communication session, and the establishment and switching of the communication session, which the terminal independently performs, will be described.
　無線通信ネットワークでは、時間毎の環境の変化や物の移動の影響を受けて、通信回線品質が時間によって変動する。また、ネットワークの障害などにより通信回線品質が著しく劣化する場合がある。そこで、端末は、端末グループ毎の通信回線品質をグループ通信情報として管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯまたはセッションの選択ポリシーに適したＭＮＯの選択、及び、通信セッションの切り替えを行う。 In wireless communication networks, the quality of communication lines fluctuates with time due to the effects of changes in the environment and movement of objects over time. In addition, the quality of the communication line may be significantly deteriorated due to a network failure or the like. Therefore, the terminal manages the communication line quality for each terminal group as group communication information, selects the MNO suitable for the MNO or the session selection policy, and switches the communication session based on the group communication information.
　例えば、第１事業者のＭＮＯまたはセッションの選択ポリシーが「通信コスト最小化」に設定されたとする。そして、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末３３０５ａａ、第１－２端末３３０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３３０５ａｃは、様々な料金プランの中で、最も低価格になるＭＮＯとして第１ＭＮＯを選択したとする。この場合、第１－１端末３１０５ａａ、第１－２端末３１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３１０５ａｃのそれぞれは、その選択結果に従い、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３３０３ａの第１－１基地局３３０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂのいずれかと無線区間の通信セッションを確立し通信する。ただし、これは例であって、事業者毎の端末グループのＭＮＯ選択は、これに制限されるものではない。 For example, suppose that the MNO or session selection policy of the first operator is set to "minimize communication cost". The 1-1 terminal 3305aa, the 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac, which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the first MNOs as the lowest priced MNOs among various rate plans. Is selected. In this case, the 1-1 terminal 3105aa, the 1-2 terminal 3105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3105ac each have the 1-1 base station 3304aa and the 1-first of the core network 3303a of the 1st MNO according to the selection result. 2 Establish and communicate with any of the base stations 3304ab in the radio section. However, this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
　ここで、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末３３０５ａａ、第１－２端末３３０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３３０５ａｃは、定期的または必要に応じて随時、伝送速度、伝送遅延量、誤り率、受信レベル、Ｓ／Ｎ等のネットワークにおける通信品質の測定やＫｅｅｐ　Ａｌｉｖｅ等による回線故障の監視を実施しているものとする。 Here, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa, the 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator have the transmission speed, the transmission delay amount, and the transmission speed and the transmission delay amount at regular intervals or as needed. It is assumed that the communication quality in the network such as error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and the line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
　また、第１－１端末３３０５ａａ、第１－２端末３３０５ａｂ、第１－３端末３３０５ａｃは、定期的にネットワークからグループ通信情報として、例えば「端末グループ全体のＭＮＯ毎の利用通信量」、「ＭＮＯ毎の通知時点での契約している通信料の単価」、「現在アクセスしているＭＮＯ毎の端末数」、「ＭＮＯ毎の一定期間内の契約最大通信量」等を受信し、データベース群に保存しているものとする。 Further, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa, the 1-2 terminal 3305ab, and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "the amount of communication used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO". Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", "Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed", "Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and puts it in the database group. It is assumed that it has been saved.
　また、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末３３０５ａａは、第１事業者の端末グループに属する他の端末である第１－２端末３３０５ａｂ及び第１－３端末３３０５ａｃと、無線通信回線３３０６－１ｃ、３３０６－１ｄによって接続されているものとする。そして、第１－１端末３３０５ａａは、第１－２端末３３０５ａｂ及び第１－３端末３３０５ａｃが第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂと通信セッションを継続していることを判断するための他の端末の接続情報を、グループ通信情報として、無線通信回線３３０６－１ｃ、３３０６－１ｄから適宜受信するものとする。 Further, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator wirelessly communicates with the other terminals 1-2 terminal 3305ab and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac which are other terminals belonging to the terminal group of the first operator. It is assumed that they are connected by lines 3306-1c and 3306-1d. Then, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa is connected to another terminal for determining that the 1-2 terminal 3305ab and the 1-3 terminal 3305ac are continuing the communication session with the 1-2 base station 3304ab. The information shall be appropriately received from the wireless communication lines 3306-1c and 3306-1d as group communication information.
　以上の場合において、第１－１端末３３０５ａａが、自身の測定結果に基づいて、第１－１基地局３３０４ａａとの無線通信回線３３０６－１ａの回線品質劣化を検出したか、または、第１－１基地局３３０４ａａとの無線通信回線３３０６－１ａが切断したとする。 In the above case, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa has detected the deterioration of the line quality of the wireless communication line 3306-1a with the 1-1 base station 3304aa based on its own measurement result, or the 1st 1-. 1 It is assumed that the wireless communication line 3306-1a with the base station 3304aa is disconnected.
　このとき、第１－１端末３３０５ａａは、他の利用できる無線通信回線の測定または検出を行い、第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂの通信回線品質と第２－１基地局３３０４ｂａの通信回線品質とを測定または検出する。 At this time, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-2 base station 3304ab and the communication line quality of the 2-1 base station 3304ba. Measure or detect.
　そして、第１－１端末３３０５ａａは、「自身で直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質」、「定期的または随時にネットワークから取得していたグループ通信情報の最新情報」、他の端末の接続情報、またはそれらの集計結果から、コストが低減できる第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３３０３ａの第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂを選択し、通信セッション確立を自立的に行う。この結果、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末３３０５ａａは、無線通信回線３３０６－１ｂを確立することで、継続して通信を行うことが可能となる。 Then, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa has "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", "latest information of group communication information acquired from the network regularly or at any time", and connection information of other terminals. , Or, from the aggregated results, select the 1-2 base station 3304ab of the core network 3303a of the first MNO whose cost can be reduced, and establish the communication session independently. As a result, the 1-1 terminal 3305aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3306-1b.
　なお、グループ通信情報のうち、ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される情報は、ＭＶＮＯ３３０２の情報管理モジュール３３０２－７で管理される情報であり、各事業者の端末グループに属する各端末から収集される情報である。さらに、グループ通信情報のうち、他の端末から定期的または随時に通知される他の端末の接続情報は、端末間通信で得られる情報である。 Of the group communication information, the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3302-7 of MVNO3302, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information. Further, among the group communication information, the connection information of other terminals notified periodically or at any time from other terminals is the information obtained by the inter-terminal communication.
　別例として、第２事業者のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが「優先度１：障害時通信継続、優先度２：通信コスト最小化」に設定されたとする。この場合、特定のＭＮＯの障害発生時においても、通信を継続できる端末を残して、サービスを最大限維持できるように、接続ＭＮＯを均一化させるＭＮＯ選択を実施する。 As another example, it is assumed that the MNO selection policy of the second operator is set to "Priority 1: Continue communication in case of failure, Priority 2: Minimize communication cost". In this case, even when a failure of a specific MNO occurs, the MNO selection is performed so that the connected MNOs are made uniform so that the service can be maintained as much as possible, leaving the terminal capable of continuing the communication.
　その動作の一例として障害発生前には、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－１端末３３０５ｂａは、第１ＭＮＯ３３０３ａの第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂと通信セッションを確立し、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂは、第２ＭＮＯ３３０３ｂの第２－２基地局３３０４ｂｂと通信セッションを確立し、第２－３端末３３０５ｂｃは、第３ＭＮＯ３３０３ｃの第３－２基地局３３０４ｃｂと通信セッションを確立し、それぞれ通信しているものとする。ただし、これは例であって、事業者毎の端末グループのＭＮＯ選択は、これに制限されるものではない。 As an example of the operation, before the failure occurs, the 2-1 terminal 3305ba belonging to the terminal group of the second operator establishes a communication session with the 1-2 base station 3304ab of the 1st MNO3303a, and the 2-2 terminal The 3305bb establishes a communication session with the 2-2 base station 3304bb of the 2nd MNO3303b, and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc establishes a communication session with the 3-2 base station 3304cc of the 3rd MNO3303c and communicates with each other. It shall be. However, this is an example, and the MNO selection of the terminal group for each operator is not limited to this.
　ここで、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－１端末３３０５ｂａ、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末３３０５ｂｃは、第１事業者の端末グループと同様、定期的または必要に応じて随時、伝送速度、伝送遅延量、誤り率、受信レベル、Ｓ／Ｎ等のネットワークにおける通信品質の測定やＫｅｅｐ　Ａｌｉｖｅ等による回線故障の監視を実施しているものとする。 Here, the 2-1 terminal 3305ba, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator are regularly or as needed like the terminal group of the first business operator. At any time, it is assumed that communication quality in the network such as transmission speed, transmission delay amount, error rate, reception level, S / N, etc. is measured and line failure is monitored by Keep Alive or the like.
　また、第２－１端末３３０５ｂａ、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末３３０５ｂｃは、定期的にネットワークからグループ通信情報として、例えば「端末グループ全体のＭＮＯ毎の利用通信量」、「ＭＮＯ毎の通知時点での契約している通信料の単価」、「現在アクセスしているＭＮＯ毎の端末数」、「ＭＮＯ毎の一定期間内の契約最大通信量」等を受信し、管理データベースに保存しているものとする。 Further, the 2-1 terminal 3305ba, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb, and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc are periodically used as group communication information from the network, for example, "traffic volume used for each MNO of the entire terminal group", "MNO". Receives "Unit price of contracted communication charges at the time of each notification", "Number of terminals for each MNO currently accessed", "Maximum contracted communication volume for each MNO within a certain period", etc., and stores them in the management database. It is assumed that it has been saved.
　また、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂは、第２事業者の端末グループに属する他の端末である第２－１端末３３０５ｂａ及び第２－３端末３３０５ｂｃと、無線通信回線３３０６－２ｃ、３３０６－２ｄによって接続されているものとする。そして、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂは、第２－１端末３３０５ｂａ及び第２－３端末３３０５ｂｃが第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂ及び第３－２基地局３３０４ｃｂと通信セッションを継続していることを判断するための他の端末の接続情報を、グループ通信情報として、無線通信回線３３０６－２ｃ、３３０６－２ｄから適宜受信するものとする。 Further, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb belonging to the terminal group of the second operator wirelessly communicates with the other terminals 2-1 terminal 3305ba and the 2-3 terminal 3305bb which belong to the terminal group of the second operator. It is assumed that they are connected by lines 3306-2c and 3306-2d. Then, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb determines that the 2-1 terminal 3305ba and the 2-3 terminal 3305bc continue the communication session with the 1-2 base station 3304ab and the 3-2 base station 3304cc. It is assumed that the connection information of other terminals for the above is appropriately received from the wireless communication lines 3306-2c and 3306-2d as group communication information.
　以上の場合において、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂが、自身の測定結果に基づいて、第２ＭＮＯ３３０３ｂの通信回線障害を検出したか、または、３３０６－２ａの無線回線障害を検出したとする。 In the above cases, it is assumed that the 2-2 terminal 3305bb has detected the communication line failure of the 2nd MNO3303b or the wireless line failure of the 3306-2a based on its own measurement result.
　このとき、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂは、他の利用できる無線通信回線の測定または検出を行い、第１－２基地局３３０４ａｂの通信回線品質と第３－１基地局３３０４ａｃの通信回線品質とを測定または検出する。 At this time, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb measures or detects other available wireless communication lines, and determines the communication line quality of the 1-2 base station 3304ab and the communication line quality of the 3-1 base station 3304ac. Measure or detect.
　そして、第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂは、「自身で直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質」、「定期的または随時に取得していたグループ通信情報の最新情報」、他の端末の接続情報、またはそれらの集計結果から、コストが低減できる第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク３３０３ｃの第３－１基地局３３０４ｃａを選択し、通信セッション確立を自立的に行う。この結果、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－２端末３３０５ｂｂは、無線通信回線３３０６－２ｂを確立することで、継続して通信を行うことが可能となる。 Then, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb is "communication line quality measured or detected immediately before by itself", "latest information of group communication information acquired regularly or at any time", connection information of other terminals, or From the aggregated results, the 3-1 base station 3304ca of the core network 3303c of the third MNO whose cost can be reduced is selected, and the communication session is established independently. As a result, the 2-2 terminal 3305bb belonging to the terminal group of the second operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 3306-2b.
　なお、グループ通信情報のうち、ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される情報は、ＭＶＮＯ３３０２の情報管理モジュール３３０２－７で管理される情報であり、各事業者の端末グループに属する各端末から収集される情報である。さらに、グループ通信情報のうち、他の端末から定期的または随時に通知される他の端末の接続情報は、端末間通信で得られる情報である。 Of the group communication information, the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is the information managed by the information management module 3302-7 of MVNO3302, and is collected from each terminal belonging to the terminal group of each business operator. Information. Further, among the group communication information, the connection information of other terminals notified periodically or at any time from other terminals is the information obtained by the inter-terminal communication.
　次に、図３０～図３２を用いて、ネットワークから得られる通信品質及び障害情報等のグループ通信情報に基づいて、接続先ＭＮＯを選択する動作例について説明する。図３０～図３２の例では、端末が、グループ通信情報を自身で測定または検出するか、３つのＭＮＯネットワーク（第１～第３ＭＮＯネットワーク）と接続したＭＶＮＯを用いて、ネットワークからグループ通信情報を取得する、図３０～図３２には、端末が、グループ通信情報に基づいて、端末グループ毎の通信が適切となるように、自立的に１つのＭＮＯ及び通信セッションを選択し、通信セッションを確立または切り替えるシーケンスの一例が示されている。 Next, an operation example of selecting a connection destination MNO based on group communication information such as communication quality and failure information obtained from the network will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. In the example of FIGS. 30 to 32, the terminal measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or uses the MVNO connected to the three MNO networks (first to third MNO networks) to obtain the group communication information from the network. In FIGS. 30 to 32, the terminal autonomously selects one MNO and a communication session based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group becomes appropriate, and establishes the communication session. Alternatively, an example of a switching sequence is shown.
　事業者は、ステップＳ３４０１にて、通信を開始する前に、ＭＶＮＯに対して、自己の端末グループの端末の登録と、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの設定とを行う。この登録及び設定は、電気通信回線を経由するメッセージによって行われてもよい。その際、ＭＶＮＯに重大な障害を発生させてしまう可能性をある登録及び設定はできないようにするのが望ましい。例えば、メニューを選択するインタフェースをＭＶＮＯに設けることなどにより、誤操作によって重大な障害が発生しないようにする。 In step S3401, the business operator registers the terminal of its own terminal group and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO before starting the communication. This registration and setting may be performed by a message via a telecommunication line. At that time, it is desirable to prevent registration and setting that may cause a serious failure in the MVNO. For example, by providing an interface for selecting a menu in the MVNO, it is possible to prevent a serious failure due to an erroneous operation.
　端末は、電源投入後、自らのＳＩＭ（Subscriber Identity Module）にアクセスして、ＰＬＭＮ（Public Land Mobile Network）サーチを行い、規定の手順に従って接続先となるＭＮＯを選択する。この結果として第１ＭＮＯが選択された場合、端末は、ステップＳ３４０２にて第１ＭＮＯに接続要求を送信する。端末が、ステップＳ３４０３にて第１ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信すると、無線の接続経路が確立する。本変形例１では、ＭＶＮＯがＨＳＳ等の認証機能を有しているため、ＭＶＮＯが、ステップＳ３４０４にて端末に認証要求を送信し、端末が、ステップＳ３４０５にてＭＶＮＯに認証応答を送信することで、端末とＭＶＮＯとの間で認証処理が行われる。必要に応じて、これらのメッセージの送受信は複数のステップで行われてもよいし、ＭＮＯのＨＳＳとＭＶＮＯのＨＳＳとの間で連携が行われてもよい。以上のようにして端末とＭＶＮＯとの間のセッションが確立される。同様の処理がグループ内の全端末においても実施される。 After turning on the power, the terminal accesses its own SIM (Subscriber Identity Module), performs a PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) search, and selects the MNO to be connected according to the specified procedure. When the first MNO is selected as a result of this, the terminal transmits a connection request to the first MNO in step S3402. When the terminal receives the connection response from the first MNO in step S3403, the wireless connection path is established. In the first modification, since the MVNO has an authentication function such as HSS, the MVNO transmits an authentication request to the terminal in step S3404, and the terminal transmits an authentication response to the MVNO in step S3405. Then, the authentication process is performed between the terminal and the MVNO. If necessary, transmission and reception of these messages may be performed in a plurality of steps, or cooperation may be performed between the HSS of the MNO and the HSS of the MVNO. As described above, the session between the terminal and the MVNO is established. The same process is performed on all terminals in the group.
　第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯは、ステップＳ３４０６にて、以上により確立した端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対して通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出する。 The first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO measure or detect the communication line quality and failure information for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group established above in step S3406.
　ステップＳ３４０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、各端末からの信号を第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局において受信して得られる無線回線の品質情報、すなわち、受信電力、ＳＩＮＲ（Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio）、ＢＬＥＲ（BLock Error Rate）等であってもよいし、無線回線の同期状態に関連する情報（初期同期中／同期／同期外れ等）であってもよい。または、ステップＳ３４０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、無線レイヤ２レベルのＡＲＱ（Automatic Repeat-Request）／ＨＡＲＱ（Hybrid ARQ）の再送回数や、ＳＮ（Sequence Number）の番号飛び検出情報等でもよい。または、ステップＳ３４０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、セッションの状態に関する情報（正常／断等）でもよいし、伝送速度、伝送遅延量であってもよい。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 are, for example, radio line quality information obtained by receiving signals from each terminal at the base stations of the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO, that is, received power and SINR (Signal). -to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLockError Rate), etc., or information related to the synchronization status of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.) may be used. .. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, or the like. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
　または、ステップＳ３４０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、ネットワーク全体での保守管理情報及び機器障害情報（各ＭＮＯにおける一部装置における異常輻輳、機器損傷情報、保守等による信号閉塞情報、試験動作中等のステータス情報）であってもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be, for example, maintenance management information and device failure information for the entire network (abnormal congestion in some devices in each MNO, device damage information, signal blockage information due to maintenance, test operation, etc.). Moderate status information).
　または、ステップＳ３４０６の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、端末から送信されたＭＶＮＯで受信されることが予測される信号の到着有無であってもよい。より具体的には、ＭＶＮＯからヘルスチェック信号を送信してそれに対応する応答が規定時間内に返ってこなかったとき通信回線品質が悪いと判断されてもよい。 Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3406 may be, for example, the arrival or absence of a signal predicted to be received by the MVNO transmitted from the terminal. More specifically, when the health check signal is transmitted from the MVNO and the corresponding response is not returned within the specified time, it may be determined that the communication line quality is poor.
　セッションを確立した端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末は、ステップＳ３４０７にて自ら通信回線品質及び障害情報を測定または検出する。そして、少なくとも１つ以上の端末は、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに、通信回線品質及び障害情報を送信する。 At least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group for which the session has been established measures or detects the communication line quality and failure information by themselves in step S3407. Then, at least one or more terminals transmit communication line quality and failure information to the MVNO via the first MNO, the second MNO, and the third MNO.
　ステップＳ３４０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、各端末において受信して得られる無線回線の品質情報、すなわち、受信電力、ＳＩＮＲ（Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio）、ＢＬＥＲ（BLock Error Rate）等であってもよいし、無線回線の同期状態に関連する情報（初期同期中／同期／同期外れ等）であってもよい。または、ステップＳ３４０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、無線レイヤ２レベルのＡＲＱ（Automatic Repeat-Request）／ＨＡＲＱ（Hybrid ARQ）の再送回数や、ＳＮ（Sequence Number）の番号飛び検出情報等でもよい。または、ステップＳ３４０７の通信回線品質及び障害情報は、例えば、セッションの状態に関する情報（正常／断等）でもよいし、伝送速度、伝送遅延量であってもよい。 The communication line quality and failure information in step S3407 are, for example, the quality information of the wireless line received and obtained at each terminal, that is, the received power, SINR (Signal-to-interference-plus-Noise ratio), BLER (BLock Error). Rate) or the like, or information related to the synchronization state of the wireless line (initial synchronization / synchronization / out of synchronization, etc.). Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3407 may be wireless layer 2 level ARQ (Automatic Repeat-Request) / HARQ (Hybrid ARQ) retransmission count, SN (Sequence Number) number skip detection information, and the like. Alternatively, the communication line quality and failure information in step S3407 may be, for example, information regarding the session status (normal / disconnected, etc.), transmission speed, or transmission delay amount.
　なお、図３０～図３２のシーケンス図において図示を省略しているが、ＭＶＮＯは、端末グループ毎に接続費用に関する情報を定期的または随時に更新しているものとする。 Although not shown in the sequence diagrams of FIGS. 30 to 32, it is assumed that the MVNO updates the information on the connection cost for each terminal group regularly or at any time.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システムに属する端末は、ステップＳ３４０８にて、ＭＶＮＯから定期的または随時に通知されるグループ通信情報を受信する。また、端末が、通信回線品質の劣化や障害の発生を検出した場合などには、端末が、ステップＳ３４０９－１にてグループ通信情報要求をＭＶＮＯに送信し、その要求を受けたＭＶＮＯが、ステップＳ３４０９－２にてグループ通信情報を端末に送信し、端末がこのグループ通信情報を受信してもよい。 The terminal belonging to the MVNO wireless communication system receives the group communication information notified from the MVNO periodically or at any time in step S3408. Further, when the terminal detects the deterioration of the communication line quality or the occurrence of a failure, the terminal transmits a group communication information request to the MVNO in step S34091, and the MVNO receiving the request steps. The group communication information may be transmitted to the terminal in S3409-2, and the terminal may receive the group communication information.
　必要に応じて、同一端末グループ内の端末同士が、ステップＳ３４１７にてＤｉｒｅｃｔ　Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎを行って、他の端末の接続情報を、グループ通信情報として送受信する。以降、ステップＳ３４０８と、ステップＳ３４０９（ステップＳ３４０９－１及びステップＳ３４０９－２）と、ステップＳ３４１７と、の少なくともいずれか１つが定期的または随時に行われる。 If necessary, terminals in the same terminal group perform Direct Communication in step S3417 to send and receive connection information of other terminals as group communication information. After that, at least one of step S3408, step S3409 (step S3409-1 and step S3409-2), and step S3417 is performed regularly or at any time.
　ここで図３０～図３２に例として示すように、ステップＳ３４１０にて、第１ＭＮＯの通信回線品質劣化、または、第１ＭＮＯのネットワーク障害が、第１ＭＮＯと端末との間の通信において発生したと仮定する。 Here, as shown as an example in FIGS. 30 to 32, it is assumed that the communication line quality deterioration of the first MNO or the network failure of the first MNO occurred in the communication between the first MNO and the terminal in step S3410. To do.
　この場合、端末は、ステップＳ３４１１にて、それまでに端末自身で測定、または、ネットワークもしくは他の端末から定期的もしくは随時に通知されていた「グループ通信情報」に基づいて、第１ＭＮＯとの通信回線の障害または品質劣化を検出する。この検出は、第１ＭＮＯの基地局、または、第１ＭＮＯの切り替えトリガーとして用いられる。 In this case, in step S3411, the terminal communicates with the first MNO based on the "group communication information" measured by the terminal itself or notified periodically or at any time from the network or another terminal. Detect line failures or quality degradation. This detection is used as a base station of the first MNO or as a switching trigger of the first MNO.
　次に端末は、ステップＳ３４１２以降の処理を行うことによって、通信を再開または継続する。具体的には、端末は、ステップＳ３４１２にて、定期的または随時に取得していたグループ通信情報から、これまで通信していた第１ＭＮＯの別基地局、第２ＭＮＯの基地局、及び、第３ＭＮＯの基地局について、同期チャネル、及び、ブロードキャストチャネルを測定することを決定する。そして、端末は、ステップＳ３４１３にて、それらの同期チャネル、及び、ブロードキャストチャネルを測定する。 Next, the terminal resumes or continues communication by performing the processing after step S3412. Specifically, the terminal uses the group communication information acquired periodically or at any time in step S3412 to obtain another base station of the first MNO, a base station of the second MNO, and a third MNO that have been communicating so far. It is decided to measure the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel for the base station of. Then, in step S3413, the terminal measures their synchronization channel and broadcast channel.
　端末は、ステップＳ３４１４にて、測定結果に基づいて、第１ＭＮＯの別基地局、第２ＭＮＯの基地局、及び、第３ＭＮＯの基地局のいずれかへの切り替え選択を行う。この際、端末は、必要に応じてｅＳＩＭ変更等も行う。 In step S3414, the terminal selects to switch to one of the first MNO base station, the second MNO base station, and the third MNO base station based on the measurement result. At this time, the terminal also changes the eSIM as necessary.
　端末は、切り替え選択の結果に戻づいて、ステップＳ３４１５－１ａ～ステップＳ３４１６－２ａの第１処理、ステップＳ３４１５－１ｂ～ステップＳ３４１６－２ｂの第２処理、及び、ステップＳ３４１５－１ｃ～ステップＳ３４１６－２ｃの第３処理のいずれかを行う。なお、これら第１処理～第３処理は、実施の形態３で説明した第１処理～第３処理（図２８のステップＳ３４１５－１ａ～ステップＳ３４１６－２ｃ）と同じである。 The terminal returns to the result of the switching selection, the first process of step S3415-1a to step S3412-2a, the second process of step S3415-1b to step S3412-2b, and step S3415-1c to step S3416-. Perform any of the third processing of 2c. The first to third processes are the same as the first to third processes (steps S3415-1a to S3416-2c in FIG. 28) described in the third embodiment.
　以上のような本変形例１に係る無線通信システムによれば、端末は、グループ通信情報を、当該端末と同じ端末グループに属する他の端末と、グループ通信情報を共有し、活用することができる。このため、端末グループ内の端末が無線及び有線を含む通信回線品質を適切に保つこと、及び、通信を継続することが可能となる。 According to the wireless communication system according to the first modification as described above, the terminal can share and utilize the group communication information with other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal. .. Therefore, the terminals in the terminal group can maintain appropriate communication line quality including wireless and wired, and can continue communication.
　＜実施の形態３の変形例２＞
　図３３及び図３４を用いて、実施の形態３の変形例２に係る無線通信システムが備えるＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置及び無線通信端末の構成要素について説明する。なお、本変形例２に係る無線通信システムは、実施の形態３、及び、実施の形態３の変形例１の全てを実現可能となっている。なお、実施の形態３、及び、実施の形態３の変形例１のいずれかだけが実現される場合には、以下で説明する構成要素は適宜省略される。 <Modification 2 of Embodiment 3>
33 and 34 will be used to describe the components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the third embodiment. The wireless communication system according to the second modification can realize all of the third embodiment and the first modification of the third embodiment. When only one of the third embodiment and the first modification of the third embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
　図３３は、本変形例２に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置３１０２の構成を示すブロック図である。ＭＶＮＯ３１０２は、一般にサーバ上のソフトウェアモジュール群として構成される。 FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 3102 according to the second modification. The MVNO3102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
　図３３における上位のコアネットワーク３１０２－１は、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールから構成される。そして、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールは、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール３１０２－９と、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール３１０２－１０と、事業者インタフェースモジュール３１０２－１１とを含む。 The upper core network 3102-1 in FIG. 33 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module. The MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 3102-9, a PGW function module 3102-10, and a business operator interface module 3102-11.
　事業者インタフェースモジュール３１０２－１１は、各事業者間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行う。事業者インタフェースモジュール３１０２－１１は、ＭＶＮＯ内外のルート制御を行い、事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０２－６へのアクセスが可能であり、必要に応じてＭＶＮＯ外部のインターネットに接続するように構成することも有効である。 The operator interface module 3102-11 balances between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them. The operator interface module 3102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 3102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
　ＰＧＷ機能モジュール３１０２－１０は、ＩＰアドレスの割当やＩＰパケットの伝達品質制御を行うとともに、ＭＮＯの情報管理モジュール３１０２－７の指示に従いＭＮＯの切り替えを行う。ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール３１０２－９は、各ＭＮＯ間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行うとともに、ＨＳＳモジュール３１０２－３とのアクセスが可能である。 The PGW function module 3102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of the IP packet, and switches the MNO according to the instruction of the MNO information management module 3102-7. The MNO interface module 3102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 3102-3.
　事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０２－６は、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２と、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－４とを含む。端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２は、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯをどのようなポリシーで切り替えをするかを設定するためのテーブルである。端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－４は、事業者のアプリケーションを供する端末接続装置の特性を考慮して当該端末接続装置と接続する端末のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーを設定するためのテーブルである。 The operator request management control module 3102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 3102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 3102-4 for inter-terminal association. The MNO selection policy table 3102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting what kind of policy is used to switch the MNO for each terminal group. The MNO selection policy table 3102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
　例えば、事業者インタフェースモジュール３１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループについて「安いＭＮＯと接続」という設定指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２に格納される。また、事業者インタフェースモジュール３１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループの端末間関連の端末接続装置毎重要度リスト、及び、端末間接続装置の重要度序列考慮指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－４に格納される。 For example, when a setting instruction "Connect with a cheap MNO" is sent to the operator request management control module 3102-6 for a terminal group having the first operator via the operator interface module 3102-11, the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 3102-2. In addition, via the operator interface module 3102-11, the operator issues a list of importance for each terminal connection device related to each terminal of the terminal group in which the first operator is located, and an instruction to consider the importance order of the terminal-to-terminal connection devices. When the request management control module 3102-6 is reached, the information is stored in the MNO selection policy table 3102-4.
　ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール３１０２－８は、例えば、各ＭＮＯの課金情報（従量課金であったり、特定期間定額であったり、特定の通信量までは定額でそれ以上の通信量には従量課金である等の定量的情報）、各ＭＮＯから通知される運用停止アナウンス情報や、各ＭＮＯの保守機能部からの一部装置における異常輻輳や機器損傷情報等の情報を情報管理モジュール３１０２－７に通知する。また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２、３１０２－４において、事業者からの遠隔書き込み機能が無い場合に、これらテーブルにセキュアに書き込みを行うときには、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール３１０２－８による書き込みが行われる。このとき、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール３１０２－８によって、ＨＳＳモジュール３１０２－３へのセキュアな書き込みも行われてもよい。 The MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8 is, for example, billing information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, flat-rate for a specific period, flat-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the information management module 3102-7. Further, in the MNO selection policy table 3102-2, 3102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator, when writing to these tables securely, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 3102-3.
　端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール３１０２－３には、基本的に各事業者から直接書き込みができない。ＨＳＳモジュール３１０２－３で管理している端末情報が書き換えられるときには、対象の端末のＳＩＭの書き換えも合わせて行われる。例えば、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーと連動して認証アルゴリズムを異なるものに変更する書き換えは有効である。このように構成した場合には、高い信頼性を求めるポリシーのときに、高い認証アルゴリズムを提供することができるので、事業者からの設定ミスが発生しても重大なシステム障害を発生させずにサービスの提供が可能となる。 Basically, it is not possible to write directly to the HSS module 3102-3, which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator. When the terminal information managed by the HSS module 3102-3 is rewritten, the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective. With this configuration, a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
　情報管理モジュール３１０２－７は、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール３１０２－９、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール３１０２－１０を経由して、端末グループに属する端末及び他の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を収集する。そして、情報管理モジュール３１０２－７は、ネットワークモニタデータベース３１０２－１３と、端末モニタデータベース３１０２－１４と、課金情報用データベース３１０２－１５とを含むデータベース群に、グループ通信情報を格納する。以下、グループ通信情報及びデータベース群について説明する。 The information management module 3102-7 collects group communication information, which is information related to communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals, via the MNO interface module 3102-9 and the PGW function module 3102-10. Then, the information management module 3102-7 stores the group communication information in the database group including the network monitor database 3102-13, the terminal monitor database 3102-14, and the billing information database 3102-15. The group communication information and the database group will be described below.
　ネットワークモニタデータベース３１０２－１３には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対してネットワークで測定または検出した情報（通信回線品質及び障害情報、並びに、端末がどの経路で接続されているかを示す接続情報）が収集及び格納される。なお、ここでいうネットワークは、各ＭＮＯネットワークであるものとするが、これに限ったものではなく、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークであればよい。 The network monitor database 3102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored. The network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
　端末モニタデータベース３１０２－１４には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末が自ら測定または検出し、各ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに定期的または随時に送信する、通信回線品質及び障害情報が収集及び格納される。 The terminal monitor database 3102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
　課金情報用データベース３１０２－１５には、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール３１０２－８から指定される各ＭＮＯの課金情報、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール３１０２－１０から入手される各端末の課金対象データの通信量（データ伝送量）等が収集及び格納される。 In the billing information database 3102-15, the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 3102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 3102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
　情報管理モジュール３１０２－７は、以上によって収集及び格納されたグループ通信情報を、端末グループ毎及び端末毎に定期的または随時に端末に通知する。また、情報管理モジュール３１０２－７は、任意の端末グループに属する任意の端末から、グループ通信情報要求を受信した場合に、これに応じて、グループ通信情報要求を送信した端末に、グループ通信情報を送信する。 The information management module 3102-7 notifies the terminal of the group communication information collected and stored as described above periodically or at any time for each terminal group and each terminal. Further, when the information management module 3102-7 receives a group communication information request from an arbitrary terminal belonging to an arbitrary terminal group, the information management module 3102-7 sends group communication information to the terminal that has transmitted the group communication information request in response to the group communication information request. Send.
　図３４は、実施の形態３の端末３１０５ａａ～３１０５ｂｃ（図２５）などのうちの１つに相当する、本変形例２に係る端末３１０５の構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 3105 according to the second modification, which corresponds to one of the terminals 3105aa to 3105bc (FIG. 25) of the third embodiment.
　送受信機３１０５－２は、アンテナ３１０５－１で受信した信号に、無線周波数から信号帯域へのダウンコンバートと、復調及び誤り訂正等のように受信の無線レイヤ１の処理とを行う。データ加工部３１０５－３は、送受信機３１０５－２からの信号に、ＨＡＲＱやユーザフレームの復元等のように受信の無線レイヤ２の処理を行う。 The transmitter / receiver 3105-2 performs down-conversion of the signal received by the antenna 3105-1 from the radio frequency to the signal band, and processing of the received radio layer 1 such as demodulation and error correction. The data processing unit 3105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 3105-2 in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame.
　端末接続装置インタフェース３１０５－４は、外部装置である端末接続装置に合わせたインタフェース整合を行う。端末接続装置は、例えば、センサー、カメラ、ＰＬＣ（Programmable Logic Controller）、パソコン等、または、これらと一体化されたＡＧＶ（Automated Guided Vehicle）、車、ロボット、ドローン等である。 The terminal connection device interface 3105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device. The terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller), a personal computer, or an AGV (Automated Guided Vehicle) integrated with these, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like.
　送受信機３１０５－２の通信方式は、ＬＴＥ方式であってもよいし、５Ｇ方式であってもよいし、衛星移動体通信のネットワークであってもよいし、ＭＶＮＯが組み込み得るどの無線方式でもよい。 The communication system of the transmitter / receiver 3105-2 may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any wireless system that the MVNO can incorporate. ..
　プロセッサ３１０５－５は、端末全体を制御し、メモリ３１０５－７と連携して、プログラムの動作及び格納、並びに、データ及びログの格納を行う。また、図３４の例のように、端末３１０５が、画面表示や、ＬＥＤなどヒューマンインタフェース３１０５－８を備える構成では、トラブル時の原因究明等を容易に行うことができる。この際、端末３１０５で測定または検出された通信回線品質及び障害情報は、プロセッサ３１０５－５でメッセージとして形成され、データ加工部３１０５－３、送受信機３１０５－２、アンテナ３１０５－１を経由してＭＶＮＯに送信される。 The processor 3105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 3105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 34, in the configuration in which the terminal 3105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 3105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble. At this time, the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 3105 are formed as a message by the processor 3105-5, and pass through the data processing unit 3105-3, the transmitter / receiver 3105-2, and the antenna 3105-1. It is sent to the MVNO.
　ＭＶＮＯの端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール３１０２－３（図３３）と協働するＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ３１０５－６は、暗号化の鍵を払い出す認証機能を有する。事業者のアプリケーションで遠隔からデフォルトで選択する認証方式は、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭにより指定されるか、または、端末上のハードウェアもしくはソフトウェアによるＤＩＰＳＷにより指定される。このような指定により、無線規格上認証方式の設定ビットが通常使用＝デフォルトとなっているとき、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を事業者が選択することができる。 The SIM / eSIM3105-6 that cooperates with the HSS module 3102-3 (Fig. 33), which is the terminal information management control module of the MVNO, has an authentication function that issues an encryption key. The authentication method that is remotely selected by default in the application of the operator is specified by SIM / eSIM or by DIPSW by hardware or software on the terminal. With such a designation, when the setting bit of the authentication method in the wireless standard is normally used = default, the operator can select the authentication method to be used by default.
　なお、複数通りの認証アルゴリズムを物理的にＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ上に実装しておき、外部から選択可能としてもよい。具体的には、３ＧＰＰ対応の無線システムでは通常、デフォルト設定としてＭｉｌｅｎａｇｅが使用されている。このような場合に、例えば、事業者が認証方式指定メッセージを送信し、特殊認証方式を指定したときに、当該メッセージの内容をＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ３１０５－６に伝えることで、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を変更できるようにしてもよい。通常の規格では認証方式そのものは多数設定することができないが、上記により、事業者毎に異なる認証方式を実現することができるので、信頼性が高いネットワークシステムを構築できる。 Note that a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside. Specifically, in a 3GPP compatible wireless system, Milenage is usually used as the default setting. In such a case, for example, when the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method, the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM3105-6 to set the authentication method to be used by default. It may be possible to change it. Although it is not possible to set a large number of authentication methods themselves in a normal standard, it is possible to realize a different authentication method for each business operator, so that a highly reliable network system can be constructed.
　ここで、端末３１０５は、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２の情報管理モジュール３１０２－７（図３３）から、定期的または随時に端末３１０５に通知されるグループ通信情報を、アンテナ３１０５－１で受信する。アンテナ３１０５－１で受信されたグループ通信情報は、送受信機３１０５－２、データ加工部３１０５－３、プロセッサ３１０５－５等を介して、データベース群を含む切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９に出力される。切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９は、受け取ったグループ通信情報を、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９のデータベース群に分類して蓄積する。なお、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９のデータベース群は、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２の情報管理モジュール３１０２－７（図３３）のデータベース群と概ね同じであり、ネットワークモニタデータベース３１０５－９ａと、端末モニタデータベース３１０５－９ｂと、課金情報用データベース３１０５－９ｃとを含んでいる。 Here, the terminal 3105 receives the group communication information notified to the terminal 3105 periodically or at any time from the information management module 3102-7 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO 3102 by the antenna 3105-1. The group communication information received by the antenna 3105-1 is output to the switching control module 3105-9 including the database group via the transmitter / receiver 3105-2, the data processing unit 3105-3, the processor 3105-5, and the like. The switching control module 3105-9 classifies the received group communication information into the database group of the switching control module 3105-9 and stores it. The database group of the switching control module 3105-9 is almost the same as the database group of the information management module 3102-7 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO3102, and the network monitor database 3105-9a, the terminal monitor database 3105-9b, and so on. It includes a billing information database 3105-9c.
　また、端末３１０５の切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９は、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２の情報管理モジュール３１０２－７（図３３）に対して、グループ通信情報要求を送信する。端末３１０５は、当該情報管理モジュール３１０２－７から端末３１０５に通知されるグループ通信情報を、アンテナ３１０５－１で受信する。この場合にアンテナ３１０５－１で受信されたグループ通信情報も、上記と同様に、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９によって、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９のデータベース群に分類して蓄積される。 Further, the switching control module 3105-9 of the terminal 3105 transmits a group communication information request to the information management module 3102-7 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO 3102. The terminal 3105 receives the group communication information notified from the information management module 3102-7 to the terminal 3105 by the antenna 3105-1. In this case, the group communication information received by the antenna 3105-1 is also classified and stored in the database group of the switching control module 3105-9 by the switching control module 3105-9 in the same manner as described above.
　端末３１０５の事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０５－１０及びそれに含まれるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０５－１０ａ、３１０５－１０ｂは、ＭＶＮＯ３１０２の事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０２－６（図３３）及びそれに含まれるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０２－２、３１０２－４と同様である。端末３１０５の事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０５－１０に含まれる、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０５－１０ａ、及び、端末間関連付用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０５－１０ｂは、端末保守機能モジュール３１０５－１１を介して端末保守端末等によって書き込まれる。 The operator request management control module 3105-10 of the terminal 3105 and the MNO selection policy tables 3105-10a and 3105-10b included therein are the operator request management control module 3102-6 (FIG. 33) of the MVNO 3102 and the MNO selection included therein. It is the same as the policy table 3102-2, 3102-4. The MNO selection policy table 3105-10a for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 3105-10b for inter-terminal association included in the operator request management control module 3105-10 of the terminal 3105 are the terminal maintenance function module 3105. Written by a terminal maintenance terminal or the like via -11.
　情報管理部である切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９は、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９に収集されたグループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル３１０５－１０ａ、３１０５－１０ｂのＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した、１つのＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの選択、並びに、セッションの確立または切り替えを自立的に行う。 The switching control module 3105-9, which is an information management unit, is suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy tables 3105-10a and 3105-10b based on the group communication information collected in the switching control module 3105-9. Select one MNO network and session, and establish or switch sessions independently.
　なお、ＭＶＮＯ保守端末は、端末保守機能モジュール３１０５－１１を介して、事業者要望管理制御モジュール３１０５－１０にアクセスして、書き込みまたは読み出しを行ってもよい。また、ＭＶＮＯ保守端末は、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９及びＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭにアクセスして、読み込みまたは書き込みを行ってもよい。このように構成した場合には、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９のＭＮＯ切り替え制御アルゴリズムの変更や、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭのサービスに関するパラメータの変更が可能となる。 The MVNO maintenance terminal may access the operator request management control module 3105-10 via the terminal maintenance function module 3105-11 to write or read. Further, the MVNO maintenance terminal may access the switching control module 3105-9 and SIM / eSIM to read or write. With this configuration, it is possible to change the MNO switching control algorithm of the switching control module 3105-9 and change the parameters related to the SIM / eSIM service.
　なお、実施の形態３の変形例１のような端末間通信を行う場合には、ＭＮＯの基地局との通信に用いる周波数帯と異なる周波数帯で端末間通信を行えばよい。具体的には、アンテナ３１０５－１及び送受信機３１０５－２の周波数帯と異なる周波数帯を用いる、これら機器とは別系統のアンテナ及び送受信機を端末３１０５に設ければよい。データ加工部３１０５－３は、基地局との通信用にデータ加工する機器と、端末間通信用にデータ加工する別系統の機器とを組み合わせて構成されてもよいし、基地局との通信用及び端末間通信用に両方についてデータ加工する機器から構成されてもよい。端末３１０５の構成のうち、これら以外のモジュール及びデバイスは、基地局との通信及び端末間通信について共用されればよい。 When performing terminal-to-terminal communication as in the first modification of the third embodiment, terminal-to-terminal communication may be performed in a frequency band different from the frequency band used for communication with the MNO base station. Specifically, the terminal 3105 may be provided with an antenna and a transmitter / receiver of a system different from those of these devices, which use a frequency band different from the frequency bands of the antenna 3105-1 and the transmitter / receiver 3105-2. The data processing unit 3105-3 may be configured by combining a device that processes data for communication with the base station and a device of another system that processes data for communication between terminals, or is used for communication with the base station. And may consist of equipment that processes data for both for terminal-to-terminal communication. Of the configuration of the terminal 3105, modules and devices other than these may be shared for communication with the base station and communication between terminals.
　このような構成によれば、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９に含まれる、ネットワークモニタデータベース３１０５－９ａ、端末モニタデータベース３１０５－９ｂ、及び、課金情報用データベース３１０５－９ｃには、端末間通信から得たグループ通信情報を格納することができる。そして、切り替え制御モジュール３１０５－９は、当該グループ通信情報を用いたＭＮＯ切り替え制御を行うことが可能となる。 According to such a configuration, the network monitor database 3105-9a, the terminal monitor database 3105-9b, and the billing information database 3105-9c included in the switching control module 3105-9 are obtained from terminal-to-terminal communication. Group communication information can be stored. Then, the switching control module 3105-9 can perform MNO switching control using the group communication information.
　＜実施の形態４＞
　図３５は、本実施の形態４に係る無線通信システム４１００の例示的な構成を示す図である。無線通信システム４１００は、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供するシステムであり、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置４１０２と、複数の無線通信端末４１０５ａａ、４１０５ａｂ、４１０５ａｃ、４１０５ｂａ、４１０５ｂｂ、４１０５ｂｃとを備える。なお、複数の無線通信端末に含まれる、１つの無線通信端末と、他の無線通信端末とは端末グループを構成している。 <Embodiment 4>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 4100 according to the fourth embodiment. The wireless communication system 4100 is a system that provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator, and includes an MVNO network device 4102 and a plurality of wireless communication terminals 4105aa, 4105ab, 4105ac, 4105ba, 4105bb, 4105bc. It should be noted that one wireless communication terminal included in the plurality of wireless communication terminals and the other wireless communication terminals form a terminal group.
　本実施の形態４では、無線通信端末４１０５ａａなどの端末が、グループ通信情報を自身で測定または検出するか、ネットワークからグループ通信情報を取得する。そして、端末グループ毎の通信が適切となるように、端末が、グループ通信情報に基づいて、当該端末について選択されるＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの数（１つ以上の数）を決定し、当該端末について決定した数のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの選択、並びに、セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を自立的に行う。以下、そのような本実施の形態４について説明する。 In the fourth embodiment, a terminal such as the wireless communication terminal 4105aa measures or detects the group communication information by itself, or acquires the group communication information from the network. Then, the terminal determines the number of MNO networks and sessions (one or more) selected for the terminal based on the group communication information so that the communication for each terminal group is appropriate, and for the terminal. It autonomously controls the selection of a determined number of MNO networks and sessions, and the establishment or switching of sessions. Hereinafter, such a fourth embodiment will be described.
　図３５の例では、ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム４１００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者と第２事業者とが存在している。第１事業者の端末グループとして、第１－１端末４１０５ａａ、第１－２端末４１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃが存在している。第２事業者の端末グループとして、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂ、及び、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃが存在している。 In the example of FIG. 35, there are a first business operator and a second business operator as businesses that use the MVNO wireless communication system 4100. As the terminal group of the first operator, there are 1-1 terminal 4105aa, 1-2 terminal 4105ab, and 1-3 terminal 4105ac. As the terminal group of the second operator, there are 2-1 terminal 4105ba, 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and 2-3 terminal 4105bc.
　ＭＶＮＯの無線通信システム４１００は、ＭＮＯネットワークとして、第１ＭＮＯネットワーク、第２ＭＮＯネットワーク、及び、第３ＭＮＯネットワークを含む。第１ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク４１０３ａと、コアネットワーク４１０３ａに接続された第１－１基地局４１０４ａａ及び第１－２基地局４１０４ａｂとを含む。第２ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク４１０３ｂと、コアネットワーク４１０３ｂに接続された第２－１基地局４１０４ｂａ及び第２－２基地局４１０４ｂｂとを含む。第３ＭＮＯネットワークは、コアネットワーク４１０３ｃと、コアネットワーク４１０３ｃに接続された第３－１基地局４１０４ｃａ及び第３－２基地局４１０４ｃｂとを含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、コアネットワーク４１０３ａ、４１０３ｂ、４１０３ｃには、Ｓ－ＧＷ、ＭＭＥ等が含まれる。 The MVNO wireless communication system 4100 includes a first MNO network, a second MNO network, and a third MNO network as MNO networks. The first MNO network includes a core network 4103a and a 1-1 base station 4104aa and a 1-2 base station 4104ab connected to the core network 4103a. The second MNO network includes a core network 4103b and a 2-1 base station 4104ba and a 2-2 base station 4104bb connected to the core network 4103b. The third MNO network includes a core network 4103c and a third base station 4104ca and a third-2 base station 4104cc connected to the core network 4103c. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the core networks 4103a, 4103b, 4103c include S-GW, MME, and the like.
　ＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置４１０２は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末４１０５ａａ、４１０５ａｂ、４１０５ａｃ、４１０５ｂａ、４１０５ｂｂ、４１０５ｂｃと無線通信を行う。 The MVNO network device 4102 performs wireless communication with wireless communication terminals 4105aa, 4105ab, 4105ac, 4105ba, 4105bb, 4105bc that can be connected to the MVNO network in the MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks.
　ＭＶＮＯ４１０２は、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ａ、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ｂ、及び、第３ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ｃと接続された上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１を、ＭＶＮＯネットワークとして含む。例えば、無線通信システムがＬＴＥ方式のシステムであれば、上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１を構成するＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールには、Ｐ－ＧＷ、ＨＳＳ等が含まれる。 The MVNO 4102 includes the core network 4103a of the first MNO, the core network 4103b of the second MNO, and the upper core network 4102-1 connected to the core network 4103c of the third MNO as the MVNO network. For example, if the wireless communication system is an LTE system, the MVNO mainstream processing module constituting the upper core network 4102-1 includes P-GW, HSS, and the like.
　上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１は、第１事業者のシステム４１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム４１０１ｂと接続される。第１事業者のシステム４１０１ａ、及び、第２事業者のシステム４１０１ｂは、例えば、事業者が事業者グループに属する複数の端末から情報を収集するデータサーバであってもよいし、これら収集した情報に基づいて事業者グループに属する複数の端末にサービスを提供するアプリケーションサーバであってもよい。 The upper core network 4102-1 is connected to the system 4101a of the first operator and the system 4101b of the second operator. The system 4101a of the first business operator and the system 4101b of the second business operator may be, for example, a data server in which the business operator collects information from a plurality of terminals belonging to the business operator group, or the collected information. It may be an application server that provides a service to a plurality of terminals belonging to a business group based on the above.
　ＭＶＮＯ４０１２は、上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１のほか、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーが設定されるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－２と、端末グループに属する端末及び他の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報をデータベース群に保持して管理する情報管理モジュール４１０２－７とを含む。 The MVNO 4012 includes the upper core network 4102-1, the MNO selection policy table 4102-2 in which the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is set, and group communication which is information on communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals. It includes an information management module 4102-7 that stores and manages information in a database group.
　端末は、実施の形態３と同様に、データベースであるデータベース群と、情報管理部とを含む。ただし、本実施の形態４に係る端末の情報管理部は、グループ通信情報に基づいて、端末について選択されるＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの数（１つ以上の数）を決定する。そして、本実施の形態４に係る端末の情報管理部は、グループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適するように、端末について決定した数のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、端末のセッションの確立または切り替えの自律的な制御を行う。 The terminal includes a database group which is a database and an information management unit as in the third embodiment. However, the information management unit of the terminal according to the fourth embodiment determines the number of MNO networks and sessions (one or more) selected for the terminal based on the group communication information. Then, the information management unit of the terminal according to the fourth embodiment selects the number of MNO networks and sessions determined for the terminal so as to be suitable for the MNO selection policy based on the group communication information, and based on the selection result. It autonomously controls the establishment or switching of terminal sessions.
　各端末は、上記決定された数のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを確立可能である。図３５の例では、上記決定された数は２つであり、各端末は２つのセッションを確立している。データ通信において、複数セッションを確立することで、１つのセッションが障害や通信状況の変化により切断した場合においても、同時に確立された他のセッションで通信の継続が可能となるため、通信継続の耐性が強くなる。また１つのセッションを新たなセッションへ切り替える時でも、同時に確立された他のセッションで通信の継続が可能となるため、データが途切れずに通信可能となる。これらにより、各端末が１つだけのセッションを確立する実施の形態３の無線通信システムよりも、信頼性を向上させることができる。 Each terminal can establish the above-determined number of MNO networks and sessions. In the example of FIG. 35, the number determined is two, and each terminal establishes two sessions. In data communication, by establishing multiple sessions, even if one session is disconnected due to a failure or change in communication status, communication can be continued in other sessions established at the same time, so communication continuation tolerance Becomes stronger. Further, even when one session is switched to a new session, communication can be continued in another session established at the same time, so that data can be communicated without interruption. As a result, the reliability can be improved as compared with the wireless communication system of the third embodiment in which each terminal establishes only one session.
　図３５を用いて、ＭＮＯネットワーク及び通信セッションの選択、並びに、通信セッションの切り替えを説明する。 The selection of the MNO network and the communication session, and the switching of the communication session will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
　例えば、第１事業者が、各端末の複数セッション確立による信頼性向上を重視するとともに、通信コストの低価格化を重視する契約を、ＭＶＮＯと結んでいると仮定する。この場合、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末４１０５ａａ、第１－２端末４１０５ａｂ、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、様々な料金プランの中で、端末グループ全体で、最も低価格になるＭＮＯネットワークを導出したり、または、過去の実績から通信容量を推定して最終的な支払いが最も低価格になるＭＮＯネットワークを導出したりする。この導出により、最も通信コストが安いＭＮＯとして第１ＭＮＯが選択され、２番目に通信コストの安いＭＮＯとして第２ＭＮＯが選択されたとする。 For example, it is assumed that the first operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes the improvement of reliability by establishing multiple sessions for each terminal and the reduction of communication costs. In this case, the 1-1 terminal 4105aa, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator are the lowest prices in the entire terminal group among various rate plans. Or derive the MNO network that will be the lowest price, or estimate the communication capacity from the past performance and derive the MNO network with the lowest final payment. By this derivation, it is assumed that the first MNO is selected as the MNO having the lowest communication cost and the second MNO is selected as the MNO having the second lowest communication cost.
　この結果、図３５の例では、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末４１０５ａａは、第１セッションとして、通信コストが最も安い第１ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第１－１基地局４１０４ａａを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ａ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１と接続される。また、第１－１端末４１０５ａａは、第２セッションとして、通信コストが２番目に安い第２ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第２－１基地局４１０４ｂａを介して、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ｂ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１と接続される。これにより、第１－１端末４１０５ａａは、第１事業者のシステム４１０１ａと低価格な通信を行うことが可能となる。 As a result, in the example of FIG. 35, the 1-1 terminal 4105aa belonging to the terminal group of the first operator is the closest first of the first MNO base stations having the lowest communication cost as the first session. -1 It is connected to the core network 4103a of the first MNO and the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO via the base station 4104aa. Further, as the second session, the 1-1 terminal 4105aa uses the second MNO core network 4103b via the nearest 2-1 base station 4104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost. , And is connected to the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO. As a result, the 1-1 terminal 4105aa can perform low-priced communication with the system 4101a of the first operator.
　同様に、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－２端末４１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、第１セッションとして、通信コストが最も安い第１ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第１－２基地局４１０４ａｂを介して、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ａ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１と接続される。また、第１－２端末４１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、第２セッションとして、通信コストが２番目に安い第２ＭＮＯの基地局のうち、最も近接の第２－１基地局４１０４ｂａを介して、第２ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ｂ、及び、ＭＶＮＯの上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１と接続される。これにより、第１－２端末４１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、第１事業者のシステム４１０１ａと低価格な通信を行うことが可能となる。 Similarly, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac, which belong to the terminal group of the first operator, are the closest to the base station of the first MNO having the lowest communication cost as the first session. It is connected to the core network 4103a of the first MNO and the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO via the 1-2 base station 4104ab. In addition, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac use the closest 2-1 base station 4104ba among the second MNO base stations having the second lowest communication cost as the second session. Through, it is connected to the core network 4103b of the second MNO and the core network 4102-1 above the MVNO. As a result, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac can perform low-priced communication with the system 4101a of the first operator.
　ここで、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－１端末４１０５ａａ、第１－２端末４１０５ａｂ、及び、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、情報管理モジュール４１０２－７より定期的に通知されるグループ通信情報を取得している。このときに、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃが、第１－２基地局４１０４ａｂとの無線通信回線４１０６－１ａの回線品質劣化を検出したとする。 Here, the 1-1 terminal 4105aa, the 1-2 terminal 4105ab, and the 1-3 terminal 4105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first business operator are groups that are periodically notified by the information management module 4102-7. You are getting communication information. At this time, it is assumed that the 1-3 terminal 4105ac detects the deterioration of the line quality of the wireless communication line 4106-1a with the 1-2 base station 4104ab.
　この場合に、例えば、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、定期的または随時に取得していたグループ通信情報の最新情報、または、その集計結果から、第１事業者の端末グループに属する他の端末が、第１ＭＮＯとの通信セッションを継続しているか、及び、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ａの第１－１基地局４１０４ａａが、同期チャネル、ブロードキャストチャネルをダウンリンクで送信しており、運用を継続しているかを判断する。そして、第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、いずれの判断においても肯定的な結果が得られた場合に、第１ＭＮＯのコアネットワーク４１０３ａの第１－１基地局４１０４ａａとの通信セッション確立を自立的に行う。この結果、第１事業者の端末グループに属する第１－３端末４１０５ａｃは、第１－１基地局４１０４ａａとの無線通信回線４１０６－１ｂを確立することで、継続して通信を行うことが可能となる。 In this case, for example, the 1-3 terminal 4105ac is a terminal group of the first operator based on the latest information of the group communication information acquired regularly or at any time, or the aggregated result. , The communication session with the 1st MNO is continued, and the 1-1 base station 4104aa of the core network 4103a of the 1st MNO is transmitting the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel by downlink, and the operation is continued. Determine if. Then, the 1-3 terminal 4105ac autonomously establishes a communication session with the 1-1 base station 4104aa of the core network 4103a of the 1st MNO when a positive result is obtained in any of the judgments. .. As a result, the 1-3 terminal 4105ac belonging to the terminal group of the first operator can continuously communicate by establishing the wireless communication line 4106-1b with the 1-1 base station 4104aa. It becomes.
　なお、グループ通信情報は、（１）端末でセッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質及び障害情報と、（２）ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知されるネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、（３）ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される、当該端末と同じ端末グループに属する他の端末の接続情報と、（４）ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される、端末グループに属する複数の端末の接続費用に関する情報と、（５）当該端末と同じ端末グループに属する他の端末から定期的または随時に通知される、他の端末が測定した通信回線品質及び障害情報と、（６）当該端末と同じ端末グループに属する他の端末から１回または繰り返し通知される、他の端末がネットワークから受信した通信に関する情報と、の少なくともいいずれか１つを含む。なお、ここでいうネットワークは、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークであればよい。 The group communication information includes (1) communication line quality and failure information measured or detected immediately before the terminal establishes or switches the session, or immediately before the network is selected, and (2) periodically or at any time from the network. Communication line quality and failure information of the network to be notified, (3) connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal concerned, which are notified regularly or at any time from the network, and (4) periodical from the network. Or, information on connection costs of multiple terminals belonging to the terminal group, which is notified at any time, and (5) measured by other terminals, which are notified regularly or at any time from other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal. At least one of the communication line quality and failure information obtained, and (6) information on communication received from the network by another terminal, which is notified once or repeatedly by another terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal. Including one. The network referred to here may be at least one of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks.
　また、グループ通信情報のうち、ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される情報は、例えば、ＭＶＮＯ４１０２の情報管理モジュール４１０２－７から通知される情報であり、これら情報は、各事業者の端末グループに属する各端末から収集される情報である。 Further, among the group communication information, the information notified from the network regularly or at any time is, for example, the information notified from the information management module 4102-7 of MVNO4102, and these information are sent to the terminal group of each business operator. Information collected from each terminal to which it belongs.
　別例として、第２事業者は、特定のＭＮＯの障害発生時においても、通信の継続を維持させる通信耐性を重視する契約を、ＭＶＮＯと結んでいると仮定する。この場合、第２事業者の端末グループに属する第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃは、情報管理モジュール４１０２－７から通知される情報のうち、ネットワークから定期的または随時に通知される、端末と同じ端末グループに属する他の端末の接続情報などに基づいて、同一端末グループ内の端末同士の接続先ＭＮＯがなるべく重ならないように、１つ以上のＭＮＯ及び通信セッションの選択及び切り替えを行う。 As another example, it is assumed that the second operator has a contract with the MVNO that emphasizes communication resistance to maintain the continuation of communication even in the event of a failure of a specific MNO. In this case, the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 4105bc belonging to the terminal group of the second business operator are the information notified from the information management module 4102-7 from the network. One or more MNOs so that the connection destination MNOs of terminals in the same terminal group do not overlap as much as possible based on the connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group as the terminal, which are notified regularly or at any time. And select and switch communication sessions.
　以下、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃの順番で通信セッションが確立される例について説明する。 Hereinafter, an example in which a communication session is established in the order of the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 4105bc will be described.
　まず、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａの通信セッションの確立について説明する。第２－１端末４１０５ｂａが通信セッションを確立する時点では、同一端末グループ内の他の端末は通信セッションを確立していない。このため、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａは、例えば、品質が良い第１ＭＮＯ４１０３ａの第１－１基地局４１０４ａａ、及び、第２ＭＮＯ４１０３ｂの第２－１基地局４１０４ｂａと通信セッションを確立する。 First, the establishment of a communication session of the 2-1 terminal 4105ba will be described. At the time when the second terminal 4105ba establishes a communication session, other terminals in the same terminal group have not established a communication session. Therefore, the 2-1 terminal 4105ba establishes a communication session with, for example, the 1-1 base station 4104aa of the first MNO4103a and the 2-1 base station 4104ba of the second MNO4103b, which have good quality.
　次に、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂの通信セッションの確立について説明する。第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂが通信セッションを確立する時点では、すでに同一端末グループ内の第２－１端末４１０５ｂａは通信セッションを確立している。この場合、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂは、定期的または随時に通知される同一端末グループに属する他の端末の接続情報から、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａの上記通信セッションの確立を示す接続情報を取得する。なおここでは、他の端末の接続情報は、情報管理モジュール４１０２－７からのグループ通信情報に含まれる情報として説明するが、実施の形態３の変形例１のように端末間通信によって得られる情報であってもよい。 Next, the establishment of the communication session of the 2-2 terminal 4105bb will be described. By the time the 2-2 terminal 4105bab establishes the communication session, the 2-1 terminal 4105ba in the same terminal group has already established the communication session. In this case, the 2-2 terminal 4105bab acquires the connection information indicating the establishment of the communication session of the 2-1 terminal 4105ba from the connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group notified periodically or at any time. To do. Here, the connection information of other terminals will be described as the information included in the group communication information from the information management module 4102-7, but the information obtained by the terminal-to-terminal communication as in the first modification of the third embodiment. It may be.
　第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂは、取得した接続情報に基づいて、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａと接続されているＭＮＯ及び基地局と重なりが少なくなるように、ＭＮＯ及び基地局を選択して通信セッションを確立する。例えば、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂは、第１ＭＮＯ４１０３ａ及び第２ＭＮＯ４１０３ｂと重ならない第３ＭＮＯ４１０３ｃの第３－１基地局４１０４ｃａを、第１セッションとして選択し、第３ＭＮＯ４１０３ｃ以外の第１ＭＮＯ４１０３ａの第１－２基地局４１０４ａｂを、第２セッションとして選択する。そして、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂは、選択された第３－１基地局４１０４ｃａ、及び、第１－２基地局４１０４ａｂと通信セッションを確立する。 Based on the acquired connection information, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb selects the MNO and the base station so as to reduce the overlap with the MNO and the base station connected to the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, and conducts a communication session. Establish. For example, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb selects the 3-1 base station 4104ca of the 3rd MNO4103c that does not overlap with the 1st MNO4103a and the 2nd MNO4103b as the first session, and the 1st-2nd base station of the 1st MNO4103a other than the 3rd MNO4103c. 4104ab is selected as the second session. Then, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb establishes a communication session with the selected 3-1 base station 4104ca and the 1-2 base station 4104ab.
　次に、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃの通信セッションの確立について説明する。第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃが通信セッションを確立する時点では、すでに同一端末グループ内の第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ及び第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂは通信セッションを確立している。この場合、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃは、定期的または随時に通知される同一端末グループに属する他の端末の接続情報から、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ及び第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂの上記通信セッションの確立を示す接続情報を取得する。 Next, the establishment of the communication session of the 2-3 terminal 4105bc will be described. By the time the 2-3 terminal 4105bc establishes the communication session, the 2-1 terminal 4105ba and the 2-2 terminal 4105bb in the same terminal group have already established the communication session. In this case, the 2-3 terminal 4105bc is the communication session of the 2-1 terminal 4105ba and the 2-2 terminal 4105bb from the connection information of other terminals belonging to the same terminal group notified periodically or at any time. Acquire connection information indicating establishment.
　第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃは、取得した接続情報に基づいて、第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ及び第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂが接続されているＭＮＯ及び基地局と重なりが少なくなるように、ＭＮＯ及び基地局を選択して通信セッションを確立する。例えば、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃは、第２ＭＮＯ４１０３ｂの第２－２基地局４１０４ｂｂと、第３ＭＮＯ４１０３ｃの第３－２基地局４１０４ｃｂとを選択し、通信セッションを確立する。 Based on the acquired connection information, the 2-3 terminal 4105bc has less overlap with the MNO and the base station to which the 2-1 terminal 4105ba and the 2-2 terminal 4105bb are connected, so that the MNO and the base station do not overlap with each other. Select to establish a communication session. For example, the 2-3 terminal 4105bc selects the 2-2 base station 4104bb of the 2nd MNO4103b and the 3-2 base station 4104bb of the 3rd MNO4103c to establish a communication session.
　以上の結果、第２事業者の端末グループの第２－１端末４１０５ｂａ、第２－２端末４１０５ｂｂ、第２－３端末４１０５ｂｃについて、接続先ＭＮＯが均一化されるので、第２事業者のシステム４１０１ｂと通信障害に対して耐性の高い通信を行うことが可能となる。 As a result, the connection destination MNOs are made uniform for the 2-1 terminal 4105ba, the 2-2 terminal 4105bb, and the 2-3 terminal 4105bc of the terminal group of the second operator, so that the system of the second operator It is possible to perform communication with 4101b with high resistance to communication failure.
　なお、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに基づいた判断を行うためのグループ通信情報は、（１）ネットワークでセッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出したネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、（２）ネットワークでセッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した端末グループに属する全端末の接続情報と、（３）端末グループに属する複数の端末の接続費用に関する情報と、（４）端末グループに属する複数の端末から１回、定期的または随時に通知される通信回線品質及び通信回線の障害情報と、の少なくともいずれか１つを含む。なお、ここでいうネットワークは、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークであればよい。これら情報は、グループ通信情報として、端末グループ毎にＭＶＮＯの情報管理モジュール４１０２－７から端末に通知される。 The group communication information for making a decision based on the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is (1) network communication measured or detected immediately before the decision to establish or switch a session on the network, or immediately before network selection. Line quality and failure information, (2) connection information of all terminals belonging to the terminal group measured or detected immediately before the decision to establish or switch a session on the network, or immediately before selecting the network, and (3) belonging to the terminal group. At least one of information on connection costs of a plurality of terminals and (4) communication line quality and communication line failure information notified once, periodically or at any time by a plurality of terminals belonging to a terminal group. Including. The network referred to here may be at least one of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks. This information is notified to the terminal from the MVNO information management module 4102-7 for each terminal group as group communication information.
　端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーとしては、例えば、（１）通信コストの低価格化を重視するポリシー、（２）通信の継続を維持させる通信耐性を重視するポリシー、（３）局所的な災害や装置障害時などへの耐性を上げるために、接続する基地局を地理的に分散させるポリシー、（４）通信トラフィックの増減に対して耐性を上げるために、通信トラフィック量が契約回線の太さに対応して平準化するポリシー、（５）通信品質を良くするために、通信品質の良いセッションを選択するポリシー、（６）無線通信の干渉などへの耐性を上げるために、周波数帯域が異なるものを選択するポリシー、または、これらの組み合わせなどが用いられる。 MNO selection policies for each terminal group include, for example, (1) a policy that emphasizes low communication costs, (2) a policy that emphasizes communication tolerance that maintains communication continuity, and (3) local disasters. A policy to geographically distribute the connected base stations in order to increase the resistance to equipment failures, etc. (4) To increase the resistance to the increase and decrease of communication traffic, the amount of communication traffic should be the thickness of the contract line Correspondingly leveling policy, (5) Policy to select a session with good communication quality to improve communication quality, (6) Policy with different frequency bands to improve resistance to wireless communication interference, etc. A policy to select, or a combination of these, etc. is used.
　＜実施の形態４の変形例１＞
　図３６～図３８は、複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、任意の事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供する、実施の形態４の変形例１に係る無線通信システムの動作例を示すシーケンス図である。具体的には、図３６～図３８には、複数のＭＮＯとのセッション確立後に、端末が自立的にＭＮＯを変更する動作例が示されている。 <Modification 1 of Embodiment 4>
36 to 38 show an operation example of the wireless communication system according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment, which provides a communication session to a terminal group of an arbitrary operator in an MVNO network connected to a plurality of MNO networks. It is a sequence diagram. Specifically, FIGS. 36 to 38 show an operation example in which the terminal autonomously changes the MNO after establishing a session with a plurality of MNOs.
　事業者は、ステップＳ４２０１にて、ＭＶＮＯに対して、端末の登録と、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーの設定とを行う。ＭＶＮＯは、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに基づいて、端末グループの複数の端末へ定期的または随時通知するグループ通信情報を選択する。端末は、過去に受信していたグループ通信情報と、予め端末に設定されたＭＮＯ選択情報とに基づいて、初期の通信セッションを確立する。 In step S4201, the business operator registers the terminal and sets the MNO selection policy for the MVNO. Based on the MNO selection policy, the MVNO selects group communication information to be notified periodically or at any time to a plurality of terminals in the terminal group. The terminal establishes an initial communication session based on the group communication information received in the past and the MNO selection information set in the terminal in advance.
　図３６～図３８の例では、端末は、ステップＳ４２０２にて、第１ＭＮＯに対して、ＭＶＮＯへの接続要求を送信し、ステップＳ４２０３にて、第１ＭＮＯからの接続応答を受信する。端末は、ステップＳ４２０４にて、第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、認証要求を送信し、ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ４２０５にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に、認証応答を送信することで、端末は、第１ＭＮＯと通信セッションを確立する。 In the example of FIGS. 36 to 38, the terminal transmits a connection request to the MVNO to the first MNO in step S4202, and receives a connection response from the first MNO in step S4203. The terminal transmits an authentication request to the MVNO via the first MNO in step S4204, and the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the first MNO in step S4205. Establish a communication session with the 1MNO.
　同様に、ステップＳ４２０６、ステップＳ４２０７、ステップＳ４２０８、及び、ステップＳ４２０９にて、第２ＭＮＯに関して、ステップＳ４２０２、ステップＳ４２０３、ステップＳ４２０４、及び、ステップＳ４２０５の処理を行うことにより、端末は、第２ＭＮＯと通信セッションを確立する。以下、上り方向（端末→ＭＶＮＯ）のデータ送信に関して、通常時の処理及び障害発生時の処理について説明する。 Similarly, in step S4206, step S4207, step S4208, and step S4209, the terminal communicates with the second MNO by performing the processes of step S4202, step S4203, step S4204, and step S4205 with respect to the second MNO. Establish a session. Hereinafter, regarding the data transmission in the upstream direction (terminal → MVNO), the processing at the normal time and the processing at the time of failure will be described.
　まず、通常時の処理の例を説明する。端末接続装置は、ステップＳ４２２０にて、端末にデータ送信指示を送信する。端末は、ステップＳ４２２１にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのそれぞれの通信セッションにて同一データを送信するためにデータを複製するデータ複製処理を行う。端末は、ステップＳ４２２２にて、第１ＭＮＯに複製データを送信し、第１ＭＮＯは、ＭＶＮＯに当該複製データを送信する。同様に、端末は、ステップＳ４２２３で、端末は第２ＭＮＯ向けに複製データを送信し、第２ＭＮＯは、ＭＶＮＯに当該複製データを送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ４２２４にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯから受信した同一データ（複製データ）を選択して、ステップＳ４２２５にて選択されたデータを事業者に送信する。 First, an example of normal processing will be explained. The terminal connection device transmits a data transmission instruction to the terminal in step S4220. In step S4221, the terminal performs a data duplication process for duplicating data in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO. In step S4222, the terminal transmits the duplicated data to the first MNO, and the first MNO transmits the duplicated data to the MVNO. Similarly, in step S4223, the terminal transmits the duplicated data to the second MNO, and the second MNO transmits the duplicated data to the MVNO. The MVNO selects the same data (replica data) received from the first MNO and the second MNO in step S4224, and transmits the data selected in step S4225 to the operator.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ４２２６にて、第１ＭＮＯの通信セッションで、データ受信応答を端末に送信し、ステップＳ４２２７にて、第２ＭＮＯの通信セッションで、データ受信応答を端末に送信する。データ受信応答のデータとしては、例えば、ＡＣＫ／ＮＡＣＫを用いてもよい。データ受信応答に、データのシーケンス番号や、ＭＮＯ及びセッションを識別する情報、受信タイミング情報、などを付与してもよい。 The MVNO transmits the data reception response to the terminal in the communication session of the first MNO in step S4226, and transmits the data reception response to the terminal in the communication session of the second MNO in step S4227. As the data of the data reception response, for example, ACK / NACK may be used. A data sequence number, information for identifying the MNO and the session, reception timing information, and the like may be added to the data reception response.
　端末は、ステップＳ４２２８にて、データ受信応答処理を行う。ここでの例では通常時であり、ステップＳ４２２６及びステップＳ４２２７のデータ受信応答を正しく受信できているため、データの再送処理や品質解析等が行われる。以下で説明するように、品質解析により、通信セッションに問題がある場合などには、後述するステップＳ４２５１にてＭＮＯ変更処理等が行われる。 The terminal performs data reception response processing in step S4228. In the example here, it is a normal time, and since the data reception response of step S4226 and step S4227 can be correctly received, data retransmission processing, quality analysis, and the like are performed. As described below, when there is a problem in the communication session due to the quality analysis, the MNO change process or the like is performed in step S4251 described later.
　次に、ＭＮＯに障害が発生した場合の処理の例を説明する。端末接続装置は、ステップＳ４２３０にて、端末にデータ送信指示を送信する。 Next, an example of processing when a failure occurs in the MNO will be described. The terminal connection device transmits a data transmission instruction to the terminal in step S4230.
　端末は、ステップＳ４２３１にて、第１ＭＮＯ及び第２ＭＮＯのそれぞれの通信セッションにて同一データを送信するためにデータ複製処理を行う。端末は、ステップＳ４２３２にて、第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに、複製データを送信しようとする。しかしながら、図３６～図３８の例では、ステップＳ４２３３に示すように第１ＭＮＯで障害が発生しているため、端末からのデータは第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに届かない状況である。一方、端末からのデータは、ステップＳ４２３４にて、第２ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯに届くことになる。なお、ステップＳ４２３２と並行して、ステップＳ４２４１にて第１ＭＮＯのデータ受信応答の受信を判断するための受信タイマーが開始する。 In step S4231, the terminal performs a data duplication process in order to transmit the same data in each communication session of the first MNO and the second MNO. In step S4232, the terminal attempts to transmit duplicate data to the MVNO via the first MNO. However, in the examples of FIGS. 36 to 38, since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S4233, the data from the terminal does not reach the MVNO via the first MNO. On the other hand, the data from the terminal reaches the MVNO via the second MNO in step S4234. In parallel with step S4322, the reception timer for determining the reception of the data reception response of the first MNO is started in step S4241.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ４２３５にてデータ選択処理を行い、ステップＳ４２３６にて事業者に、選択されたデータを送信する。図３６～図３８の例では、ＭＶＮＯは、第１ＭＮＯからのデータを受信できないので、第２ＭＮＯから受信したデータを事業者に送信する。 The MVNO performs the data selection process in step S4235, and transmits the selected data to the business operator in step S4236. In the example of FIGS. 36 to 38, since the MVNO cannot receive the data from the first MNO, the data received from the second MNO is transmitted to the operator.
　ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ４２３７にて、第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に、データ受信応答を送信しようとする。しかしながら、図３６～図３８の例では、ステップＳ４２３８に示すように第１ＭＮＯで障害が発生しているため、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは第１ＭＮＯを介して端末に届かない状況である。一方、ＭＶＮＯからのデータは、ステップＳ４２３９にて、第２ＭＮＯを介して端末に届くことになる。 In step S4237, the MVNO attempts to transmit a data reception response to the terminal via the first MNO. However, in the example of FIGS. 36 to 38, since the failure has occurred in the first MNO as shown in step S4238, the data from the MVNO does not reach the terminal via the first MNO. On the other hand, the data from the MVNO will reach the terminal via the second MNO in step S4239.
　このような場合に、端末は、第１ＭＮＯに障害が発生していると判断できる。このとき、少なくとも第１ＭＮＯの上りデータに対する応答はＮＡＣＫである。また、ステップＳ４２４１で開始した受信タイマーの満了するため、端末は、データ受信応答は第１ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯで受信されずに第１ＭＮＯに障害が発生していると判断できる。なお、端末が、一つのＭＮＯの通信セッションのみ（例えば、第１ＭＮＯのみ）を介してデータ受信応答を受信する構成において、上記受信タイマーは有効である。 In such a case, the terminal can determine that the first MNO has a failure. At this time, the response to at least the uplink data of the first MNO is NACK. Further, since the reception timer started in step S4241 expires, the terminal can determine that the data reception response is not received by the MVNO via the first MNO and the failure has occurred in the first MNO. The reception timer is effective in a configuration in which the terminal receives the data reception response via only one MNO communication session (for example, only the first MNO).
　端末は、ステップＳ４２４０にて、各ＭＮＯからのデータ受信応答の受信結果に基づいて、データの再送や、各ＭＮＯの通信セッションの品質解析などを含むデータ受信応答処理を行う。この際、端末は、データ受信応答情報や再送回数などの統計情報を解析してもよい。端末は、ステップＳ４２５０にて、ＭＶＮＯからの端末グループ情報を受信する。 In step S4240, the terminal performs data reception response processing including data retransmission and quality analysis of the communication session of each MNO based on the reception result of the data reception response from each MNO. At this time, the terminal may analyze statistical information such as data reception response information and the number of retransmissions. The terminal receives the terminal group information from the MVNO in step S4250.
　端末は、ステップＳ４２５１にて、ステップＳ４２４０で得られた統計情報と、ステップＳ４２５０で受信した端末グループ情報とに基づいてＭＮＯ変更処理を行う。図３６～図３８の例では、第１ＭＮＯで障害が発生しているため、端末は、端末と接続されるＭＮＯを、第１ＭＮＯから第３ＭＮＯに変更すると判断する。 The terminal performs the MNO change process in step S4251 based on the statistical information obtained in step S4240 and the terminal group information received in step S4250. In the examples of FIGS. 36 to 38, since the failure has occurred in the first MNO, the terminal determines that the MNO connected to the terminal is changed from the first MNO to the third MNO.
　端末は、ステップＳ４２５２にて、自立的に第３ＭＮＯに接続要求を送信し、ステップＳ４２５３にて、第３ＭＮＯから接続応答を受信する。端末は、ステップＳ４２５４にて、第３ＭＮＯを介してＭＶＮＯへ、第３ＭＮＯを介した通信セッション確立のための認証要求を送信する。ＭＶＮＯは、ステップＳ４２５５で、第３ＭＮＯを介して、端末に認証応答を送信し、通信セッションが確立される。 The terminal autonomously transmits a connection request to the third MNO in step S4252, and receives a connection response from the third MNO in step S4253. In step S4254, the terminal transmits an authentication request for establishing a communication session via the third MNO to the MVNO via the third MNO. In step S4255, the MVNO transmits an authentication response to the terminal via the third MNO, and a communication session is established.
　以上のような構成によれば、端末が、自分の属している端末グループの情報や、自己の通信セッションの品質情報などのグループ通信情報に基づいて、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した、自立的に適切なＭＮＯを選択する。これにより、ＭＶＮＯなどのネットワークの管理負荷を下げたり、各端末での迅速に障害等へ対応したりすることができる。 According to the above configuration, the terminal is suitable for the MNO selection policy for each terminal group based on the group communication information such as the information of the terminal group to which it belongs and the quality information of its own communication session. Independently select an appropriate MNO. As a result, it is possible to reduce the management load of a network such as an MVNO, and to quickly respond to a failure or the like at each terminal.
　＜実施の形態４の変形例２＞
　図３９及び図４０を用いて、実施の形態４の変形例２に係る無線通信システムが備えるＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置及び無線通信端末の構成要素について説明する。なお、本変形例２に係る無線通信システムは、実施の形態４、及び、実施の形態４の変形例１の全てを実現可能となっている。なお、実施の形態４、及び、実施の形態４の変形例１のいずれかだけが実現される場合には、以下で説明する構成要素は適宜省略される。 <Modification 2 of Embodiment 4>
39 and 40 will be used to describe the components of the MVNO network device and the wireless communication terminal included in the wireless communication system according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment. The wireless communication system according to the second modification can realize all of the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the fourth embodiment. When only one of the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the fourth embodiment is realized, the components described below are appropriately omitted.
　図３９は、本変形例２に係るＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置４１０２の構成を示すブロック図である。ＭＶＮＯ４１０２は、一般にサーバ上のソフトウェアモジュール群として構成される。 FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the MVNO network device 4102 according to the second modification. The MVNO4102 is generally configured as a group of software modules on a server.
　図３９における上位のコアネットワーク４１０２－１は、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールから構成される。そして、ＭＶＮＯメインストリーム処理モジュールは、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール４１０２－９と、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール４１０２－１０と、事業者インタフェースモジュール４１０２－１１と、データ複製・選択モジュール４１０２－１６とを含む。 The upper core network 4102-1 in FIG. 39 is composed of an MVNO mainstream processing module. The MVNO mainstream processing module includes an MNO interface module 4102-9, a PGW function module 4102-10, a business operator interface module 4102-11, and a data duplication / selection module 4102-16.
　事業者インタフェースモジュール４１０２－１１は、各事業者間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行う。事業者インタフェースモジュール４１０２－１１は、ＭＶＮＯ内外のルート制御を行い、事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０２－６へのアクセスを可能であり、必要に応じてＭＶＮＯ外部のインターネットに接続するように構成することも有効である。 The operator interface module 4102-11 balances between each operator and the interface, and sends and receives information between them. The operator interface module 4102-11 controls routes inside and outside the MVNO, can access the operator request management control module 4102-6, and is configured to connect to the Internet outside the MVNO as needed. Is also valid.
　ＰＧＷ機能モジュール４１０２－１０は、ＩＰアドレスの割当やＩＰパケットの伝達品質制御を行うとともに、ＭＮＯの情報管理モジュール４１０２－７の指示及び各端末からのアクセス情報に基づいてＭＮＯの選択を行う。ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール４１０２－９は、各ＭＮＯ間とインタフェースとの間の整合を取り、これらの間の情報の送受信を行うとともに、ＨＳＳモジュール４１０２－３とのアクセスが可能である。 The PGW function module 4102-10 assigns an IP address and controls the transmission quality of an IP packet, and selects an MNO based on an instruction from the MNO information management module 4102-7 and access information from each terminal. The MNO interface module 4102-9 is capable of matching between each MNO and the interface, transmitting and receiving information between them, and accessing the HSS module 4102-3.
　データ複製・選択モジュール４１０２－１６は、複数ＭＮＯでの通信セッション確立時に、データ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－１８に基づいて、各ＭＮＯへ送信するデータの複製や、各ＭＮＯから受信するデータの選択を行う。 The data duplication / selection module 4102-16 duplicates the data to be transmitted to each MNO and selects the data to be received from each MNO based on the data selection policy table 4102-18 when establishing a communication session with a plurality of MNOs. ..
　事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０２－６は、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－２と、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－４とを含む。端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－２は、端末グループ毎にＭＮＯをどのようなポリシーで選択及び切り替えをするかを設定するためのテーブルである。端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－４は、事業者のアプリケーションを供する端末接続装置の特性を考慮して当該端末接続装置と接続する端末のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーを設定するためのテーブルである。 The operator request management control module 4102-6 includes an MNO selection policy table 4102-2 for each terminal group and an MNO selection policy table 4102-4 for inter-terminal association. The MNO selection policy table 4102-2 for each terminal group is a table for setting the policy for selecting and switching the MNO for each terminal group. The MNO selection policy table 4102-4 for inter-terminal association is a table for setting the MNO selection policy of the terminal connected to the terminal connection device in consideration of the characteristics of the terminal connection device that provides the application of the business operator.
　例えば、事業者インタフェースモジュール４１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループについて「安いＭＮＯと接続」という設定指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－５に格納される。また、事業者インタフェースモジュール４１０２－１１を経由して、第１事業者のある端末グループの端末間関連の端末接続装置毎重要度リスト、及び、端末間接続装置の重要度序列考慮指示が事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０２－６に届くと、その情報は、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－４に格納される。 For example, when a setting instruction "Connect with a cheap MNO" is sent to the operator request management control module 4102-6 for a terminal group having the first operator via the operator interface module 4102-11, the information is displayed. It is stored in the MNO selection policy table 4102-5. In addition, via the operator interface module 4102-11, the operator issues a list of importance for each terminal connection device related to each terminal of the terminal group in which the first operator is located, and an instruction to consider the importance order of the terminal-to-terminal connection devices. When the request management control module 4102-6 is reached, the information is stored in the MNO selection policy table 4102-4.
　ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール４１０２－８は、例えば、各ＭＮＯの課金情報（従量課金であったり、特定期間定額であったり、特定の通信量までは定額でそれ以上の通信量には従量課金である等の定量的情報）、各ＭＮＯから通知される運用停止アナウンス情報や、各ＭＮＯの保守機能部からの一部装置における異常輻輳や機器損傷情報等の情報を情報管理モジュール４１０２－７に通知する。また、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－２、４１０２－４において、事業者からの遠隔書き込み機能が無い場合に、これらテーブルにセキュアに書き込みを行うときには、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール４１０２－８による書き込みが行われる。このとき、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール４１０２－８によって、ＨＳＳモジュール４１０２－３へのセキュアな書き込みも行われてもよい。 The MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8 is, for example, charged information for each MNO (pay-as-you-go, fixed-rate for a specific period, fixed-rate up to a specific traffic, and pay-as-you-go for more traffic, etc. Quantitative information), operation stop announcement information notified from each MNO, and information such as abnormal congestion and device damage information in some devices from the maintenance function unit of each MNO are notified to the information management module 4102-7. Further, in the MNO selection policy table 4102-2, 4102-4, when there is no remote writing function from the operator, when writing to these tables securely, the writing is performed by the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8. At this time, the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8 may also perform secure writing to the HSS module 4102-3.
　端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール４１０２－３には、基本的に各事業者から直接書き込みができない。ＨＳＳモジュール４１０２－３で管理している端末情報が書き換えられるときには、対象の端末のＳＩＭの書き換えも合わせて行われる。例えば、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーと連動して認証アルゴリズムを異なるものに変更する書き換えは有効である。このように構成した場合には、高い信頼性を求めるポリシーのときに、高い認証アルゴリズムを提供することができるので、事業者からの設定ミスが発生しても重大なシステム障害を発生させずにサービスの提供が可能となる。 Basically, it is not possible to write directly to the HSS module 4102-3, which is a terminal information management control module, from each business operator. When the terminal information managed by the HSS module 4102-3 is rewritten, the SIM of the target terminal is also rewritten. For example, rewriting that changes the authentication algorithm to a different one in conjunction with the MNO selection policy for each terminal group is effective. With this configuration, a high authentication algorithm can be provided when the policy requires high reliability, so even if a setting error occurs from the operator, a serious system failure will not occur. It becomes possible to provide services.
　情報管理モジュール４１０２－７は、ＭＮＯインタフェースモジュール４１０２－９、データ複製・選択モジュール４１０２－１６、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール４１０２－１０を経由して、端末グループに属する端末及び他の端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を収集する。そして、情報管理モジュール４１０２－７は、ネットワークモニタデータベース４１０２－１３と、端末モニタデータベース４１０２－１４と、課金情報用データベース４１０２－１５とを含むデータベース群に、グループ通信情報を格納する。以下、グループ通信情報及びデータベース群について説明する。 The information management module 4102-7 provides information on communication between terminals belonging to the terminal group and other terminals via the MNO interface module 4102-9, the data duplication / selection module 4102-16, and the PGW function module 4102-10. Collect group communication information that is. Then, the information management module 4102-7 stores the group communication information in the database group including the network monitor database 4102-13, the terminal monitor database 4102-14, and the billing information database 4102-15. The group communication information and the database group will be described below.
　ネットワークモニタデータベース４１０２－１３には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末に対してネットワークで測定または検出した情報（通信回線品質及び障害情報、並びに、端末がどの経路で接続されているかを示す接続情報）が収集及び格納される。なお、ここでいうネットワークは、各ＭＮＯネットワークであるものとするが、これに限ったものではなく、ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークであればよい。 The network monitor database 4102-13 shows information measured or detected in the network (communication line quality and failure information, and which route the terminals are connected to) for at least one or more terminals belonging to the terminal group. Connection information) is collected and stored. The network referred to here is assumed to be each MNO network, but is not limited to this, and may be at least one network of the MVNO network and a plurality of MNO networks.
　端末モニタデータベース４１０２－１４には、端末グループに属する少なくとも１つ以上の端末が自ら測定または検出し、各ＭＮＯ経由でＭＶＮＯに定期的または随時に送信する、通信回線品質及び障害情報が収集及び格納される。 The terminal monitor database 4102-14 collects and stores communication line quality and failure information that is measured or detected by at least one terminal belonging to the terminal group and transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO on a regular or occasional basis. Will be done.
　課金情報用データベース４１０２－１５には、ＭＶＮＯ保守機能モジュール４１０２－８から指定される各ＭＮＯの課金情報、及び、ＰＧＷ機能モジュール４１０２－１０から入手される各端末の課金対象データの通信量（データ伝送量）等が収集及び格納される。 In the billing information database 4102-15, the communication amount (data) of the billing information of each MNO specified from the MVNO maintenance function module 4102-8 and the billing target data of each terminal obtained from the PGW function module 4102-10. Transmission amount) etc. are collected and stored.
　情報管理モジュール４１０２－７は、以上によって収集及び格納されたグループ通信情報を、端末グループ毎及び端末毎に定期的または随時に端末に通知する。また、情報管理モジュール４１０２－７は、任意の端末グループに属する任意の端末から、グループ通信情報要求を受信した場合に、これに応じて、グループ通信情報要求を送信した端末に、グループ通信情報を送信する。 The information management module 4102-7 notifies the terminal of the group communication information collected and stored as described above periodically or at any time for each terminal group and each terminal. Further, when the information management module 4102-7 receives a group communication information request from an arbitrary terminal belonging to an arbitrary terminal group, the information management module 4102-7 sends the group communication information to the terminal that transmitted the group communication information request in response to the group communication information request. Send.
　図４０は、実施の形態４の端末４１０５ａａ～４１０５ｂｃ（図３５）などのうちの１つに相当する、本変形例２に係る端末４１０５の構成を示すブロック図である。 FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the terminal 4105 according to the second modification, which corresponds to one of the terminals 4105aa to 4105bc (FIG. 35) of the fourth embodiment.
　図４０の端末４１０５は、複数ＭＮＯと同時に通信セッションを確立するために、複数のアンテナと、複数の送受信機と、複数のＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭとを持っている。アンテナ及び送受信機のそれぞれには、必ずしも複数のハードウェアが用いられる必要はなく、例えば、複数ＭＮＯの動作周波数に対応したアンテナや、時分割多重処理などが可能な送受信機などのように、複数ＭＮＯの通信を共用可能な１つのハードウェアが用いられてもよい。 The terminal 4105 of FIG. 40 has a plurality of antennas, a plurality of transmitters / receivers, and a plurality of SIMs / eSIMs in order to establish a communication session at the same time as a plurality of MNOs. It is not always necessary to use multiple pieces of hardware for each of the antenna and the transmitter / receiver. For example, an antenna corresponding to the operating frequencies of multiple MNOs, a transmitter / receiver capable of time division multiplexing, and the like. One piece of hardware capable of sharing MNO communication may be used.
　図４０の例では、２つのＭＮＯと同時に接続できる端末４１０５の例が示されている。この例では、第１ＭＮＯとの接続には、第１アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、第１送受信機４１０５－２ａ、及び、第１ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ａが用いられる。また、第２ＭＮＯとの接続には、第２アンテナ４１０５－１ｂ、第２送受信機４１０５－２ｂ、及び、第２ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ｂが用いられる。 In the example of FIG. 40, an example of a terminal 4105 that can be connected to two MNOs at the same time is shown. In this example, the first antenna 4105-1a, the first transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, and the first SIM / eSIM4105-6a are used for the connection with the first MNO. Further, a second antenna 4105-1b, a second transmitter / receiver 4105-2b, and a second SIM / eSIM4105-6b are used for connection with the second MNO.
　なお、以下の説明では、第１アンテナ４１０５－１ａ及び第２アンテナ４１０５－１ｂを、アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂと略記することもある。同様に、第１送受信機４１０５－２ａ及び第２送受信機４１０５－２ｂを、送受信機４１０５－２ａ、４１０５－２ｂと略記することもあり、第１ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ａ及び第２ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ｂを、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ａ、４１０５－６ｂと略記することもある。 In the following description, the first antenna 4105-1a and the second antenna 4105-1b may be abbreviated as antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b. Similarly, the first transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and the second transmitter / receiver 4105-2b may be abbreviated as the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and 4105-2b, and the first SIM / eSIM4105-6a and the second SIM / eSIM4105-6b may be referred to. , SIM / eSIM4105-6a, 4105-6b may be abbreviated.
　送受信機４１０５－２ａ、４１０５－２ｂは、アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂで受信した信号に、無線周波数から信号帯域へのダウンコンバートと、復調及び誤り訂正等のように受信の無線レイヤ１の処理とを行う。データ複製・選択モジュール４１０５－３は、送受信機４１０５－２ａ、４１０５－２ｂからの信号に、ＨＡＲＱやユーザフレームの復元等のように受信の無線レイヤ２の処理を行うとともに、データ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１３に基づいて、第１ＭＮＯから受信したデータと、第２ＭＮＯから受信したデータとからデータの選択を行う。 The transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, 4105-2b is a signal received by the antennas 4105-1a, 4105-1b, which is down-converted from the radio frequency to the signal band, demodulated, error corrected, and the like. Perform processing. The data duplication / selection module 4105-3 processes the signal from the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and 4105-2b in the reception wireless layer 2 such as HARQ and restoration of the user frame, and also performs the data selection policy table 4105. Based on -13, data is selected from the data received from the first MNO and the data received from the second MNO.
　データ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１３の情報は、ＭＶＮＯ、ＭＮＯ及びプロセッサ４１０５－５経由で事業者から受信した制御情報によって設定されてもよいし、端末保守機能モジュール４１０５－１１を介して、端末保守端末等によって設定されてもよい。なお、データ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１３は、データ選択制御モジュール４１０５－１２によって管理される。 The information in the data selection policy table 4105-13 may be set by the control information received from the operator via the MVNO, MNO and the processor 4105-5, or the terminal maintenance terminal via the terminal maintenance function module 4105-11. Etc. may be set. The data selection policy table 4105-13 is managed by the data selection control module 4105-12.
　端末接続装置インタフェース４１０５－４は、外部装置である端末接続装置に合わせたインタフェース整合を行う。端末接続装置は、例えば、センサー、カメラ、ＰＬＣ、パソコン等、または、これらと一体化されたＡＧＶ、車、ロボット、ドローン等である。 The terminal connection device interface 4105-4 performs interface matching according to the terminal connection device which is an external device. The terminal connection device is, for example, a sensor, a camera, a PLC, a personal computer, or the like, or an AGV, a car, a robot, a drone, or the like integrated with these.
　送受信機４１０５－２ａ、４１０５－２ｂの通信方式は、ＬＴＥ方式であってもよいし、５Ｇ方式であってもよいし、衛星移動体通信のネットワークであってもよいし、ＭＶＮＯが組み込み得るどの無線方式でもよい。 The communication system of the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a and 4105-2b may be an LTE system, a 5G system, a satellite mobile communication network, or any of the MVNOs that can be incorporated. It may be a wireless system.
　プロセッサ４１０５－５は、端末全体を制御し、メモリ４１０５－７と連携して、プログラムの動作及び格納、並びに、データ及びログの格納を行う。また、図４０の例のように、端末４１０５が、画面表示や、ＬＥＤなどヒューマンインタフェース４１０５－８を備える構成では、トラブル時の原因究明等を容易に行うことができる。この際、端末４１０５で測定または検出された通信回線品質及び障害情報は、プロセッサ４１０５－５でメッセージとして形成され、データ複製・選択モジュール４１０５－３、送受信機４１０５－２ａ、４１０５－２ｂ、アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂ、各ＭＮＯを介して、ＭＶＮＯに送信される。データ複製・選択モジュール４１０５－３は、データ受信時と同様に、データ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１３に基づいて、上記メッセージから必要なＭＮＯ及び通信セッション数分のデータを複製し、各ＭＮＯへ複製データを送信する。 The processor 4105-5 controls the entire terminal and cooperates with the memory 4105-7 to operate and store the program and to store data and logs. Further, as in the example of FIG. 40, in the configuration in which the terminal 4105 is provided with a screen display and a human interface 4105-8 such as an LED, it is possible to easily investigate the cause at the time of trouble. At this time, the communication line quality and failure information measured or detected by the terminal 4105 are formed as a message by the processor 4105-5, and the data duplication / selection module 4105-3, the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, 4105-2b, and the antenna 4105. -1a, 4105-1b, transmitted to the MVNO via each MNO. The data duplication / selection module 4105-3 duplicates the required MNO and the number of communication sessions from the above message based on the data selection policy table 4105-13 as in the case of data reception, and duplicates the data to each MNO. To send.
　ＭＶＮＯの端末情報管理制御モジュールであるＨＳＳモジュール４１０２－３と協働するＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ａ、４１０５－６ｂは、暗号化の鍵を払い出す認証機能を有する。事業者のアプリケーションで遠隔からデフォルトで選択する認証方式は、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭに指定されるか、または、端末上のハードウェアもしくはソフトウェアによるＤＩＰＳＷにより指定される。このような指定により、無線規格上認証方式の設定ビットが通常使用＝デフォルトとなっているとき、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を事業者が選択することができる。 The SIM / eSIM4105-6a and 4105-6b that cooperate with the HSS module 4102-3, which is the terminal information management control module of the MVNO, have an authentication function that issues an encryption key. The authentication method that is remotely selected by default in the application of the operator is specified by SIM / eSIM, or is specified by DIPSW by hardware or software on the terminal. With such a designation, when the setting bit of the authentication method in the wireless standard is normally used = default, the operator can select the authentication method to be used by default.
　なお、複数通りの認証アルゴリズムを物理的にＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ上に実装しておき、外部から選択可能としてもよい。具体的には、３ＧＰＰ対応の無線システムでは通常、デフォルト設定としてＭｉｌｅｎａｇｅが使用されている。このような場合に、例えば、事業者が認証方式指定メッセージを送信し、特殊認証方式を指定したときに、当該メッセージの内容をＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭ４１０５－６ａ、４１０５－６ｂに伝えることで、デフォルトで使用する認証方式を変更できるようにしてもよい。通常の規格では認証方式そのものは多数設定することができないが、上記により、事業者毎に異なる認証方式を実現することができるので、信頼性が高いネットワークシステムを構築できる。 Note that a plurality of authentication algorithms may be physically implemented on the SIM / eSIM so that they can be selected from the outside. Specifically, in a 3GPP compatible wireless system, Milenage is usually used as the default setting. In such a case, for example, when the business operator sends an authentication method specification message and specifies a special authentication method, the content of the message is transmitted to SIM / eSIM4105-6a and 4105-6b, so that it is used by default. The authentication method to be used may be changed. Although it is not possible to set a large number of authentication methods themselves in a normal standard, it is possible to realize a different authentication method for each business operator, so that a highly reliable network system can be constructed.
　ここで、端末４１０５は、ＭＶＮＯ４１０２の情報管理モジュール４１０２－７（図３９）から、定期的または随時に端末４１０５に通知されるグループ通信情報を、アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂで受信する。アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂで受信されたグループ通信情報は、送受信機４１０５－２ａ、４１０５－２ｂ、データ複製・選択モジュール４１０５－３、プロセッサ４１０５－５等を介して、データベース群を含む選択制御モジュール４１０５－９に出力される。選択制御モジュール４１０５－９は、受け取ったグループ通信情報を、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９のデータベース群に分類して蓄積する。なお、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９のデータベース群は、ＭＶＮＯ４１０２の情報管理モジュール４１０２－７（図３９）のデータベース群と概ね同じであり、ネットワークモニタデータベース４１０５－９ａと、端末モニタデータベース４１０５－９ｂと、課金情報用データベース４１０５－９ｃとを含んでいる。 Here, the terminal 4105 receives the group communication information notified to the terminal 4105 periodically or at any time from the information management module 4102-7 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102 by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b. The group communication information received by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b is selected including the database group via the transmitter / receiver 4105-2a, 4105-2b, the data duplication / selection module 4105-3, the processor 4105-5, and the like. It is output to the control module 4105-9. The selection control module 4105-9 classifies the received group communication information into the database group of the selection control module 4105-9 and stores it. The database group of the selection control module 4105-9 is almost the same as the database group of the information management module 4102-7 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102, and the network monitor database 4105-9a, the terminal monitor database 4105-9b, and the database monitor database 4105-9b. It includes a billing information database 4105-9c.
　また、端末４１０５の選択制御モジュール４１０５－９は、ＭＶＮＯ４１０２の情報管理モジュール４１０２－７（図３９）に対して、グループ通信情報要求を送信する。端末４１０５は、当該情報管理モジュール４１０２－７から端末４１０５に通知されるグループ通信情報を、アンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂで受信する。この場合にアンテナ４１０５－１ａ、４１０５－１ｂで受信されたグループ通信情報も、上記と同様に、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９によって、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９のデータベース群に分類して蓄積される。 Further, the selection control module 4105-9 of the terminal 4105 transmits a group communication information request to the information management module 4102-7 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102. The terminal 4105 receives the group communication information notified from the information management module 4102-7 to the terminal 4105 by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b. In this case, the group communication information received by the antennas 4105-1a and 4105-1b is also classified and stored in the database group of the selection control module 4105-9 by the selection control module 4105-9 in the same manner as described above.
　端末４１０５の事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０５－１０及びそれに含まれるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１０ａ、４１０５－１０ｂは、ＭＶＮＯ４１０２の事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０２－６（図３９）及びそれに含まれるＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０２－２、４１０２－４と同様である。端末４１０５の事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０５－１０に含まれる、端末グループ毎のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１０ａ、及び、端末間関連付用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１０ｂは、端末保守機能モジュール４１０５－１１を介して端末保守端末等によって書き込まれる。 The operator request management control module 4105-10 of the terminal 4105 and the MNO selection policy tables 4105-10a and 4105-10b included therein are the operator request management control module 4102-6 (FIG. 39) of the MVNO 4102 and the MNO selection included therein. It is the same as the policy table 4102-2, 4102-4. The MNO selection policy table 4105-10a for each terminal group and the MNO selection policy table 4105-10b for inter-terminal association included in the operator request management control module 4105-10 of the terminal 4105 are the terminal maintenance function module 4105. Written by a terminal maintenance terminal or the like via -11.
　情報管理部である選択制御モジュール４１０５－９は、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９に収集されたグループ通信情報に基づいて、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル４１０５－１０ａ、４１０５－１０ｂのＭＮＯ選択ポリシーに適した、ＭＮＯ及び通信セッションの数の決定、決定された数のＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの選択、並びに、セッションの確立または切り替えを自立的に行う。 The selection control module 4105-9, which is an information management unit, has an MNO suitable for the MNO selection policy of the MNO selection policy tables 4105-10a and 4105-10b based on the group communication information collected in the selection control module 4105-9. And the number of communication sessions is determined, the determined number of MNO networks and sessions are selected, and the sessions are established or switched independently.
　なお、ＭＶＮＯ保守端末は、端末保守機能モジュール４１０５－１１を介して、事業者要望管理制御モジュール４１０５－１０にアクセスして、書き込みまたは読み出しを行ってもよい。また、ＭＶＮＯ保守端末は、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９及びＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭにアクセスして、読み込みまたは書き込みを行ってもよい。このように構成した場合には、選択制御モジュール４１０５－９のＭＮＯ選択制御アルゴリズムの変更や、ＳＩＭ／ｅＳＩＭのサービスに関するパラメータの変更が可能となる。 The MVNO maintenance terminal may access the operator request management control module 4105-10 via the terminal maintenance function module 4105-11 to write or read. Further, the MVNO maintenance terminal may access the selection control module 4105-9 and the SIM / eSIM to read or write. With this configuration, it is possible to change the MNO selection control algorithm of the selection control module 4105-9 and change the parameters related to the SIM / eSIM service.
　＜実施の形態５＞
　実施の形態１の変形例３に係る無線通信システム４００（図６）では、ネットワークシステムが一地域の自然災害等で電気通信サービスが提供できなくなることを回避するために、複数の拠点にＭＶＮＯを分散した。しかしながら、ＭＶＮＯによっては、複数の拠点に分散できない場合や、複数の拠点に分散できても機能の分散が不十分である（特定拠点に障害が発生したときに、他の拠点のサービス提供にも影響が波及する）場合が存在する。また、各ＭＶＮＯにおいて提供するサービスや価格が逐次変更される場合や、ＭＶＮＯとＭＮＯとの接続、及び、同一ＭＮＯの接続を行うＲＡＴ（Radio Access Technology）やローミング先が異なる場合には、ＭＶＮＯの分散は困難である。 <Embodiment 5>
In the wireless communication system 400 (FIG. 6) according to the third modification of the first embodiment, the MVNO is provided to a plurality of bases in order to prevent the network system from being unable to provide the telecommunications service due to a natural disaster in one area or the like. Distributed. However, depending on the MVNO, if it is not possible to distribute to multiple bases, or even if it can be distributed to multiple bases, the distribution of functions is insufficient (when a failure occurs in a specific base, it is also possible to provide services at other bases. There are cases where the impact is spillover). In addition, if the services and prices provided by each MVNO are changed sequentially, or if the MVNO and MNO are connected, and if the RAT (Radio Access Technology) or roaming destination that connects the same MNO is different, the MVNO's Dispersion is difficult.
　そこで、本実施の形態５では、万一、特定ＭＶＮＯでサービスが提供できない状況になったときにでも、各事業者へのサービスに及ぼす影響が最小限になるシステム、通常時においてより低価格なサービスを提供するシステム、または、通常時においてより接続性のよいサービスを提供するシステムについて説明する。 Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, even if the service cannot be provided by the specific MVNO, the system minimizes the influence on the service to each business operator, and the price is lower than usual. A system that provides services or a system that provides services with better connectivity in normal times will be described.
　図４１は、本実施の形態５に係る無線通信システム６０００の例示的な構成を示す図である。本実施の形態５に係る無線通信システム６０００は、実施の形態１の変形例３に係る無線通信システム４００と概ね同じであるため、異なる部分について主に説明する。 FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an exemplary configuration of the wireless communication system 6000 according to the fifth embodiment. Since the wireless communication system 6000 according to the fifth embodiment is substantially the same as the wireless communication system 400 according to the third modification of the first embodiment, different parts will be mainly described.
　本実施の形態５に係る無線通信システム６０００は、第１事業者の端末グループに通信セッションを提供するシステムであり、高信頼性が要求されているシステムである。このため第１事業者は、第１事業者の第１冗長システム６００１ａ、及び、第１事業者の第２冗長システム６００１ｂからなる冗長構成を有している。 The wireless communication system 6000 according to the fifth embodiment is a system that provides a communication session to the terminal group of the first operator, and is a system that is required to have high reliability. Therefore, the first business operator has a redundant configuration including the first redundant system 6001a of the first business operator and the second redundant system 6001b of the first business operator.
　無線通信システム６０００は、第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置６００２ａと、第２拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置６００２ｂとを備える。第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置６００２ａは、複数拠点に分散できないネットワーク装置、または、複数拠点であっても機能分散が不十分である（特定拠点に障害が発生したときに、他の拠点のサービス提供にも影響が波及する）ネットワーク装置であるものとする。そこで、拠点が十分離れており、かつ、機能が独立している第２拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置６００２ｂをさらに設けることによって、冗長なシステムが構成されている。なお、以下の説明では、第１拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置を「第１ＭＶＮＯ」と略記することもあり、第２拠点のＭＶＮＯネットワーク装置を「第２ＭＶＮＯ」と略記することもある。 The wireless communication system 6000 includes an MVNO network device 6002a at the first base and an MVNO network device 6002b at the second base. The MVNO network device 6002a at the first base is a network device that cannot be distributed to multiple bases, or even if there are multiple bases, the functional distribution is insufficient (when a failure occurs at a specific base, the service is provided at another base. It is assumed that it is a network device (which also affects). Therefore, a redundant system is configured by further providing the MVNO network device 6002b of the second base where the bases are sufficiently separated and the functions are independent. In the following description, the MVNO network device of the first base may be abbreviated as "first MVNO", and the MVNO network device of the second base may be abbreviated as "second MVNO".
　第１ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａ及び第２ＭＶＮＯ６０２０ｂは、３つのＭＮＯ（第１ＭＮＯ６００３ａ、第２ＭＮＯ６００３ｂ、第３ＭＮＯ６００３ｃ）のネットワークと接続している。 The first MVNO6002a and the second MVNO6020b are connected to a network of three MNOs (first MNO6003a, second MNO6003b, third MNO6003c).
　図４１の例では、第１ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａ及び第２ＭＶＮＯ６００２ｂの冗長構成を有する無線通信システム６０００を利用する事業者として、第１事業者（第１冗長システム６００１ａ及び第２冗長システム６００１ｂ）が存在している。第１事業者の端末グループとして、第１－１端末６００５ａａ～第１－９端末６００５ａｉの９台が存在している。 In the example of FIG. 41, there is a first operator (first redundant system 6001a and second redundant system 6001b) as an operator using the wireless communication system 6000 having a redundant configuration of the first MVNO 6002a and the second MVNO 6002b. As a terminal group of the first operator, there are nine terminals, 1-1 terminal 6005aa to 1-9 terminal 6005ai.
　これら端末は、例えば、有線ケーブルで第１事業者の第１－１端末接続装置６００７ａａ～第１事業者第１－９端末接続装置６００７ａｉと接続され、無線でそれぞれ基地局を経由して複数のＭＮＯと接続している。各第１事業者の端末接続装置は、第１事業者のアプリケーションを供する装置であり、事業者毎に様々に用いられる。ここでは、第１事業者にとって端末接続装置の重要度が定義されており、第１－１端末接続装置６００７ａａ（重要度：最高）＞第１－２端末接続装置６００７ａｂ＞第１－３端末接続装置６００７ａｃ＞第１－４端末接続装置６００７ａｄ＞第１－５端末接続装置６００７ａｅ＞第１－６端末接続装置６００７ａｆ＞第１－７端末接続装置６００７ａｇ＞第１－８端末接続装置６００７ａｈ＞第１－９端末接続装置６００７ａｉ（重要度：最低）であるとする。 These terminals are connected to, for example, a first operator's 1-1 terminal connection device 6007aa to a first operator's 1st-9th terminal connection device 6007ai by a wired cable, and a plurality of terminals are wirelessly connected via a base station. It is connected to the MNO. The terminal connection device of each first business operator is a device that provides an application of the first business operator, and is used in various ways for each business operator. Here, the importance of the terminal connection device is defined for the first operator, and the 1-1 terminal connection device 6007aa (importance: highest)> the 1-2 terminal connection device 6007ab> the 1-3 terminal connection. Device 6007ac> 1-4 terminal connection device 6007ad> 1-5 terminal connection device 6007ae> 1-6 terminal connection device 6007af> 1-7 terminal connection device 6007ag> 1-8 terminal connection device 6007ah> 1st -9 Terminal connection device 6007ai (importance: lowest).
　実施の形態１の変形例２と同様に、第１事業者の第１冗長システム６００１ａは、第１ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａとの間で指定したある端末グループに対して、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル６００２ａ－２に「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」と設定する。同様に、第１事業者の第１冗長システム６００１ａは、第２ＭＶＮＯ６００２ｂとの間で指定したある端末グループに対して、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル６００２ｂ－２に「高信頼化（接続ＭＮＯの分散設定）」と設定する。テーブルは、伝送路を介して遠隔から設定されてもよいし、ＭＶＮＯ保守端末経由で所要のフォーマットに変換して設定されてもよい。 Similar to the second modification of the first embodiment, the first redundant system 6001a of the first operator has "high reliability" in the MNO selection policy table 6002a-2 for a certain terminal group designated with the first MVNO 6002a. (Distribution setting of connection MNO) ". Similarly, the first redundant system 6001a of the first operator has "high reliability (distributed setting of connection MNO)" in the MNO selection policy table 6002b-2 for a certain terminal group designated with the second MVNO 6002b. And set. The table may be set remotely via a transmission line, or may be converted to a required format via an MVNO maintenance terminal and set.
　これにより、第１事業者の端末グループに属する、第１－１端末 ６００５ａａ～第１－９端末６００５ａｉと接続しているＭＶＮＯが均一化（極力別々のＭＶＮＯと接続）されているかが判断される。そして、当該ＭＮＯが均一化されていないと判断された場合に、切り替え制御モジュール６００２ａ－７、６００２ｂ－７内のネットワークモニタデータベースに格納されている端末の接続情報などに基づいて、当該ＭＶＮＯを均一化するようにＭＶＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えを行う。 As a result, it is determined whether the MVNOs connected to the 1-1 terminal 6005aa to the 1-9th terminal 6005ai belonging to the terminal group of the first operator are uniformed (connected to different MVNOs as much as possible). .. Then, when it is determined that the MNO is not uniform, the MVNO is uniform based on the connection information of the terminals stored in the network monitor database in the switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7. The MVNO network and session are switched so as to be.
　さらに、第１事業者の第１冗長システム６００１ａは、各ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａ、６００２ｂとの間で指定したある端末グループに対して、端末間関連付け用のＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブル６００２ａ－４、６００２ｂ－４に「端末重要度：第１－１端末＞第１－２端末＞第１－３端末＞端末１－４＞第１－５端末＞第１－６端末＞第１－７端末＞第１－８端末＞第１－９端末」と設定する。切り替え制御モジュール６００２ａ－７、６００２ｂ－７は、第１－１端末６００５ａａ～第１－９端末３６００５ａｉが、事業者によって設定された重要度序列の順にＭＮＯに接続されているかを判断する。そして、切り替え制御モジュール６００２ａ－７、６００２ｂ－７は、そのように接続されていないと判断した場合に、ネットワークモニタデータベースに格納されている端末の接続情報などに基づいて、当該端末に接続されるＭＮＯを重要度序列の順に接続するようにＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションの切り替えを行う。なお、上記において、ＭＮＯ選択ポリシーテーブルへの書き込みを行うのは事業者である。 Further, the first redundant system 6001a of the first operator sets the "terminals" in the MNO selection policy tables 6002a-4 and 6002b-4 for inter-terminal association for a certain terminal group designated between the MVNOs 6002a and 6002b. Importance: 1-1 terminal> 1-2 terminal> 1-3 terminal> Terminal 1-4> 1-5 terminal> 1-6 terminal> 1-7 terminal> 1-8 terminal> Set as "1st-9th terminal". The switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7 determine whether the 1-1 terminal 6005aa to the 1-9th terminal 36005ai are connected to the MNO in the order of importance set by the operator. Then, when it is determined that the switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7 are not connected in this way, the switching control modules 6002a-7 and 6002b-7 are connected to the terminal based on the connection information of the terminal stored in the network monitor database. The MNO network and session are switched so that the MNOs are connected in the order of importance. In the above, it is the operator who writes to the MNO selection policy table.
　上記では、第１事業者の第１冗長システム６００１ａの動作について説明した。一方、第１事業者の第２冗長システム６００１ｂの動作は、第１事業者の冗長構成によって異なる。 In the above, the operation of the first redundant system 6001a of the first business operator has been described. On the other hand, the operation of the second redundant system 6001b of the first operator differs depending on the redundant configuration of the first operator.
　例えば、第１事業者の冗長構成がＮ／Ｅ系（両方に接続して障害時にどちらか１方のみが動作）である場合には、第２冗長システム６００１ｂは、図示しない冗長システム間通信を行い、第１冗長システム６００１ａとステータスを合わせるが、各ＭＶＮＯへの指示は行わない。 For example, when the redundant configuration of the first operator is an N / E system (only one of them operates when both are connected and a failure occurs), the second redundant system 6001b performs communication between redundant systems (not shown). The status is matched with the first redundant system 6001a, but no instruction is given to each MVNO.
　また、例えば、第１事業者の冗長構成が０／１系（第１冗長システム６００１ａに接続されている端末は、第２冗長システム６００１ｂに接続されず、逆に、第２冗長システム６００１ｂに接続されている端末は、第１冗長システム６００１ａに接続されない）である場合には、第２冗長システム６００１ｂは、第１冗長システム６００１ａで設定していない端末に対して、第１冗長システム６００１ａが実施したものと同一の設定を行う。この場合、例えば、９台の端末のうち、５台が第１冗長システム６００１ａと接続され、４台が第２冗長システム６００１ｂと接続される。 Further, for example, the redundant configuration of the first operator is 0/1 system (the terminal connected to the first redundant system 6001a is not connected to the second redundant system 6001b, but is connected to the second redundant system 6001b. In the case where the terminal is not connected to the first redundant system 6001a), the second redundant system 6001b is implemented by the first redundant system 6001a for the terminal not set in the first redundant system 6001a. Make the same settings as the one you did. In this case, for example, of the nine terminals, five are connected to the first redundant system 6001a and four are connected to the second redundant system 6001b.
　以上により、例えば、最も重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－１端末接続装置６００７ａａと接続している第１－１端末６００５ａａが、第１ＭＮＯ６００３ａの基地局に接続されて第１ＭＶＮＯ６００３ａと接続されているとき、２番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の第１－２端末接続装置６００７ａｂと接続している第１－２端末６００５ａｂが、第１ＭＮＯ６００３ａとは異なる第２ＭＮＯ６００３ｂの基地局に接続されて第１ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａとは異なる第２ＭＶＮＯ６００２ｂと接続される。また、このときには、３番目に重要度が高い第１事業者第１－３端末接続装置６００７ａｃと接続している第１－３端末６００５ａｃが、第１ＭＮＯ６００３ａ及び第２ＭＮＯ６００３ｂとは異なる第３ＭＮＯ６００３ｃの基地局に接続されて第２ＭＶＮＯ６００２ｂとは異なる第１ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａと接続される。以下同様に４、５、６、７、８、９番目に重要度が高い第１事業者の端末接続装置と接続している端末が、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯ、第１ＭＮＯ、第２ＭＮＯ、第３ＭＮＯの基地局とそれぞれ接続され、かつ、ＭＶＮＯ２、ＭＶＮＯ１、ＭＶＮＯ２、ＭＶＮＯ１、ＭＶＮＯ２、ＭＶＮＯ１とそれぞれ接続される。 As described above, for example, the 1-1 terminal 6005aa connected to the 1-1 terminal connecting device 6007aa of the first operator, which has the highest importance, is connected to the base station of the first MNO6003a and connected to the first MVNO6003a. At this time, the 1-2 terminal 6005ab connected to the 1-2 terminal connecting device 6007ab of the first operator, which has the second highest importance, is connected to the base station of the second MNO6003b different from the first MNO6003a. It is connected to a second MVNO6002b different from the first MVNO6002a. Further, at this time, the first to third terminal 6005ac connected to the first operator 1-3 terminal connecting device 6007ac, which is the third most important, is a base station of the third MNO6003c different from the first MNO6003a and the second MNO6003b. Is connected to the first MVNO6002a, which is different from the second MVNO6002b. Similarly, the terminals connected to the terminal connection device of the first operator having the highest importance of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 are the first MNO, the second MNO, the third MNO, the first MNO, and the second MNO. , MVNO2, MVNO1, MVNO2, MVNO1, MVNO2, MVNO1, respectively, and are connected to the base station of the third MNO.
　例えば、上記第１事業者の端末接続装置の接続の全てが、第１ＭＶＮＯ６００２ａ経由である場合に、第１ＭＶＮＯに特有の大規模障害が発生したとき、第１事業者へのサービス提供が全断となる。これに対して、以上のような本実施の形態５によれば、その影響を低減することができるので、障害時の耐性が強い通信サービスを提供することが可能となる。 For example, when all the connections of the terminal connection device of the first operator are via the first MVNO6002a and a large-scale failure peculiar to the first MVNO occurs, the service provision to the first operator is completely cut off. Become. On the other hand, according to the fifth embodiment as described above, the influence thereof can be reduced, so that it is possible to provide a communication service having a high tolerance in the event of a failure.
　なお、例えば、事業者においてＭＶＮＯ選択を行うポリシー設定を管理制御する管理制御部の代わりに、複数のＭＶＮＯを統合管理制御する機能部（以下、複数ＭＶＮＯ管理制御機能部と呼ぶ）が、当該管理制御を行ってもよい。 In addition, for example, instead of the management control unit that manages and controls the policy setting for selecting the MVNO in the business operator, the function unit that integrates and controls a plurality of MVNOs (hereinafter referred to as the multiple MVNO management control function unit) manages the operation. Control may be performed.
　また、例えば、複数ＭＶＮＯ管理制御部は、ＭＶＮＯ毎の価格情報を管理し、安いＭＶＮＯを選択するようにしてもよい。また、その際、月末支払いであれば、月内に使用される見込みのデータ量を予測する等により、価格が最終的に最も安くなるＭＶＮＯを選択してもよい。 Further, for example, the plurality of MVNO management control units may manage the price information for each MVNO and select a cheap MVNO. At that time, if the payment is made at the end of the month, the MVNO whose price is finally the cheapest may be selected by predicting the amount of data expected to be used within the month.
　また、例えば、複数ＭＶＮＯ管理制御部におけるＭＶＮＯ選択ポリシーとしてＭＶＮＯを特定の割合で分散させる構成も有効である。このような構成によれば、特定ＭＶＮＯ障害発生の影響を低減しながら、価格の安いＭＶＮＯを使用できる。また、例えば、ＭＶＮＯのメンテナンス情報が事前通知されていれば、その時間帯に割当を行わないＭＶＮＯ選択ポリシーが設定されることが望ましい。また、例えば、１つの事業者が複数の端末グループを設定できる構成が望ましい。 Further, for example, a configuration in which MVNOs are distributed at a specific ratio is also effective as an MVNO selection policy in a plurality of MVNO management control units. According to such a configuration, it is possible to use an inexpensive MVNO while reducing the influence of the occurrence of a specific MVNO failure. Further, for example, if the maintenance information of the MVNO is notified in advance, it is desirable to set the MVNO selection policy that does not allocate in that time zone. Further, for example, it is desirable that one operator can set a plurality of terminal groups.
　なお、各実施の形態及び各変形例を自由に組み合わせたり、各実施の形態及び各変形例を適宜、変形、省略したりすることが可能である。 It is possible to freely combine each embodiment and each modification, and appropriately modify or omit each embodiment and each modification.
　上記した説明は、すべての局面において、例示であって、限定的なものではない。例示されていない無数の変形例が、想定され得るものと解される。 The above explanation is an example in all aspects, and is not limited. A myriad of variants not illustrated are understood to be conceivable.
　１００，１１００，３１００，４１００　無線通信システム、１０２，１１０２，３１０２，４１０２　ＭＶＮＯ、１０２－７，３１０５－９　切り替え制御モジュール、１０３ａ～１０３ｃ，１１０３ａ～１１０３ｃ，３１０３ａ～３１０３ｃ，４１０３ａ～４１０３ｃ　ＭＮＯ、１０５，１１０５，３１０５，４１０５　端末、１１０２－７，４１０５－９　選択制御モジュール。 100, 1100, 3100, 4100 wireless communication system, 102, 1102, 3102, 4102 MVNO, 102-7, 3105-9 switching control module, 103a to 103c, 1103a to 1103c, 3103a to 3103c, 4103a to 4103c MNO, 105, 1105, 3105, 4105 terminal, 1102-7, 4105-9 selection control module.

Claims (14)

  1. 　複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末と無線通信を行う無線通信ネットワーク装置であって、
    　端末グループに属する複数の前記無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を保持するデータベースと、
    　前記データベースに保持された前記グループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末毎に１つ以上の前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、前記無線通信端末の前記セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行う情報管理部と
    を備え、
    　前記グループ通信情報は、
    　前記ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び前記複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークで、前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した前記ネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記ネットワークで、前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末の接続情報と、
    　前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末の接続費用に関する情報と、
    　前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される通信回線品質及び通信回線の障害情報と
    の少なくともいずれか１つを含む、無線通信ネットワーク装置。     A wireless communication network device that performs wireless communication with a wireless communication terminal that can connect to the MVNO network in an MVNO network that connects to a plurality of MNO networks.
    A database that holds group communication information that is information related to the communication of a plurality of the wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group, and
    The group communication information held in the database is managed, one or more MNO networks and sessions are selected for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information, and the wireless communication is based on the selection result. It is equipped with an information management unit that controls the establishment or switching of the session of the communication terminal.
    The group communication information is
    With the communication line quality and failure information of the network measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network in at least one of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks. ,
    Connection information of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network in the network.
    Information on connection costs of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group, and
    A wireless communication network device including at least one of communication line quality and communication line failure information notified once or repeatedly from the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group.
  2. 　請求項１に記載の無線通信ネットワーク装置であって、
    　前記情報管理部は、
    　前記グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末毎に選択される前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及び前記セッションの数を決定する、無線通信ネットワーク装置。     The wireless communication network device according to claim 1.
    The information management department
    A wireless communication network device that determines the number of the MNO network and the sessions selected for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information.
  3. 　請求項２に記載の無線通信ネットワーク装置であって、
    　１つの前記無線通信端末に複数の前記セッションが確立されている場合に、前記複数のセッションに同一のデータが送信される、無線通信ネットワーク装置。     The wireless communication network device according to claim 2.
    A wireless communication network device in which the same data is transmitted to the plurality of sessions when a plurality of the sessions are established in one wireless communication terminal.
  4. 　請求項１から請求項３のうちのいずれか１項に記載の無線通信ネットワーク装置と、前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末とを備える、無線通信システム。 A wireless communication system including the wireless communication network device according to any one of claims 1 to 3 and the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group.
  5. 　複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末と無線通信を行う無線通信ネットワーク装置の通信方法であって、
    　データベースが、端末グループに属する複数の前記無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を保持し、
    　情報管理部が、前記データベースに保持された前記グループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末毎に１つ以上の前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、前記無線通信端末の前記セッションの確立または切り替えの制御を行い、
    　前記グループ通信情報は、
    　前記ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び前記複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークで、前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した前記ネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記ネットワークで、前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末の接続情報と、
    　前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末の接続費用に関する情報と、
    　前記端末グループに属する前記複数の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される通信回線品質及び通信回線の障害情報と
    の少なくともいずれか１つを含む、通信方法。     A communication method for a wireless communication network device that performs wireless communication with a wireless communication terminal that can connect to the MVNO network in an MVNO network that connects to a plurality of MNO networks.
    The database holds group communication information, which is information related to communication of a plurality of the wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group.
    The information management unit manages the group communication information stored in the database, selects one or more of the MNO networks and sessions for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information, and uses the selection result as the selection result. Based on this, the establishment or switching of the session of the wireless communication terminal is controlled.
    The group communication information is
    With the communication line quality and failure information of the network measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network in at least one of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks. ,
    Connection information of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session or immediately before the selection of the network in the network.
    Information on connection costs of the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group, and
    A communication method including at least one of communication line quality and communication line failure information notified once or repeatedly from the plurality of wireless communication terminals belonging to the terminal group.
  6. 　請求項５に記載の通信方法であって、
    　前記情報管理部は、
    　前記グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末毎に選択される前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及び前記セッションの数を決定する、通信方法。     The communication method according to claim 5.
    The information management department
    A communication method for determining the number of MNO networks and sessions selected for each wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information.
  7. 　請求項６に記載の通信方法であって、
    　１つの前記無線通信端末に複数の前記セッションが確立されている場合に、前記複数のセッションに同一のデータを送信する、通信方法。     The communication method according to claim 6.
    A communication method in which the same data is transmitted to the plurality of sessions when a plurality of the sessions are established in one wireless communication terminal.
  8. 　複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末あって、
    　前記無線通信端末及び他の無線通信端末は端末グループに属し、
    　前記端末グループに属する前記無線通信端末及び前記他の無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を保持するデータベースと、
    　前記データベースに保持された前記グループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末について１つ以上の前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、前記無線通信端末の前記セッションの確立または切り替えの自立的な制御を行う情報管理部と
    を備え、
    　前記グループ通信情報は、
    　前記無線通信端末で前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び前記複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークから１回または繰り返し通知される前記ネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記ネットワークから１回または繰り返し通知される、前記無線通信端末と同じ前記端末グループに属する前記他の無線通信端末の接続情報と、
    　前記ネットワークから１回または繰り返し通知される、前記端末グループに属する前記無線通信端末及び前記他の無線通信端末の接続費用に関する情報と、
    　前記無線通信端末と同じ前記端末グループに属する前記他の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される、前記他の無線通信端末が測定した通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記無線通信端末と同じ前記端末グループに属する前記他の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される、前記他の無線通信端末が前記ネットワークから受信した通信に関する情報と
    の少なくともいずれか１つを含む、無線通信端末。     In an MVNO network that connects to a plurality of MNO networks, there is a wireless communication terminal that can connect to the MVNO network.
    The wireless communication terminal and other wireless communication terminals belong to the terminal group and belong to the terminal group.
    A database that holds group communication information that is information related to communication between the wireless communication terminal belonging to the terminal group and the other wireless communication terminal, and
    The group communication information held in the database is managed, one or more MNO networks and sessions are selected for the wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information, and the wireless communication is performed based on the selection result. It is equipped with an information management unit that autonomously controls the establishment or switching of the session of the terminal.
    The group communication information is
    Communication line quality and failure information measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session by the wireless communication terminal or immediately before the selection of the network.
    Communication line quality and failure information of the network notified once or repeatedly from at least one network of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks, and
    Connection information of the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the wireless communication terminal, which is notified once or repeatedly from the network, and
    Information on the connection cost of the wireless communication terminal and the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the terminal group, which is notified once or repeatedly from the network, and
    Communication line quality and failure information measured by the other wireless communication terminal, which are notified once or repeatedly from the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the wireless communication terminal, and
    Includes at least one of information about communication received from the network by the other wireless communication terminal, which is notified once or repeatedly from the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the wireless communication terminal. , Wireless communication terminal.
  9. 　請求項８に記載の無線通信端末であって、
    　前記情報管理部は、
    　前記グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末について選択される前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及び前記セッションの数を決定する、無線通信端末。     The wireless communication terminal according to claim 8.
    The information management department
    A wireless communication terminal that determines the number of MNO networks and sessions selected for the wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information.
  10. 　請求項９に記載の無線通信端末であって、
    　前記無線通信端末に複数の前記セッションが確立されている場合に、前記複数のセッションに同一のデータが送信される、無線通信端末。     The wireless communication terminal according to claim 9.
    A wireless communication terminal in which the same data is transmitted to the plurality of sessions when a plurality of the sessions are established in the wireless communication terminal.
  11. 　請求項８から請求項１０のうちのいずれか１項に記載の無線通信端末と、前記他の無線通信端末と、前記ＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて前記無線通信端末及び前記他の無線通信端末と無線通信を行う無線通信ネットワーク装置とを備える、無線通信システム。 Wireless communication is performed between the wireless communication terminal according to any one of claims 8 to 10 and the other wireless communication terminal, and the wireless communication terminal and the other wireless communication terminal in the MVNO network. A wireless communication system including a wireless communication network device.
  12. 　複数のＭＮＯネットワークと接続するＭＶＮＯネットワークにおいて、当該ＭＶＮＯネットワークに接続可能な無線通信端末の通信方法であって、
    　前記無線通信端末及び他の無線通信端末は端末グループに属し、
    　データベースが、前記端末グループに属する前記無線通信端末及び前記他の無線通信端末の通信に関する情報であるグループ通信情報を保持し、
    　情報管理部が、前記データベースに保持された前記グループ通信情報を管理し、当該グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末について１つ以上の前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及びセッションを選択し、当該選択結果に基づいて、前記無線通信端末の前記セッションの確立または切り替えの自立的な制御を行い、
    　前記グループ通信情報は、
    　前記無線通信端末で前記セッションの確立もしくは切り替えの判断直前、または、前記ネットワークの選択直前に測定または検出した通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記ＭＶＮＯネットワーク及び前記複数のＭＮＯネットワークの少なくともいずれか１つのネットワークから１回または繰り返し通知される前記ネットワークの通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記ネットワークから１回または繰り返し通知される、前記無線通信端末と同じ前記端末グループに属する前記他の無線通信端末の接続情報と、
    　前記ネットワークから１回または繰り返し通知される、前記端末グループに属する前記無線通信端末及び前記他の無線通信端末の接続費用に関する情報と、
    　前記無線通信端末と同じ前記端末グループに属する前記他の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される、前記他の無線通信端末が測定した通信回線品質及び障害情報と、
    　前記無線通信端末と同じ前記端末グループに属する前記他の無線通信端末から１回または繰り返し通知される、前記他の無線通信端末が前記ネットワークから受信した通信に関する情報と
    の少なくともいずれか１つを含む、通信方法。     In an MVNO network that connects to a plurality of MNO networks, it is a communication method of a wireless communication terminal that can connect to the MVNO network.
    The wireless communication terminal and other wireless communication terminals belong to the terminal group and belong to the terminal group.
    The database holds group communication information which is information about communication of the wireless communication terminal belonging to the terminal group and the other wireless communication terminal.
    The information management unit manages the group communication information stored in the database, selects one or more of the MNO networks and sessions for the wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information, and based on the selection result. To independently control the establishment or switching of the session of the wireless communication terminal.
    The group communication information is
    Communication line quality and failure information measured or detected immediately before the determination of establishment or switching of the session by the wireless communication terminal or immediately before the selection of the network.
    Communication line quality and failure information of the network notified once or repeatedly from at least one network of the MVNO network and the plurality of MNO networks, and
    Connection information of the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the wireless communication terminal, which is notified once or repeatedly from the network, and
    Information on the connection cost of the wireless communication terminal and the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the terminal group, which is notified once or repeatedly from the network, and
    Communication line quality and failure information measured by the other wireless communication terminal, which are notified once or repeatedly from the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the wireless communication terminal, and
    Includes at least one of information about communication received from the network by the other wireless communication terminal, which is notified once or repeatedly from the other wireless communication terminal belonging to the same terminal group as the wireless communication terminal. ,Communication method.
  13. 　請求項１２に記載の通信方法であって、
    　前記情報管理部は、
    　前記グループ通信情報に基づいて、前記無線通信端末について選択される前記ＭＮＯネットワーク及び前記セッションの数を決定する、通信方法。     The communication method according to claim 12.
    The information management department
    A communication method that determines the number of MNO networks and sessions selected for the wireless communication terminal based on the group communication information.
  14. 　請求項１３に記載の通信方法であって、
    　前記無線通信端末に複数の前記セッションが確立されている場合に、前記複数のセッションに同一のデータを送信する、通信方法。     The communication method according to claim 13.
    A communication method in which the same data is transmitted to the plurality of sessions when a plurality of the sessions are established in the wireless communication terminal.
PCT/JP2020/031945 2019-09-05 2020-08-25 Wireless communication network device, wireless communication terminal, wireless communication system, and communication method WO2021044895A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021543705A JPWO2021044895A1 (en) 2019-09-05 2020-08-25
CN202080061363.XA CN114303418B (en) 2019-09-05 2020-08-25 Wireless communication network device, wireless communication terminal, wireless communication system, and communication method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019162083 2019-09-05
JP2019-162083 2019-09-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021044895A1 true WO2021044895A1 (en) 2021-03-11

Family

ID=74853216

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/031945 WO2021044895A1 (en) 2019-09-05 2020-08-25 Wireless communication network device, wireless communication terminal, wireless communication system, and communication method

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2021044895A1 (en)
CN (1) CN114303418B (en)
TW (1) TWI756808B (en)
WO (1) WO2021044895A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7214030B1 (en) * 2022-10-12 2023-01-27 株式会社インターネットイニシアティブ Method and information processing device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010146713A1 (en) * 2009-06-19 2010-12-23 富士通株式会社 Communication method, manager, and mobile unit
JP5770257B2 (en) * 2008-07-17 2015-08-26 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドＱｕａｌｃｏｍｍ Ｉｎｃｏｒｐｏｒａｔｅｄ Apparatus and method for hosting, selecting, and pricing a mobile virtual network operator (MVNO)
WO2017037845A1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-09 日本電気株式会社 Network node, network system, terminal, network control method, and program
JP2020136961A (en) * 2019-02-21 2020-08-31 富士通株式会社 Network control device and control method

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1839599A (en) * 2003-08-20 2006-09-27 维萨吉移动有限公司 An architecture that enables a mobile virtual network operator (MVNO) to create a branded wireless offering
JP4920564B2 (en) * 2007-11-29 2012-04-18 株式会社日立製作所 Packet communication network and user related information distribution control device
US8675507B2 (en) * 2009-01-28 2014-03-18 Headwater Partners I Llc Service profile management with user preference, adaptive policy, network neutrality and user privacy for intermediate networking devices
US8805323B2 (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-08-12 Tracfone Wireless, Inc. Hybrid network based metering server and tracking client for wireless services
GB201418003D0 (en) * 2014-10-10 2014-11-26 Truphone Ltd System architecture parachute box system HLD
US9736320B2 (en) * 2014-11-14 2017-08-15 Tracfone Wireless, Inc. Wireless access point having metering capability and metering display
CN107637029B (en) * 2015-06-10 2021-09-14 株式会社宙连 Communication system and communication method for providing wireless terminal with access to IP network

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5770257B2 (en) * 2008-07-17 2015-08-26 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッドＱｕａｌｃｏｍｍ Ｉｎｃｏｒｐｏｒａｔｅｄ Apparatus and method for hosting, selecting, and pricing a mobile virtual network operator (MVNO)
WO2010146713A1 (en) * 2009-06-19 2010-12-23 富士通株式会社 Communication method, manager, and mobile unit
WO2017037845A1 (en) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-09 日本電気株式会社 Network node, network system, terminal, network control method, and program
JP2020136961A (en) * 2019-02-21 2020-08-31 富士通株式会社 Network control device and control method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7214030B1 (en) * 2022-10-12 2023-01-27 株式会社インターネットイニシアティブ Method and information processing device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202112166A (en) 2021-03-16
TWI756808B (en) 2022-03-01
JPWO2021044895A1 (en) 2021-03-11
CN114303418A (en) 2022-04-08
CN114303418B (en) 2024-03-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10425530B2 (en) System and method for mobile core data services
US9461729B2 (en) Software-defined network infrastructure having virtual range extenders
US9949138B2 (en) Systems and methods to augment the capacities and capabilities of cellular networks through an unmanned aerial vehicle network overlay
US11134425B2 (en) Network backhaul access
TWI544827B (en) Methods, apparatus, and systems for managing converged gateway communications
CN111262772B (en) Method for arranging node in network environment and node
KR20080016459A (en) System and method for reusing wireless resources in a wireless network
US11909507B2 (en) Using low earth orbit satellites to overcome latency
US20220248321A1 (en) Methods and Apparatus for Transport Context Translation
CN113455027A (en) Method and apparatus for mobile roaming service
WO2021044895A1 (en) Wireless communication network device, wireless communication terminal, wireless communication system, and communication method
JP2015002431A (en) Method and device for accessing multiple radio bearers
US20220256422A1 (en) Notification of Expected Event
US20210306879A1 (en) Redundancy handling in a wireless communication network
JP6315894B2 (en) Method and apparatus for accessing multiple radio bearers
EP2692077B1 (en) Reliability of interference information exchanged among access nodes
JP2015002388A (en) Method and device for accessing multiple radio bearers
Park et al. An architecture of multi-layered SDN based LTE/WiFi network for multi-interface D2D users
WO2022236771A1 (en) Multi-path communication
EP4319225A1 (en) Service-based clustering determination for 5g deployment in factories
US20240089208A1 (en) Systems and methods for cooperative radio function for multiple core networks
US20230261792A1 (en) Apparatus, methods, and computer programs
JP6180182B2 (en) Method and apparatus for accessing multiple radio bearers
EP4147518A1 (en) Network resource allocation for public safety communications

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20861306

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021543705

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20861306

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1